#EDIR DATA#
DOCTYPE='BOOK' PUBLICID='' SYSTEMID='/dtd/docbook.dtd'Utilities ReferenceUtilities ReferenceNovell, Inc.DisclaimerNovell, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with
respect to the contents or use of this manual, and specifically
disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or
fitness for any particular purpose. Further, Novell, Inc. reserves the
right to revise this publication and to make changes to its content,
at any time, without obligation to notify any person or entity of such
revisions or changes.Further, Novell, Inc. makes no representations or warranties
with respect to any NetWare software, and specifically disclaims any
express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any
particular purpose. Further, Novell, Inc. reserves the right to make
changes to any and all parts of NetWare software, at any time, without
any obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes.TrademarksThe following are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.: DR DOS, Fastpath, LAN WorkPlace, LANalyzer, NetWare, NetWare Name Service, Novell Press, UnixWare, WordPerfect.UNIX is a registered trademark of Novell, Inc. in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company, Ltd.The following are trademarks of Novell, Inc.: Advanced NetWare, Enterprise Certified NetWare Engineer, ECNE, EXOS, FirstMail, Global MHS, HSM, Hardware Specific Module, Hot Fix, IPX, IPX/SPX, IPXWAN, Internetwork Packet Exchange, LSL, Link Support Layer, MLI, MLID, MSL, MSM, MacIPX, MacNCP, MacNDS, Media Support Module, Mirrored Server Link, Multiple Link Interface, Multiple Link Interface Driver, NCP, NDR, NDS, NE/2, NE/2-32, NE1000, NE1500T, NE2000, NE2100, NE3200, NE32HUB, NLM, NLSP, NMS, NSE Pro, NTR2000, NVT, NetSync, NetWare 3, NetWare 4, NetWare 4.01, NetWare 4.1, NetWare Application Notes, NetWare Care, NetWare Client, NetWare Core Protocol, NetWare DOS Requester, NetWare Directory Services, NetWare Express, NetWare IPX Router, NetWare Link Services Protocol, NetWare Link/Frame Relay, NetWare Link/PPP, NetWare Link/X.25, NetWare Loadable Module, NetWare Logotype (teeth logo), NetWare MHS, NetWare Management Agent, NetWare Management System, NetWare Message Handling Service, NetWare MultiProtocol Router, NetWare Navigator, NetWare Peripheral Architecture, NetWare Ready, NetWare Requester, NetWare Runtime, NetWare SFT, NetWare SFT III, NetWare Tools, NetWare UAM, NetWare/IP, Netware Notify, Network Support Encyclopedia Professional Volume, Novell Labs, Novell Research Reports, Novell Virtual Terminal, ODI, Open Data-Link Interface, Packet Burst, Personal NetWare, RX-Net, RXNet/2, Red Box, SFT, SFT III, SMS, SPX, Sequenced Packet Exchange, Storage Management Services, Streams, TSM, Topology Specific Module, Transaction Tracking System, TTS, VLM, Virtual Loadable Module, "Yes, It Runs With NetWare Logo", and the "Yes, NetWare Tested and Approved Logo".The following are registered service marks of Novell, Inc.: Novell Technology Institute, NetWire.The following are service marks of Novell, Inc.: Novell Registry, Certified NetWare Administrator, CNA, Certified NetWare Engineer, CNE, Certified NetWare Instructor, CNI, Novell Authorized Service Center, NASC, Novell Technical Support.The following are collective marks of Novell, Inc.: Novell Authorized Reseller, Technical Support Alliance, TSA.3Com, 3+Share, and TokenLink are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.4.3BSD is a trademark of the Regents of University of California, Berkeley.ARCnet is a registered trademark of Datapoint Corporation.AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.AT&T is a registered trademark of American Telephone & Telegraph.Adobe and PostScript are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Apple, AppleShare, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, ImageWriter, LaserWriter, LocalTalk, Macintosh, and MultiFinder are registered trademarks, and Finder and Mac are trademarks, of Apple Computer, Inc.Btrieve is a registered trademark of Btrieve Technologies, Inc.Canon is a registered trademark of Canon, Inc.COMPAQ is a registered trademark of COMPAQ Computer Corporation.Cisco Systems is a trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.Citizen is a registered trademark of Tokei Kabushiki Kaisha.Claris is a trademark and MacWrite is a registered trademark of Claris Corporation.CompuServe is a registered trademark of CompuServe, Inc.DEC, DECnet, and Digital are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.DeskJet, DeskWriter, LaserJet, PaintJet, PaintWriter, and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.Diablo is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.DynaText is a registered trademark of Electronic Book Technologies, Inc.Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.EtherPrint is a trademark of 3Com Corporation.TokenPrint is a registered trademark of Dayna Communications.EtherFlex is a registered trademark of Extended Systems International.GatorBox is a registered trademark of Cayman Systems.Hewlett Packard, HP, HP-GL, LaserJet, and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.Hayes is a registered trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.IBM, OS/2, Micro Channel, ProPrinter, and PS/2 are registered trademarks and AFP, Presentation Manager, and SAA are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.Intel is a registered trademark and Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation.LaserBridge is a registered trademark of Sonic Systems.Lotus is a registered trademark of Lotus Development Corporation.MS-DOS and Microsoft are registered trademarks and LAN Manager is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.MacPlot is a registered trademark of Microspot.NEC, Spinwriter, and Pinwriter are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.NFS is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc.Okidata and MicroLine are registered trademarks of Oki Electric Industry Co., Ltd.PageMaker is a registered trademark of Aldus Corporation.Panasonic is a registered trademark of Panasonic Office Automation.PowerPrint is a trademark of GDT Softworks, Inc.SQL Server is a trademark of Sybase, Inc.SprintTalk is a registered trademark of Digital Products.Ultra is a trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.Unicode is a registered trademark of Transoft Ltd.Word is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.XT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.Xerox is a registered trademark and XNS is a trademark of Xerox Corporation.cc:Mail is a trademark of cc:Mail, a Division of Lotus.All other trademarks, service marks, certification marks, and
collective marks --- registered or not --- are the property of their
respective owners.Copyright Notices© Copyright 1983-1994 Novell, Inc. All rights reserved. No
part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied, stored on a
retrieval system, or transmitted without the express written consent
of the publisher.TYPE="VERT"Novell, Inc.122 East 1700 SouthProvo, UT 84606U.S.A.User Comment FormNovell encourages and welcomes your feedback and suggestions on ways we can improve our manuals. You can help us by sharing your comments and suggestions about how our manuals could be made more useful to you, and about any inaccuracies or information gaps they contain.Submit your comments by printing this User Comment form (click on the icon to display the form, then select "Print" from the "File" menu), filling it in, then faxing or mailing it to us.LABEL="0" FLOAT="0"User Comment FormFILEREF="ucomment.tif"PAGENUM=5 ID="BP1"How to Use This ManualRENDERAS="SECT1"OverviewUtilities Reference gives you essential information about NetWare® utilities. For more information about each utility, see the online help for that utility.For step-by-step instructions to accomplish specific tasks, see 
BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Supervising the Network or other manuals that apply to your task. For information on NetWare terminology and concepts, see BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Concepts.Some new utilities have been included with NetWare 4TM. Some NetWare utilities have been discontinued, while others have been combined with related utilities. For a complete listing of these utilities, see 
BOOK="newftenu" COLLECTION="nw41"New Features.Before you can work effectively with NetWare 4 utilities, you must understand basic information about NetWare Directory ServicesTM. See BOOK="getstenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Introduction to NetWare Directory Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"Your CommentsYou can help us make our products and our documentation easier to use by filling out the User Comments form at the end of this manual or by writing to us atTYPE="VERT"Novell, Inc.Technical PublicationsMS C-23-1122 East 1700 SouthProvo, UT 84606 USAWe appreciate your comments.LABEL="1"PAGENUM=1 ID="BP2"Command SyntaxThe command syntax appears at the beginning of each command line utility. The following MAP example explains syntax conventions:MAP [P | NP] [option] drive:= [drive:|path]LABEL="1-1" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1" Command SyntaxCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="19*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ConventionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MAPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Uppercase words. Type these words as shown. (However, you can use uppercase or lowercase.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[ ]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Square brackets. The item enclosed in brackets is optional: you can enter the command with or without the item.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"|COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Vertical bar (either, or). You can use either item, but not both.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Italicized words. These words are variables. Replace them with the information pertinent to your task.In the MAP example, path or drive: is replaced with the path or drive to be mapped.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[[ ]]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Nested square brackets. The enclosed items are optional, but if you use the items within the innermost brackets, you must also use the items within the outer brackets.>IDXID="w9945"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i832"LABEL="2"PAGENUM=3 ID="BP3"UtilitiesRENDERAS="SECT1"ID="FM98075"ID="FM56807"IDXID="w9946"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i44"
ABORT REMIRRORRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to stop IDXID="w9947"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3736"
remirroring a IDXID="w9948"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2204"
logical IDXID="w9949"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1125"
partition.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"ABORT REMIRROR numberCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of the logical partition you want to stop remirroring.To view a list of disk partitions, execute the MIRROR STATUS command. IDREF="FM78687"See "MIRROR STATUS" on page 133.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExampleTo stop remirroring logical partition 2, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"ABORT REMIRROR 2RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restart remirroringCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM46705""REMIRROR PARTITION" (page 239)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=4 ID="BP4"ID="FM18666"IDXID="w9950"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i81"
ACTIVATE SERVERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to MARK=BULLETLoad the IDXID="w9951"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2543"
MSEngine for the NetWare 4.1 SFT III systemTM.SIDXID="w9952"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i81"IDXID="w9953"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4358"
ynchronize the memory of both SFT III servers.RIDXID="w9954"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i81"IDXID="w9955"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3737"
emirror the disks from one SFT III server to the other. (The SFT III server where you type IDXID="w9956"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3387"
ACTIVATE SERVER becomes the IDXID="w9957"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i81"
primary server.)Execute MSSTART.NCF and MSAUTO.NCF.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IDXID="w9958"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4127"
ACTIVATE SERVER [parameter...]IDXID="w9959"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2551"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-naCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent running the MSAUTO.NCF file you created in INSTALL. This parameter is useful if you are changing commands in IDXID="w9960"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2542"
MSAUTO.NCF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-nsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent executing the MSSTART.NCF file you created in INSTALL. This parameter is useful if you want to change the boot process.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Both (-na -ns)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Load the MSEngine without executing MSAUTO.NCF or MSSTART.NCF.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using ACTIVATE SERVERMARK=BULLETYou must execute MSERVER before using this utility.If the MSAUTO.NCF file does not exist, ACTIVATE SERVER prompts you for an MSEngine name and an IPXTM internal network number.PAGENUM=5 ID="BP5"Putting IDXID="w9961"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i81"
ACTIVATE SERVER in the IOSTART.NCF file might cause synchronization problems.If both servers execute ACTIVATE SERVER simultaneously, the utility might load two separate, unsynchronized MSEngines, and both servers would assume the primary server role.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=6 ID="BP6"ADD NAME SPACE IDXID="w9962"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2585"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w9963"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
store IDXID="w9964"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2966"
non-DOS files (such as IDXID="w9965"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2264"
Macintosh* files) on a NetWare® IDXID="w9966"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
volume. Before you can use this command, you must load a name space module. IDREF="FM24893"See "LOAD" on page 112.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ADD NAME SPACE [name [TO [VOLUME]] volume_name]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display the loaded name spaces.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the name space module you loaded. Supported names areMacintoshOS/2FTAMNFSCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"volume_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the volume you want to store the non-DOS files on.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using ADD NAME SPACEMARK=BULLETYou only need to add a name space to a volume once by using the ADD NAME SPACE command. Each time you mount a volume to which you added a name space (for example, each time you bring up the server), the corresponding name space module is autoloaded.PAGENUM=7 ID="BP7"Since you don't need to add a name space to a volume each time the server comes up, you don't need to put the ADD NAME SPACE command in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file. When name space support is added to a volume, another entry is created in the directory table for the directory and file naming conventions of that name space (file system).RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Adding name space supportCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up a Volume to Store Non-DOS Files" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=8 ID="BP8"ID="FM63433"ATCONIDXID="w9967"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i314"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETMonitor the activity of AppleTalk* network segmentsExamine the configuration of the local AppleTalk routerDiagnose operational problems in network segments that support AppleTalkVerify the connectivity of an AppleTalk router to the rest of the internetworkMonitor the status of AppleTalk Update-based Routing Protocol (AURP)RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD ATCONRENDERAS="SECT2"Using ATCONWhen you load ATCON, an "Available Actions" menu appears. You access ATCON features from this menu.IDREF="FM10514""ATCON Menu Options" on page 9 lists the ATCON options.PAGENUM=9 ID="BP9"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM10514"ATCON Menu OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AURP InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the status of the Internetwork Protocol (IP) Tunnel for AURP and its peers. (Available only if AURP is enabled.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"InterfacesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View addressing information about interfaces directly connected to the AppleTalk router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Log FilesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set logging levels for AppleTalk messages. View NetWare system log and volume log files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Lookup Network EntitiesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Query for services available on the AppleTalk network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Packet StatisticsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View statistics maintained by the AppleTalk router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protocol ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the configuration of the AppleTalk protocol stack. This is a read-only screen.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Routing TableCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the AppleTalk router's Routing Table Maintenance Protocol (RTMP) table. This table lists all destinations the AppleTalk router can reach.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Zones ListCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the list of zones known to this AppleTalk router. This list should be identical to the one displayed by the Macintosh Chooser.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AppleTalk protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="atrefenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare AppleTalk Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AURPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="atrefenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare AppleTalk Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=10 ID="BP10"ID="FM71417"ATOTALIDXID="w9968"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i317"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to total the IDXID="w9969"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i73"
accounting charges on your network.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ATOTAL [destination path\filename] [/C] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"destination path/filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Redirect the output of ATOTAL to a file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through the report of accounting charges.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using ATOTALMARK=BULLETYou must have access to the SYS:SYSTEM directory of the server you want information for. (You can either run ATOTAL from the SYS:SYSTEM directory, or have a search drive mapped to it.)You must have the Supervisor object right on the server.Accounting must be activated before ATOTAL so that ATOTAL has access to the data file accounting creates (NET$ACCT.DAT).Use ATOTAL to display the accounting information for a server. ATOTAL displays the following information for each day:PAGENUM=11 ID="BP11"MARK=BULLETConnect timeBlocks readBlocks stored per dayServer requestsBlocks writtenRENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo redirect the output of ATOTAL to a file named ACCT on C:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"ATOTAL >C:\ACCTTo scroll the display continuously, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ATOTAL /cRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"See VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AccountingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Accounting" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=12 ID="BP12"IDXID="w9970"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2190"IDXID="w9971"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
ID="FM74571"IDXID="w9972"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i343"IDXID="w9973"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i348"IDXID="w9974"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i344"IDXID="w9975"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"
AUDITCONRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to audit network transactions.IDREF="FM12414"Figure 2-1 shows the functions available in the AUDITCON utility.LABEL="2-1" FLOAT="0"ID="FM12414"AUDITCON FunctionsFILEREF="n41ut41a.tif"PAGENUM=13 ID="BP13"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"AUDITCON [/VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.For help with tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using AUDITCONMARK=BULLETIDXID="w9976"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i344"
Use AUDITCON to ensure that transactions are accurate and that confidential information is secure. AUDITCON allows individuals, acting independently of network supervisors and others, to audit network transactions.Auditors can audit NetWare Directory ServicesTM (NDS) events and those events specific to a volume's file system or server.File system auditing is enabled at the volume level; NDSTM auditing is enabled at the container level.Auditors can track network events and activities, but they can't open or modify files (other than audit data and audit history files) unless they are granted appropriate rights by the network supervisor. PAGENUM=14 ID="BP14"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AuditingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Auditing" in Concepts"BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"What Is NetWare Auditing?" in Chapter 8 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting up and using the auditing featureCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Enabling Auditing" in Chapter 8 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Selecting events, users, or files and directories to be auditedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Selecting Items to Audit" in Chapter 8 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting an auditing password for the volumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Passwords" in Chapter 8 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Viewing auditing information in the audit data or history fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Maintaining Audit Files" in Chapter 8 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=15 ID="BP15"ID="FM25939"BINDIDXID="w9977"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i437"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeMARK=BULLETIDXID="w9978"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"
Use at the server console to link a IDXID="w9979"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i700"
communication IDXID="w9980"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3588"
protocol to a IDXID="w9981"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
network board and its 
LAN driver. Unless you link the protocol to the board, the board can't process packets.You can also use either INETCFG or INSTALL to link the network boards and their LAN drivers to the communication protocols. IDREF="FM15428"See "INETCFG" on page 93 or "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading and Binding LAN Drivers" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.Before you bind a protocol to a network board and LAN driver, you must install the network board and load the LAN driver.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"BIND protocol [TO] lan driver | board name [driver parameter...] [protocol parameter...]
PAGENUM=16 ID="BP16"RENDERAS="SECT3"Bind ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the communication protocol.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"lan driver | board nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify either the LAN driver name or the network board name.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"driver parameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Identify a particular network board.If you specified a network board name, you do not need to specify driver parameters.If you specified a LAN driver and your server has more than one instance of the LAN driver loaded, use a driver parameter to specify the particular board the driver is running. For a list of valid driver parameters, see IDREF="FM40590" "Driver Parameters" on page 16.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"protocol parameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the protocol parameters required for the protocol you are binding. See IDREF="FM15465" "Protocol Parameters" on page 18.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM40590"Driver ParametersDepending on your system, one or more of the following parameters can be used to identify a particular board.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DMA=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the DMA channel for the board. Use the same channel number you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FRAME=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the frame type for the board. Use the same type you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"INT=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the interrupt number for the board. Use the same interrupt number you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MEM=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the memory address for the board. Use the same memory address you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PORT=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the I/O port for the board. Use the same I/O port number you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SLOT=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the network board by the lot it was installed in. Use this parameter with microchannel and EISA computers. Specify the same slot number you used when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NODE=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the node address for the board. This is a 12-digit hexadecimal number. PAGENUM=18 ID="BP17"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM15465"Protocol ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protocol/ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"For IPX protocol:NET=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the IPX external network number. This is the number of the cabling system attached to the board. If the board is attached to an existing cabling system, use the same IPX external network number as used by other boards of the same frame type attached to this cabling system. Do not use the same number that was used by boards of a different frame type.If the board is attached to a new cabling system or if it is the first board of its frame type attached to the cabling system, you can enter any hexadecimal number of up to eight digits, as long as the number is different from all other network numbers. (See "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Network numbering" in Concepts.) Remember that all boards of the same frame type attached to the same cabling system must use the same IPX external network number for that cabling system.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"For other protocols:Refer to the documentation that comes with the protocol and consult NetWire® or your Novell Authorized ResellerCM.COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the information required by the particular protocol. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using BINDMARK=BULLETYou may not need to use the BIND command unless you want to add new LAN drivers after the initial server installation. PAGENUM=19 ID="BP18"You can use INSTALL to load LAN drivers and bind them with the IPX protocol or nonrouting TCP/IP or AppleTalk protocols. INSTALL places the BIND commands in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file after you load the LAN drivers. Then each time the server comes up, the LAN drivers are automatically bound to the protocols.You can also use INETCFG to load and bind LAN drivers. INETCFG places the BIND statements in the INITSYS.NCF file. If you use only the IPX/SPX protocol, you can add the BIND statement to the AUTOEXEC.NCF file.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Binding a protocol to a driverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" (page 93)"BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading and Binding LAN Drivers" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Viewing a list of communication protocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM63503""PROTOCOL" (page 221)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading LAN driversCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM24893""LOAD" (page 112)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=20 ID="BP19"ID="FM70229"BRGCONIDXID="w9982"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i513"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to view the following managed objects implemented through Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) on your NetWare for OS/2* bridge:MARK=BULLETBasic bridge configuration informationSpanning tree information for the bridgeTransparent bridging informationPort information and statistics, including spanning tree configuration, source route bridge configuration, and transparent bridge configurationInterfaces tableRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD BRGCONRENDERAS="SECT2"Using BRGCONMARK=BULLETWhen you load BRGCON, an "Available Options" menu appears. You access BRGCON features from this menu.PAGENUM=21 ID="BP20"The menu options are:COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SNMP Access ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select a bridge to monitor.You can monitor the local system (the default), or you can monitor a remote system by using IPX or TCP/IP. You can also set the poll interval to specify how often the information is retrieved through SNMP.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View basic bridge configuration information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Spanning Tree InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View spanning tree protocol information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Transparent Bridging InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View information about transparent bridging, or view the Filtering/Forwarding table.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PortsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a list of active ports for the bridge. (View information about a port by selecting it.)You can also access source route, transparent, and spanning tree per port information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"InterfacesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a list of supported network interfaces. (View information about an interface by selecting it.)BRGCON also lets you set some objects through SNMP, such asMARK=BULLETThe label and priority of the spanning treeThe maximum age, hello time, and forward delay of the spanning tree when it is the root bridgeThe aging time of the transparent bridgeGenerally, the local NetWare node is the target of BRGCON. However, you can access any bridge that implements the Management Information Base (MIB) bridge by using BRGCON. This can be done over UDP/IP or IPX transports.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=22 ID="BP21"ID="FM62510"IDXID="w9983"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i528"
BROADCASTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeThe SEND 
console command has the same functionality as the BROADCAST command from NetWare 2 and 3. (The BROADCAST command is also available in NetWare 4.)IDREF="FM11207"See "SEND" on page 277.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=23 ID="BP22"IDXID="w9984"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3962"IDXID="w9985"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3436"IDXID="w9986"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i586"ID="FM18558"CAPTURERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to set printer and printing parameters for applications' use.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CAPTURE [P=printer | Q=queue] L=number [/option...]  [/? | /VER]RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using CAPTURECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using CAPTURE" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=24 ID="BP23"ID="FM28663"IDXID="w9987"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i596"
CDRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w9988"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
Use at the server console to monitor and administer a IDXID="w9989"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
CD-ROM disc used as a NetWare volume.CD is available only after you have loaded CDROM. If you use CD without CDROM loaded, you will get an "Unknown command" error message. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD [parameter]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HELPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display help information for CD.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOUNTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mount a CD-ROM volume.For more information on using this parameter and its options, IDREF="FM91494"see "MOUNT Parameter" on page 25.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DEVICE LISTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List CD-ROM devices. For more information, IDREF="FM46200"see "DEVICE LIST Parameter" on page 27.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VOLUME LISTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List volumes identified on CD-ROM devices.For more information, IDREF="FM22558"see "VOLUME LIST Parameter" on page 28.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DISMOUNTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dismount a CD-ROM volume. For more information, IDREF="FM43922"see "DISMOUNT Parameter" on page 28.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CHANGECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w9990"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
Change the media in a CD-ROM drive.For more information, IDREF="FM59055"see "CHANGE Parameter" on page 28.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RENAMECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Rename a CD-ROM volume For more information, IDREF="FM80437"see "RENAME Parameter" on page 29.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DIRCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w9991"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
View the contents at the root level of a CD- ROM volume.For more information, IDREF="FM24969"see "DIR Parameter" on page 29COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GROUPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MARK=BULLETIDXID="w9992"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
Assign a group number.List defined groups and their group numbers.For more information, IDREF="FM59055"see "CHANGE Parameter" on page 28.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PURGECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Purge hidden index files created by CD-ROM volumes. For more information, IDREF="FM14117"see "PURGE Parameter" on page 30.PAGENUM=25 ID="BP24"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using CDThe following subsections describe the use of each CD command parameter.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM91494"MOUNT ParameterTo IDXID="w9993"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
mount a CD-ROM volume, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD IDXID="w9994"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
MOUNT [object number] | [volume name] [/name space] [/option...]MARK=BULLETSpecify either the object number or volume name. The mounted CD-ROM volume names must be unique.IDXID="w9995"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
Supported name spaces: NFS and Macintosh. To add Macintosh name space support, use /MAC. To add NFS* name space support, use /NFS.PAGENUM=26 ID="BP25"If the name space module isn't loaded, the volume with the specified name space support won't mount.RENDERAS="SECT3"CD MOUNT Options COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/RCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RebuildIDXID="w9996"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
 the index file for a CD-ROM volume. Use this option when remounting a volume if you are changing its name space support since the last time you mounted it (either adding or deleting name space support).Important: If you don't rebuild the index file, the parameters you used the first time you mounted the volume will be used.If you erroneously enabled block suballocation or turned on file compression and subsequently corrupted the data, use this command to rebuild the volume's index file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mount a volume even if importing errors are found and only some files on the CD-ROM disc are available.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/XCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Exclude one or more directories on the CD- ROM. For example, to exclude the DOS directory that is at the root of the CD-ROM (and any subdirectories beneath it), type MOREINFO="NONE"CD MOUNT 3 /X=DOSCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/G = group numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set default volume group access rights while mounting the volume. To assign access rights to one group, replace group number with the group number. (To view existing group numbers or to set a new group number, use the CD GROUP command.)If you don't set any group access rights for a volume, access rights are granted to group EVERYONE.PAGENUM=27 ID="BP26"When a CD-ROM disc is being mounted or changed, CD-ROM devices are deactivated so device configuration information can be updated.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM46200"DEVICE LIST ParameterThis parameter displays the list of CD-ROM drivers, as shown in IDREF="FM68754"Figure 2-2.LABEL="2-2" FLOAT="0"ID="FM68754"CD ROM Device ListFILEREF="n41ut67a.tif"Devices are listed in groups of 10. If you repeat the command, the next group of 10 devices is listed. The list includes the following information for each device: MARK=BULLETNo. (Media Manager object number): Identifies each CD-ROM volume. The object number is used in the CD MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands. (This number is not the same as the SCSI ID associated with this device or the device number.) The Media Manager object number is hereafter called object number. Act. (Active status): Indicates whether the CD player is active. Device Name: Indicates the number of the device and lists hardware-specific information about the CD player. Vol. (Volume name): Indicates the name of the CD volume that is established when the CD-ROM label is scanned by the device. Mounted: Indicates whether the volume is mounted.PAGENUM=28 ID="BP27"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM22558"VOLUME LIST ParameterTo list volumes identified on IDXID="w9997"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"
CD-ROM devices that the system knows about, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"CD VOLUME LISTVolumes are listed in groups of 10. If you repeat the command, the next group of 10 volumes is listed. The list includes the following for each volume: object number, active status, device name, volume name, and mounted status. For a definition of these terms, IDREF="FM46200"see "DEVICE LIST Parameter" on page 27.The CD VOLUME LIST command doesn't display information for devices that don't have media present.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM43922"DISMOUNT ParameterTo IDXID="w9998"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1142"
dismount a CD-ROM volume, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE" CD IDXID="w9999"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
DISMOUNT [object number] | [volume name]MARK=BULLETSpecify either the object number or the volume name. After CD DISMOUNT is executed, all system resources are returned to the system.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM59055"ID="FM18364"CHANGE ParameterTo change the IDXID="w10000"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2361"
media in a CD-ROM IDXID="w10001"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
drive, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD CHANGE [object number] | [volume name] [/name space] [/option]]MARK=BULLETSpecify either the object number or volume name. Using name space parameters is optional. To add name space support, enter the /MAC or /NFS name space, or use both name spaces. The CHANGE parameter has the same options as the MOUNT parameter. For a description of valid options, IDREF="FM91494"see "MOUNT Parameter" on page 25.PAGENUM=29 ID="BP28"The CD CHANGE command dismounts the volume. Then you are prompted to replace the media.Don't remove a CD that is mounted until you're prompted.After you remove the CD, replace it with a new disc. Wait for it to completely spin up and then press <Enter>.The media is mounted as a NetWare volume with the options you set. RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM80437"RENAME ParameterUse the CD RENAME command when you have multiple CD-ROM discs with the same volume name. The system will not allow you to mount multiple volumes with the same name.To view the names of mounted volumes, use the CD RENAME command with no parameter. You must dismount the volume before you can rename it. To rename the CD-ROM volume, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD RENAME [/D = [object number][new_volume_name]] Enter the object number and the new volume name. This new name is assigned to the volume. To mount a volume that you have renamed, you must use the /R parameter to rebuild its index file. For more information, IDREF="FM91494"see "MOUNT Parameter" on page 25.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM24969"DIR ParameterBefore you can use CD DIR on a volume, you must dismount the volume. CD DIR allows you to view the contents at the root level of a CD-ROM volume. (Each CD-ROM is treated as one volume for NetWare access.) PAGENUM=30 ID="BP29"To view the contents of a root directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD DIR [object number] | [volume name]MARK=BULLETSpecify either the object number or the volume name. Directory entries are listed in DOS format.RENDERAS="SECT3"GROUP ParameterThe GROUP parameter can be used to assign a group number or to view a list of defined groups. To assign a group number, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD GROUP [group name] [group number]MARK=BULLETReplace group name with the group name defined on the directory. Replace group number with a group number (1 through 9). Group EVERYONE is group zero (0). Only one group can have access rights to a volume. The default group is EVERYONE.To list defined groups and their group numbers, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CD GROUPRENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM14117"PURGE ParameterUse the CD PURGE command to purge hidden index files created by CD-ROM volumes. (If you mount many different CD-ROM discs, hidden index files can accumulate and take up disk space.)Dismount all CD-ROM volumes before executing the CD PURGE command.To purge index files for all CD-ROM volumes, type FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"CD PURGE
PAGENUM=31 ID="BP30"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mounting and using a CD- ROM as a volumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using a CD-ROM as a NetWare Volume" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Administering a CD-ROM as a volumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Administering a CD-ROM as a NetWare Volume" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Media commandsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" IDREF="FM29456""MEDIA" (page 130)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Magazine commandsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM54005""MAGAZINE" (page 120)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=32 ID="BP31"ID="FM63855"CDROMRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10002"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
allow a IDXID="w10003"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
CD-ROM disc to function as a NetWare volume.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IDXID="w10004"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i599"
LOAD [path]CDROMCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to CDROM.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using CDROMTreat the CD-ROM as a IDXID="w10005"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
read-only volume. Don't enable block suballocation or use file compression on the volume. These actions corrupt the CD-ROM volume index data. MARK=BULLETCDROM won't load unless you have loaded the NWPA.DSK NPA driver (an I/O device-independent driver that interfaces with the Media Manager).NetWare 4.1 supports CD-ROM volumes mounted with the MAC and NFS name spaces. CDROM supports High Sierra and ISO 9660 formats. It does not support HFS (Apple) file systems. PAGENUM=33 ID="BP32"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CD console commandsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM28663""CD" (page 24)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Administering CD-ROM volumesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using a CD-ROM as a NetWare Volume" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Media commandsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" IDREF="FM29456""MEDIA" (page 130)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Magazine commandsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM54005""MAGAZINE" (page 120)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=34 ID="BP33"ID="FM79441"IDXID="w10006"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i637"
CLEAR STATIONRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to cIDXID="w10007"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i797"
lear a IDXID="w10008"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i639"
workstationIDXID="w10009"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"
 connection. If you use CLEAR STATION while the workstation is in the middle of a transaction or a file update, files might be saved with incomplete data.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CLEAR STATION nCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"nCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the connection number of the workstation you want to clear from the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using CLEAR STATIONMARK=BULLETTo determine the connection number, select "Connection Information" from the MONITOR screen or use NLIST.You can use CLEAR STATION either after a workstation has crashed and left files open on a server or before you need to down the server.CLEAR STATION closes the workstation files and erases the server's internal tables for the station, including drive mappings not saved in the login script. The communication link between server and station is broken.PAGENUM=35 ID="BP34"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Removing server resources from a workstationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Clearing a Workstation Connection" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=36 ID="BP35"ID="FM84216"IDXID="w10010"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i643"
CLIBRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeLoad at the server console before loading a module that requires the CLIB routines and functions.If a module requires CLIB and it is not loaded, the module will usually autoload CLIB.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]CLIBCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to CLIB.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using CLIBMARK=BULLETLoad CLIB before you load the module that uses it.If you receive an error message indicating that a third-party NetWare Loadable ModuleTM (NLM) program is not allowing low-priority processes to run, load the NLM using this option: (CLIB_OPT)/y. This option instructs the system to run lower-priority processes as well as higher-priority processes. The command syntax is:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD third-party NLM (CLIB_OPT)/YThe parentheses are required.IDXID="w10011"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i643"
CLIB requires the STREAMS module. If you don't load STREAMS before CLIB, the operating system loads STREAMS for you. (IDREF="FM39521"See "STREAMS" on page 388.)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=37 ID="BP36"ID="FM97531"IDXID="w10012"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i662"
CLSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10013"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i639"
Use at the server IDXID="w10014"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i800"
console to clear the IDXID="w10015"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
console IDXID="w10016"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3962"
screen. (You can also use OFF to clear the screen.) RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CLSRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=38 ID="BP37"IDXID="w10017"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3962"ID="FM18737"IDXID="w10018"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i677"IDXID="w10019"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i676"IDXID="w10020"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i675"IDXID="w10021"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2397"
COLORPALRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to change the color of menu elements. The following COLORPAL menu shows the elements you can change.FILEREF="n40ut56a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"COLORPAL [/VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.For help with tasks, press <F1> in the utility.PAGENUM=39 ID="BP38"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using COLORPALMARK=BULLETMenu elements set with COLORPAL are saved to the IBM_RUN.OVL file. By default, the IBM_RUN.OVL file is in the SYS:PUBLIC directory.You must have the Write right to the IBM_RUN.OVL file. Therefore, a copy of the file must reside in the directory you run NetWare text utilities from (including the NMENU utility).The colors used by any NetWare text utility are determined by the copy of IBM_RUN.OVL found when the utility executes.You can have multiple copies of IBM_RUN.OVL in multiple directories. Each copy of the overlay file can have different menu element settings, providing different menus with varying color combinations.Unless you set your own color combinations with COLORPAL, the colors set by default, or by the network supervisor, will be the colors displayed by every NetWare text utility you open.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=40 ID="BP39"ID="FM63153"IDXID="w10022"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i737"
CONFIGRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to view the following:MARK=BULLETNetWare server IDXID="w10023"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2803"
name, IDXID="w10024"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2803"
internal IDXID="w10025"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2870"
network number, IDXID="w10026"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2803"
server uptime, and lIDXID="w10027"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"
oaded LAN driversIDXID="w10028"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
Hardware IDXID="w10029"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1638"
settings, IDXID="w10030"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
node (station) addresses, external network number of the IDXID="w10031"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i564"
cabling IDXID="w10032"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2870"
scheme, IDXID="w10033"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
board IDXID="w10034"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
name, frame IDXID="w10035"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
type, and communication protocol for each network boardThe server's Directory tree and bindery contextRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CONFIGRENDERAS="SECT2"Using CONFIGMARK=BULLETBefore installing memory boards, network boards, or host bus adapters, execute CONFIG to see a list of hardware settings already in use by LAN drivers.On some systems, CONFIG may also display information about NetWare Loadable Modules (NLMs). The kind and amount of NLM information depends on the system.PAGENUM=41 ID="BP40"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Internal network numbersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Network numbering" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network numbers for cablingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Network numbering" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Node addressesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Node number" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loadable modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM72734""MODULES" (page 135) and IDREF="FM70828""MONITOR" (page 137)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Configuration information for disk driversCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Load the Disk and CD-ROM Drivers" in Chapter 2 of InstallationIDREF="FM70828""MONITOR" (page 137)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network numbers in use by your serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM77986""DISPLAY NETWORKS" (page 51)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=42 ID="BP41"ID="FM77448"CONLOGIDXID="w10036"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i778"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETCapture all console messages generated at the server while CONLOG is loadedWrite the messages to the SYS:\ETC\CONSOLE.LOG default file (or to another file of your choice)RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD CONLOG [FILE=log filename] [SAVE=backup filename] [MAXIMUM=max file size] [ENTIRE=YES] | HELPCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FILE=log filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the log file you want to use if you don't want CONLOG to write to the default log file (CONSOLE.LOG).The log filename parameter is used with SFT III servers, whose three engines must each write to a different log file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SAVE=backup file nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the filename in which you want to save the preexisting console log.This parameter enables AUTOEXEC.NCF to load CONLOG without overwriting the previous console log. Use this parameter if you want to examine the old console log for troubleshooting purposes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MAXIMUM=max file sizeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum size, in kilobytes, of the log file.If the log file exceeds the max file size, it is deleted---or renamed if backup filename was specified. In either case, logging starts over with an empty log file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"ENTIRE=YESCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Capture the lines already on the screen at the time CONLOG is loaded.Without this parameter, CONLOG starts logging with the next output to the console after it is loaded.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"HELPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a description of each CONLOG command parameter.PAGENUM=43 ID="BP42"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using CONLOGMARK=BULLETYou can view the console log from the Internetworking Configuration utility (INETCFG) or with any text editor. Console messages can reveal errors that occur during system initialization.Do not use EDIT to view the console log while INETCFG is loaded.The command LOAD CONLOG is typically added to the AUTOEXEC.NCF file, as in the following example:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FILE SERVER NAME NETW41_SVR
IPX INTERNAL NET C92556E
LOAD CONLOG
LOAD REMOTE
LOAD RSPX
PAGENUM=44 ID="BP43"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo start capturing console messages during system initialization, type FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD CONLOGTo load CONLOG but save the current log file as CLOG.BAK and limit the size of CONSOLE.LOG to 100 KB, type FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD CONLOG SAVE=CLOG.BAK MAXIMUM=100To stop capturing console messages, type FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UNLOAD CONLOGRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"INETCFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" (page 93)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=45 ID="BP44"IDXID="w10037"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3876"IDXID="w10038"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3042"IDXID="w10039"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"ID="FM37616"CXIDXID="w10040"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i907"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to IDXID="w10041"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"
view or IDXID="w10042"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"
change your context, or to IDXID="w10043"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"IDXID="w10044"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i806"
view containers and IDXID="w10045"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2097"
leaf objects in your tree structure.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX [new context] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ToVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the current context.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"new contextCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Move to a new context or specify the context you want for an option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. See "CX Options."COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using CXMARK=BULLETCX is similar to the DOS CD and DIR commands in that CX allows you to change contexts and view all objects below a given container.CX doesn't recognize spaces in object names. If you have spaces in container names, put quotation marks around the names or use underscores (_) in place of the spaces. For example, for container CORPORATE ADMIN, type "Corporate Admin" or Corporate_Admin.PAGENUM=46 ID="BP45"You may need to use CX before logging in to set your context to the same value as the name context specified in your NET.CFG file.RENDERAS="SECT3"CX OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/RCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List containers at the root level, or change context in relation to the root.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/TCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List containers below the current context or a specified context in a tree structure.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CONTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List containers at the current context or a specified context in a vertical list with no structure.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ACOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Include all objects at or below the context. Use with /T or /CONT.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through output.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo see your context in the IDXID="w10046"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"
Directory before logging in, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CXTo IDXID="w10047"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"
set a new context from the rootMARK=BULLETPlace a period in front of the new context you type, orEnter the proper number of trailing periods to reach the root level, orUse the /R option.To back up one level in the Directory tree, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX . (You must put a space between the command and the trailing period.)PAGENUM=47 ID="BP46"To go down two levels from PROVO.NOVELL to SYSTEM.ENGINEERING. PROVO.NOVELL, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX SYSTEM.ENGINEERINGTo change your current context from TESTING. PROVO.NOVELL.US to SYSTEM.MARKETING. PROVO.NOVELL.US, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX .SYSTEM.MARKETING.PROVO.NOVELL.US orFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX SYSTEM.MARKETING.To change to the root when your context is TEST.PROVO.NOVELL, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX . . . orFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX /RTo change the complete context from TESTING. PROVO.NOVELL to TESTING.PARIS.NOVELL, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX .TESTING.PARIS.NOVELLTo show all containers in the current context, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX /CONTTo show all containers in the context SALES.NOVELL in a tree structure, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX .SALES.NOVELL /TTo show all containers and leaf objects in the current context in a tree structure, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"CX /T /A
PAGENUM=48 ID="BP47"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ContextCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Context" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Root objectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Root object" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=49 ID="BP48"ID="FM77915"IDXID="w10048"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1099"
DISABLE LOGIN IDXID="w10049"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2208"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10050"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1101"
prevent IDXID="w10051"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2801"
users from IDXID="w10052"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2190"
logging in.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DISABLE LOGINRENDERAS="SECT2"Using DISABLE LOGINMARK=BULLETUse this command to prevent users from logging in when you are making repairs, backing up files, or loading software.Users already logged in aren't affected. However, a user who logs out can't log in again until you execute ENABLE LOGIN. (IDREF="FM30693"See "ENABLE LOGIN" on page 64.)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=50 ID="BP49"ID="FM88394"IDXID="w10053"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1100"ID="FM73905"IDXID="w10054"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1139"ID="FM80153"IDXID="w10055"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1141"
DISMOUNTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10056"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1142"
Use at the server console to make a IDXID="w10057"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
volume unavailable to users.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DISMOUNT volume nameCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"volume nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the volume you want to dismount.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using DISMOUNTMARK=BULLETDISMOUNT allows you to maintain or repair a volume and to upgrade disk drivers while the NetWare server is up.Use this command to unmount all volumes residing on a removable drive before you remove the drive. If you are running out of memory and can't add more RAM, consider dismounting a volume that isn't used often. Mounted volumes take up memory allocated for file caching and thus affect server performance. You can also use INSTALL to dismount a volume.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dismounting a volumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Mounting and Dismounting Volumes" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=51 ID="BP50"DISPLAY NETWORKSID="FM77986"IDXID="w10058"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1147"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to list all IDXID="w10059"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
networks and assigned IDXID="w10060"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2870"
network IDXID="w10061"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1149"
numbers that the NetWare IDXID="w10062"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
server's internal router IDXID="w10063"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1683"
recognizes.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DISPLAY NETWORKSRENDERAS="SECT2"Using DISPLAY NETWORKSDISPLAY NETWORKS lists the IPX external network numbers of networks recognized by your server. The following example illustrates a portion of the command display:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"0000000D 2/3 00000016 5/11 00000070 5/11  00000097 6/12 000000ED 5/6 000000F1 3/3  000000FF 2/2 00000101 6/11 00000111 5/11  000003E8 5/11 00000456 6/12 00000666 5/17 Each address is followed by two numbers separated by a slash. The first number is the number of hops between your server and the network at that address. The second number is the number of ticks (1/18th of a second) required to send a packet to that address. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Listing servers on the networkCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM65917""DISPLAY SERVERS" (page 52)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=52 ID="BP51"DISPLAY SERVERSID="FM65917"IDXID="w10064"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1148"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10065"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"
Use at the IDXID="w10066"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4061"
server console to view a list of all IDXID="w10067"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1149"
servers and IDXID="w10068"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1683"IDXID="w10069"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3943"
services being advertised by Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) packets. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DISPLAY SERVERSRENDERAS="SECT2"Using DISPLAY SERVERSMARK=BULLETDISPLAY SERVERS lists server address names for services such asTYPE="VERT"File servicesNetWare Directory Services (NDS)Print servicesStorage Management ServicesTM (SMS) Services for Structured Query Language (SQL) serversThe following illustrates a line of a typical display:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"00001B040064 3 00001B040CF4 3 00001B04303D 3  The number listed after the server name indicates the number of hops between your server and the listed server. Your server is indicated by 0 hops.Servers more than 16 hops away aren't recognized.DISPLAY SERVERS also displays Directory trees and network addresses. A server can be displayed many times, once for each service that it advertises. For example, all NetWare 4 servers are listed at least two times because they advertise file services and NetWare Directory Services.PAGENUM=53 ID="BP52"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Listing networksCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM77986""DISPLAY NETWORKS" (page 51)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Service advertisingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Service Advertising Protocol" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=54 ID="BP53"DOMAINID="FM58192"IDXID="w10070"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1174"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETProtect server memory by cIDXID="w10071"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3587"
reatingIDXID="w10072"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
 an IDXID="w10073"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1171"
OS IDXID="w10074"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3125"
domain and IDXID="w10075"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
an IDXID="w10076"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3143"
OS_PROTECTED domainView the current domain and modules in the domain, change the current domain, or permit some misbehaved modules to be loadedDOMAIN will not load on a NetWare for OS/2 server. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxTo load DOMAIN, use the following command:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path] DOMAIN [parameter]DOMAIN.NLM must be loaded from your STARTUP.NCF file before you load other modules, and you must have the following files in your boot directory: DOMAIN.NLM, NWTIL.NLM, NWTILR.NLM, and DOMAIN.MSG.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to DOMAIN.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-ECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Give misbehaved modules access to data that exists in the code segment in memory. (This parameter should be used only by advanced system administrators.)For details on using this parameter, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading a Misbehaved NLM" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.If you use this parameter, modules subsequently loaded in the OS_PROTECTED domain will use this method of memory management by allowing access to the code segment using the data segment register.PAGENUM=55 ID="BP54"After you load DOMAIN, the following commands are valid:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DOMAIN [parameter]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the current domain and the modules in the domain, followed by other domains and their modules.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"helpCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"domain nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10077"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1171"
Change the current domain. Replace domain name with the name of the domain you want to be the current domain (OS or OS_PROTECTED).Note: The current domain is where the loader places a module.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using DOMAINMARK=BULLETThe OS and OS_PROTECTED domains are created when you load DOMAIN. PAGENUM=56 ID="BP55"When you load DOMAIN, the following files are also loaded: NWTIL.NLM and NWTILR.NLM. To reclaim memory, unload NWTIL once your server is up and all your modules are loaded. NWTIL is only used while modules are being loaded. If you have an NLM that is not certified by Novell®, you might want to load it in the OS_PROTECTED domain. Then, after it has proven reliable, it can be run in the OS domain.A related command provides an alternate method for loading a misbehaved NLM by placing the NLM code in the data segment. The command syntax is:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD -L nlm_nameUnlike the -E parameter used with the LOAD DOMAIN command, this method affects memory management only for the NLM you load with the parameter.For more information, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading a Misbehaved NLM" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network and IDREF="FM24893""LOAD" (page 112). RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10078"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1171"
ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"Load a Third-Party ModuleTo load EXAMPLE.NLM (a third-party module) and give it access to data that exists in the code segment in memory:PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"In STARTUP.NCF, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD DOMAIN -EPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Reboot the server.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"At the server console, type
FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DOMAIN=OS_PROTECTED
FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD EXAMPLE
PAGENUM=57 ID="BP56"RENDERAS="SECT3"Load EDIT in a Protected DomainPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"In STARTUP.NCF, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD DOMAINPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Reboot the server.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"At the server console, type
FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DOMAIN=OS_PROTECTED
FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD EDITRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protecting a server's OS memoryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Protecting the Operating System's Memory" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading misbehaved modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading a Misbehaved NLM" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DomainsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Domains" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Memory protectionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Memory protection" in Concepts."BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Paging" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=58 ID="BP57"ID="FM79757"DOSGENIDXID="w10079"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1198"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to boot a DOS workstation from remote boot image files on the server (rather than booting from a local drive).RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DOSGEN [/? | /VER] You must first load RPL on the server and bind it to the network board. See "BOOK="ws_d1enu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up RPL Support" Chapter 6 of the NetWare Client for DOS and MS Windows User Guide.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Creating remote boot image files. COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="ws_d1enu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating Remote Boot Disk Image Files" in Chapter 6 of NetWare Client for DOS and MS Windows User Guide.RENDERAS="SECT1"DOWNPAGENUM=59 ID="BP58"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM18636"IDXID="w10080"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1212"
PurposeUse at the server console to ensure data integrity before IDXID="w10081"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4610"
turning IDXID="w10082"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3363"
off IDXID="w10083"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2801"
power to the IDXID="w10084"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1214"
NetWare server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DOWNRENDERAS="SECT2"Using DOWNMARK=BULLETDOWN ensures data integrity by writing cache buffers to disk, closing files, and updating Directory tables and File Allocation Tables.Changes held in cache buffers are lost if you turn off power without using DOWN first.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Downing the NetWare serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Bringing Down a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restarting the serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM55915""RESTART SERVER" (page 251)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=60 ID="BP59"ID="FM49594"IDXID="w10085"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1251"
DSMERGERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to MARK=BULLETMIDXID="w10086"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2407"
erge the IDXID="w10087"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3876"
roots of two IDXID="w10088"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i680"
separate NetWare Directory Services (NDS) IDXID="w10089"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"
treesRename a tree to verify that all servers in the tree are responding properly and have the same tree nameView time synchronization information and display the time server for all servers in the treeRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]DSMERGECOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to DSMERGE.NLM if you moved it from the default directory of SYS:SYSTEM.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Configuring time synchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the NetworkCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Merging partitionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Merging Partitions" in Chapter 5 of Supervising the NetworkCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Moving leaf objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Moving Objects in the Directory Tree" in Chapter 5 of Supervising the NetworkCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using DSMERGE COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Merging NDS Trees" in Chapter 5 of Supervising the NetworkRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=61 ID="BP60"ID="FM14989"DSREPAIRIDXID="w10090"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1254"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10091"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2717"repair and correct problems in the NetWare IDXID="w10092"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3785"
Directory database, such as records, schema, bindery objects, and external references.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path] DSREPAIR [-U]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to DSREPAIR.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-UCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Instruct DSREPAIR to run and exit, and then unload from memory, without further user assistance.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReferenceVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using DSREPAIRCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Repairing the NetWare Directory Database" in Chapter 5 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=62 ID="BP61"ID="FM99843"IDXID="w10093"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1288"
EDITRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to create IDXID="w10094"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"
or IDXID="w10095"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4470"
modify a IDXID="w10096"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4470"
text IDXID="w10097"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
file on either a DOS or NetWare partition.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]EDITCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to EDIT.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"file_pathnameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the pathname of the file you want to edit.file_pathnameRENDERAS="SECT2"Using EDITMARK=BULLETIf you do not enter a file pathname when you load EDIT, EDIT prompts you for the filename. If the file doesn't exist, EDIT displays a prompt asking if the file should be created.When you create a new file, the file can be no larger than 8 KB. Each time you open the file after that, you can increase the file size by up to 4 KB.You can use EDIT to view read-only files. EDIT is particularly useful for creating .NCF IDXID="w10098"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4264"
batch IDXID="w10099"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i418"
files that automatically execute server commands.PAGENUM=63 ID="BP62"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing or creating text filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Editing Text Files from the Server Console" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=64 ID="BP63"ID="FM30693"IDXID="w10100"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1311"
ENABLE LOGINRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to reenable the IDXID="w10101"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2208"
login IDXID="w10102"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2190"
function or to enable the administrator's account when the account has been locked by the intruder detection function.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ENABLE LOGINRENDERAS="SECT2"Using ENABLE LOGINYou don't need to use ENABLE LOGIN when you boot the NetWare server. The login function is enabled during the boot process.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=65 ID="BP64"ID="FM62743"IDXID="w10103"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1316"
ENABLE TTSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10104"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1317"
start the IDXID="w10105"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
Transaction Tracking SystemTM
(TTS) in the network server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ENABLE TTSRENDERAS="SECT2"Using TTSNormally, TTSTM is enabled. Use ENABLE TTS only if the TTS has been disabled, automatically or manually. Do not ever disable TTS intentionally because this will prevent updates to the NetWare Directory ServicesIDXID="w10106"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
 replicas on the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enabling TTSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Protecting Database Integrity with TTS" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TTS descriptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Transaction Tracking System" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TTS$LOG.ERR fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Keeping a Log of Backed-Out Data" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=66 ID="BP65"ID="FM25131"IDXID="w10107"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1381"
EXITRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10108"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3847"
return to IDXID="w10109"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1181"
DOS after you down a IDXID="w10110"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2801"
network server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"EXITRENDERAS="SECT2"Using EXITYou must use the DOWN command to down the server before using EXIT.MARK=BULLETEXIT allows you to access DOS files or to rerun SERVER.EXE with new parameters. If you have removed DOS from the server, using EXIT IDXID="w10111"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i499"IDXID="w10112"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4814"
reboots the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Returning to DOS after downing the serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Bringing Down a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restarting the server without rebooting itCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM55915""RESTART SERVER" (page 251)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bringing down the serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM18636""DOWN" (page 59)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Warm booting the server with EXITCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM21937""REMOVE DOS" (page 245)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=67 ID="BP66"IDXID="w10113"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3771"IDXID="w10114"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3972"IDXID="w10115"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4312"IDXID="w10116"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4312"IDXID="w10117"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1483"IDXID="w10118"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i609"
ID="FM48071"ID="FM57900"IDXID="w10119"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10120"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i609"IDXID="w10121"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"IDXID="w10122"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i887"IDXID="w10123"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"IDXID="w10124"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1091"IDXID="w10125"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1071"IDXID="w10126"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1392"IDXID="w10127"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"IDXID="w10128"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"IDXID="w10129"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10130"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10131"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10132"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10133"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2525"IDXID="w10134"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2525"IDXID="w10135"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2496"
FILERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to manage files and directories. FILER works with the file system; it doesn't affect NetWare Directory Services objects.The IDREF="FM71546"Figure 2-3 shows the functions of FILER.LABEL="2-3" FLOAT="0"ID="FM71546"FILER FunctionsFILEREF="n41ut55a.tif"PAGENUM=68 ID="BP67"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FILER [/VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.For help with tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> while you are in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using FILERThis section describes features of FILER and explains how to use them.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10136"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i534"
Using the Browse ScreenBy selecting different items in a list, you can either view or edit an item, or you can select a different level of the directory structure to view or edit. IDREF="FM83604"Figure 2-4 shows the main tasks you can perform from the browse screen.PAGENUM=69 ID="BP68"LABEL="2-4" FLOAT="0"ID="FM83604"The Browse ScreenFILEREF="n41ut61a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10137"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1464"IDXID="w10138"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10139"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1091"IDXID="w10140"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"IDXID="w10141"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1058"IDXID="w10142"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4595"
Managing File or Directory InformationEach file and directory can be managed separately. IDREF="FM35126"Figure 2-5 displays the various areas you can view or edit.PAGENUM=70 ID="BP69"LABEL="2-5" FLOAT="0"IDXID="w10143"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10144"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"ID="FM35126"File InformationFILEREF="n41ut62a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10145"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"IDXID="w10146"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3839"IDXID="w10147"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3828"
Restoring Deleted Files or DirectoriesIDXID="w10148"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
To restore deleted files and directories, from the initial menu choose "Salvage Deleted Files." You can restore only those files you have the Create right for.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10149"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2496"IDXID="w10150"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"
Modify File or Directory AttributesPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Files and Directories."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Highlight the file or directory whose attributes you want to modify. Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View/Set File (Directory) Information."
PAGENUM=71 ID="BP70"PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <Enter> on "Attributes."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10151"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
View Volume InformationPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Select Current Directory."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Highlight the volume whose information you want to view. Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View volume information."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10152"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1071"
View File or Directory Effective RightsPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage files and directories."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Highlight the file or directory whose effective rights you want to view. Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View/Set File (Directory) Information."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Find "Current Effective Rights" on the form.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Copy a File or All Files in a DirectoryPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage files and directories."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Highlight the file or directory whose effective rights you want to view. Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View/Set File (Directory) Information."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Find "Current Effective Rights" on the form.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.
PAGENUM=72 ID="BP71"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10153"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"IDXID="w10154"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3643"
Purge Deleted FilesPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Type FILER.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Purge deleted files."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10155"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3940"IDXID="w10156"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"IDXID="w10157"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"
Salvage Deleted FilesPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Type FILER.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Salvage deleted files."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory attributesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"File attributesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Hidden attributeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=73 ID="BP72"IDXID="w10158"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1494"ID="FM77360"IDXID="w10159"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"IDXID="w10160"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"
FILTCFGRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to set up and configure filters for IPX, TCP/IP, and AppleTalk protocols.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD FILTCFGRENDERAS="SECT2"Using FILTCFGFilters help you control what kind of information is sent and received by a router by selectively discarding packets of specified types. Filters help you to limit specific kinds of traffic to a certain part of your network, or to provide security.NetWare 4.1 provides the following filter types:MARK=BULLETPacket forwardingService informationRouting informationThe following table shows filtering support for protocols:COLS=4 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=4 COLWIDTH="6*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ProtocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Packet Forwarding FilterCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Service Information FilterCOLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Routing Information FilterVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPXCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XCOLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AppleTalkCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XCOLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TCP/IPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XPAGENUM=74 ID="BP73"RENDERAS="SECT3"Packet Forwarding FiltersPacket forwarding filters restrict access to services by filtering data packets sent by the restricted location to the service location. Because these filters don't restrict Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) packets sent by servers, restricted users might see advertisements of services even when they cannot access the service.Although these filters provide the highest level of security of all the filters, they might affect the performance of the router because the filters are applied to each data packet the router receives.RENDERAS="SECT3"Service Information FiltersService information filters restrict service advertisement on a router's internetwork. This type of filtering provides low-level security by preventing users from finding the network addresses of services.It also reduces the network bandwidth consumed by periodic service broadcasts.Service information filters are of two types:MARK=BULLETService advertisement filters limit the service advertisements sent by a router for a specified set of services to a specified set of networks.Service acceptance filters limit the acceptance of service advertisements received by the router for a specified set of services at a specified set of networks. (By filtering what a router sees, you are restricting the set of services that are advertised by the router on any other interface.)RENDERAS="SECT3"Routing Information FiltersRouting information filters restrict the exchange of routing information between routers by limiting the routes added to the routing tables of specified routers. PAGENUM=75 ID="BP74"These filters increase network security by limiting the visibility of specified networks. They also reduce the bandwidth used by the periodic exchange of routing information between routers.Routing information filters are of two types:MARK=BULLETRoute advertisementRoute acceptanceWhen you add a routing information filter, an implicit server filter is also added for all services residing on the filtered networks. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ipxrtenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare IPX Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AppleTalk protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="atrefenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare AppleTalk Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=76 ID="BP75"ID="FM28275"FLAGRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10161"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10162"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"
View or modify file and IDXID="w10163"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"
directory attributes to determine which operations can be performed with the file or directoryIDXID="w10164"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"IDXID="w10165"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1091"
Modify the owner of a file or directoryView or modify the search mode of executable files to determine how the program uses search drives when looking for a fileRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FLAG path [[+ | -] attribute...] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"If you type FLAG with no parameters, the attribute status of all the files in the current directory appears.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to the file or directory whose attributes or search modes you want to modify.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"+ | -COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Add attributes to a file or directory with the + (plus). Remove attributes from a file or directory with the - (minus).If neither + nor - is used, the attributes will be assigned to the file/directory as specified.If you add and remove attributes in the same command, group all + (plus) attributes together and all - (minus) attributes together.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"attributeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify one or more file or directory attributes.IDREF="FM89271"See "Directory Attributes" on page 78 and IDREF="FM37945""File Attributes" on page 79.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM47134"See "General FLAG Options" on page 78.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=77 ID="BP76"For help with tasks, press <F1> in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using FLAGMARK=BULLETUse FLAG options to add or delete directory and file attributes, as defined in the preceding parameters table.For attributes that can be applied to directories, IDREF="FM89271"see "Directory Attributes" on page 78.For attributes that can be applied to files, IDREF="FM37945"see "File Attributes" on page 79.IDXID="w10166"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10167"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10168"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"IDXID="w10169"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"IDXID="w10170"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"
When you add or delete multiple attributes, include a space between attribute abbreviations.You can't remove the Execute Only attribute. You must delete the file and then reinstall it.You can use wildcard characters.PAGENUM=78 ID="BP77"RENDERAS="SECT3"GeneralID="FM47134"FLAG Options COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NAMECLASS=OPTION MOREINFO="NONE" | GROUPCLASS=OPTION MOREINFO="NONE" = nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Change the owner of a file or directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/DCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View details about a file or directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/DOCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or modify only directories in the specified path.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/FOCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or modify only files in the specified path.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/OWNER=nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View all files or directories owned by a user.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/M=modeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Modify search modes of executable files. IDREF="FM85291"See "Search Modes for Executable Files" on page 81.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" /SCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search the subdirectory in the specified path and any subdirectories below that level.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" /CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through output.IDXID="w10171"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1376"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM89271"
Directory AttributesCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ALLCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the Di, H, Ic, P, Ri, and Sy attributes as a group. Primarily used to assign directories these specific attributes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Di (Delete Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the directory from being deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dc (Don't Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the directory from being compressed (regardless of what the volume is set to).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dm (Don't Migrate)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the directory from being migrated to a secondary backup system (regardless of what the volume is set to).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"H (Hidden)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the directory from being seen with a DOS DIR command.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ic (Immediate Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Compress the directory as soon as the OS can.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"N (Normal)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify no attributes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"P (Purge)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Purge the directory immediately when the directory is deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ri (Rename Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the directory from being renamed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sy (System)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the directory from being seen with a DOS DIR command; also to prevent it from being copied or deleted.PAGENUM=79 ID="BP78"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM37945"File AttributesCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ALLCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the A, Ci, Di, H, Ic, P, Ri, Ro, Sh, Sy and T attributes as a group. Primarily used to assign files these specific attributes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A (Archive needed)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Indicate that the file has been modified since the last backup.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ci (Copy Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent files from being copied. (Only for MAC files.) COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dc (Don't Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being compressed (regardless of what the volume or directory is set to).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Di (Delete Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being deleted or copied over.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dm (Don't Migrate)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being migrated to a secondary backup system (regardless of what the volume or directory is set to).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ds (Don't Suballocate)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent an individual file from being suballocated, even if suballocation is enabled for the system. Use on files which are enlarged or appended to frequently, such as certain database files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"H (Hidden)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a filename from being displayed with the DOS DIR command. The file can't be copied or deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ic (Immediate compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Compress a file as soon as the OS can.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"N (Normal)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the Rw attribute.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"P (Purge)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Purge a file immediately if the file is deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ri (Rename Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being renamed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ro (Read Only)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow a file to only be read; it can't be written to or deleted (in other words, Ro includes Ri and Di).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Rw (Read Write)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow a file to be read and written to.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sh (Shareable)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow a file to be used by several users simultaneously.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sy (System)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a filename from being displayed with the DOS DIR command. It can't be copied or deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"T (Transactional)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protect a file by using the Transaction Tracking SystemIDXID="w10172"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"
.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"X (Execute Only)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being copied or copied over. This attribute can be given only to .EXE or .COM files, and cannot be removed.PAGENUM=81 ID="BP79"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM85291"IDXID="w10173"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3979"IDXID="w10174"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3979"
Search Modes for Executable FilesThe syntax is /M=mode. Replace mode with a mode number from the following tableID="FM57822".COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ModeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"0 COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search for instructions in the NET.CFG file (the default mode).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1 COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search the path specified in the file. If there is no path, the file searches the default directory, and then all search drives.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"2 COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search the path specified in the file. If there is no path, the file searches only the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"3 COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search the path specified in the file. If there is no path, the file searches the default directory; then if the open request is read only, the file searches the search drives.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"4 COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reserved; don't use.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"5COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"First search the path specified and then all search drives. If there is no path, the file searches the default directory and then all search drives.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"6COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reserved; don't use.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"7 COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"First search the path specified. If the open request is read only, the file searches the search drives. If there is no path, the file searches the default directory and then all search drives.PAGENUM=82 ID="BP80"RENDERAS="SECT3"Status FlagsStatus flags show attribute information for a file or directory. You can't change these flags.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatusCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IndicatesVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cc (Can't Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The file can't be compressed because of limited space savings.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Co (Compressed)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The file has been compressed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"M (Migrated)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The file has been migrated.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo add Rw and Ic and remove Di and A from all files in the current directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FLAG *.* +R W Ic -Di ATo view attributes for file STUDENTS in directory SYS:\COURSE\WINTER, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FLAG SYS:\COURSE\WINTER\STUDENTSTo give files in drive G: the Hidden attribute, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FLAG G:*.* H /FOTo set the search mode to 7 for all executable files in the current directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FLAG *.* /M=7To sIDXID="w10175"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1376"
et the search mode to 1 and assign all files in the current directory the Read Write attribute, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"FLAG *.* RW /M=1
PAGENUM=83 ID="BP81"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search modesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Search modes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory attributesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"File attributesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"System directoryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Hidden attributeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"File compressionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Enabling File Compression on a Volume" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=84 ID="BP82"ID="FM36018"IDXID="w10176"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1627"
HALTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a NetWare 4.1 SFT III server console to bring down an IOEngine on one SFT III server while leaving the other IOEngine running.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IDXID="w10177"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4127"
HALTRENDERAS="SECT2"Using HALTMARK=BULLETHALT is valid only when SFT III servers are mirrored (or before SFT III servers are activated).Execute HALT from the appropriate IOEngine, not from the MSEngine. If you execute HALT from the MSEngine, you receive an "unknown command" error. When the primary IOEngine is brought down using IDXID="w10178"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4124"
HALT, the secondary server automatically takes over as the new primary server. When theIDXID="w10179"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3988"
 secondary IOEngine is brought down using HALT, the primary server continues running.Disks should be mirrored before you halt the primary IOEngine. If the disks aren't mirrored when you execute HALT, a warning similar to the following appears:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WARNING!!! Not every disk is remirrored. Answering yes may cause some volumes to dismount and open files to be lost.FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"Are you sure you wish to halt the primary server?RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=85 ID="BP83"ID="FM25233"HCSSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to MARK=BULLETView a listing of High Capacity Storage System (HCSS) commands and current settingsChange current HCSS settingsYou can also use NetWare Administrator to change HCSS parameter settings.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"HCSS [parameter] = [setting]The HCSS parameters are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as they appear in the following table.Parameter settings marked with an asterisk are persistent; that is, they are saved in memory for the next time HCSS is loaded. The nonpersistent parameter settings reset to the default every time HCSS is loaded.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter or setting)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allows you to view a list of HCSS parameters and current settings.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Eject Media Override = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Stops media in the jukebox from being ejected.Supported settings: ON, OFF. Default: OFFCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Delete Through = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Determines the method of file-deletion notification.When turned off, expedites the delete request, placing requested file deletions in a delete queue.When turned on, notifies you that the deletion was successful only when the deletion is complete through to the media. (This method provides higher security.)Supported settings: ON, OFF. Default: OFFCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Migrate Unarchived Files = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specifies whether unarchived files are migrated.Supported settings: ON, OFF. Default: OFFCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MigrateCompressed Files Only = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specifies if only compressed files or files that can't be compressed are migrated.Supported settings: ON, OFF. Default: OFFCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum Time In Drive = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the minimum amount of time (in seconds) a side of media can remain active before it is switched for another side of media.This value includes the amount of time it takes for the jukebox to move the media into place.Supported settings: 0 to 3600. Default: 20.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Time In Drive= settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the maximum amount of time (in seconds) that a side of media can remain active before it is switched for another side of media.Supported settings: 0 to 3600.Default: 30.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Request Idle Time = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the grace period that HCSS waits before removing one side of media from the drive to load another requested side of media. The period begins when the Minimum Time In Drive time expires.Supported settings: Any fraction of the difference between the Maximum Time in Drive and the Minimum Time In Drive settings. Default: 2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Migration = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enables or disables migration.Supported settings: ON, OFF (ON=migration disabled). Default: ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Upper Threshold = setting*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the upper threshold (as a percentage of total volume space) that can be reached before files begin migrating to magneto-optical disc.For example, if this command is set at 70, migration begins when the volume has 30% free volume space remaining.Supported settings: 1 to 100.* Default: 80.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Lower Threshold = setting*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the lower threshold (as a percentage of total volume space) at which files stop migrating to magneto-optical disc.Supported settings: 0 to 99.* Default: 50.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Migrate to Lower Threshold Hour = setting*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the hour when files begin migrating automatically, whether or not the upper threshold is reached.Setting the migration time to exactly 0 (the equivalent of 12:00 a.m.) disables the migration time. Files will not be migrated automatically to the lower threshold once a day.Supported settings: 0 to 23.* Default: 3.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Migrate to Lower Threshold Minute = setting*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the minute of the hour when files begin migrating automatically, whether or not the upper threshold is reached.Setting the migration time to exactly 0 (the equivalent of 12:00 a.m.) disables the migration time. Files will not be migrated automatically to the lower threshold once a day.Supported settings: 0 to 59.* Default: 0.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remaining Capacity Before Warning = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets (as a percentage of free space remaining) when you want to be alerted about the volume's remaining capacity.For example, if you set this command to 30, you will be alerted that the volume is getting full when there is 30% of its free space remaining.Supported settings: 10 to 100. Default: 20.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Polling Frequency = setting*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets how often (in minutes) you want HCSS to check the thresholds you have set.If the threshold has been met or exceeded during this time interval, migration will begin automatically.Supported settings: 1 to 34560.* Default: 1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Marking Frequency = setting*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets how often (in minutes) you want to build a list of least recently used (LRU) directories that are managed by HCSS.Supported settings: 1 to 34560.* Default: 30.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Warning Frequency = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets how often (in minutes) you want to be warned that the volume has exceeded its upper capacity threshold.Supported settings: 1 to 34560.* Default: 2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Marked Files Limit = settingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Limits the number of migratable files that are scanned for the LRU lists with any setting other than zero (0). When this is set to zero (0), it means there is no limit; every migratable file in the HCSS domain is scanned---even if it is already migrated---and it goes on the LRU list. Supported settings: The total number of files flagged for migration, or any number smaller than the total.Default: 0 (no limit).PAGENUM=90 ID="BP84"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HCSS command parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing HCSS Parameters" in Chapter 6 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HCSS conceptsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"High Capacity Storage System" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=91 ID="BP85"ID="FM40149"HELPIDXID="w10180"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1654"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to view the syntax, a brief description, and an example of a console command.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"HELP [console command] [ALL]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a list of all console commands.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"console command COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the console command you want to view help for.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ALLCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a short description of each console command. Press <Enter> after each description to view the next description. Press <Esc> to exit.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo view help for SEND, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"HELP SENDTo view a description of each command, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"HELP ALLRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=92 ID="BP86"ID="FM15428"IDXID="w10181"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1494"
INETCFGIDXID="w10182"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1792"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10183"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"
Use at the server console to set up and customize your internetworking configuration for IPX, IP, and AppleTalk.INETCFG simplifies the process of configuring local area networks (LANs) to work with network and routing protocols supported by NetWare.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD INETCFGRENDERAS="SECT2"Using INETCFGWhen you load INTECFG, the "Internetworking Configuration" menu appears, as shown in the following figure. You access INETCFG features from this menu. FILEREF="n41ut70a.tif"PAGENUM=93 ID="BP87"Menu options are:COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BoardsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select and configure boards. To configure a board, you choose a driver, assign a name to the board, and specify values for the board parameters.Each driver that is compatible with NetWare has a driver description file, sometimes called the LDI file. The LDI file defines the parameters necessary for the driver to operate with the board you select. It also specifies the valid range of values for each parameter. If a driver has an LDI file, the parameters are presented in the "Board Configuration" window; you simply choose a value for each parameter. If a driver has no LDI file, you must enter the values yourself in the "Board Parameters" field.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network InterfacesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Applies only to Wide Area Network (WAN) configurations for multiple interface WAN boards. (NetWare does not support WANs.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"WAN Call DirectoryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Applies only to WAN configurations. (NetWare does not support WANs.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ProtocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select and configure network protocols. To configure a protocol, you select the protocol, such as IPX or IP, and configure the protocol- specific parameters that pertain to routing, packet forwarding, etc.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BindingsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MARK=BULLETBind a network protocol to an interface.Configure protocol and interface-specific parameters, such as frame type, network number (for IPX), local IP address (for IP), and zone information (for AppleTalk).Delete a bound interface from the configuration.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Manage ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) information, such as the SNMP device name, hardware description, physical location, and human contact for the server or router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MARK=BULLETView the INTECFG configuration information file and the console messages captured during system initialization.Import or export configuration information to or from a diskette.PAGENUM=94 ID="BP88"INETCFG records information in various configuration (.CFG) files located in SYS:\ETC. Some of these files are present at system startup; others are created by INETCFG, depending on what you configure. Here is a partial list of these files:MARK=BULLETAURP.CFGTCPIP.CGFIPXSPX.CFGNLSP.CFGNETINFO.CFGINETCFG creates these files strictly for its own use; do not delete them or change their contents.PAGENUM=95 ID="BP89"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AUTOEXEC.NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"AUTOEXEC.NCF" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPXCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ipxrtenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare IPX Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AppleTalkCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="atrefenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare AppleTalk Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Capturing console messagesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM77448""CONLOG" (page 42)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=96 ID="BP90"ID="FM46223"INITIALIZE SYSTEMIDXID="w10184"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1810"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to enable the multiprotocol router configuration by executing all commands in the system IDXID="w10185"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2670"
NETINFO.CFG file.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"INITIALIZE SYSTEMRENDERAS="SECT2"Using INITIALIZE SYSTEMThis command is typically executed from the INITSYS.NCF file during server startup.Executing INITIALIZE SYSTEM on a system that has already been initialized can generate errors when the system discovers that the commands in the NETINFO.CFG file have already been executed.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server startupCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM93874""SERVER" (page 284).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=97 ID="BP91"ID="FM89974"IDXID="w10186"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1813"
INSTALLRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETInstall or upgrade the NetWare operating system on your serverModify your NetWare server's configurationPerform some server maintenance operationsRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]INSTALLCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to INSTALL if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Installing NetWareCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Installation.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Upgrading a NetWare serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="upmigenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Upgrade and Migration.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=98 ID="BP92"ID="FM78666"IPXCONIDXID="w10187"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1965"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETMonitor and troubleshoot IPX routers and network segments throughout your IPX internetworkView the status of an IPX router or network segmentView all paths through which IPX packets can flowLocate all active IPX routers on your internetworkMonitor remote IPX routers that are running NetWare IPX Router softwareRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD IPXCON [/P]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/P COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the Link State Packets (LSPs) received by the router, if the remote router is running NetWare Link Services ProtocolTM (NLSP).RENDERAS="SECT2"Using IPXCONWhen you load IPXCON, the top of the screen displays a summary of routing statistics for the selected router. (The following figure shows a partial display of routing statistics.) The bottom of the screen displays an "Available Options" menu.PAGENUM=99 ID="BP93"FILEREF="n41ut71a.tif"The following table explains the fields in the summary display. Because IPXCON is a real-time monitor, these fields are always active, and some values in the fields change as the router processes IPX packets.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Field COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Host Address COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name of the router being monitored.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Packets Received COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of IPX packets received by the selected router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Packets Sent COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of IPX packets sent by the selected router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Packets Forwarded COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of IPX packets forwarded by the selected router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Circuits COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of circuits in use on the router. A circuit is a logical attachment to a network segment through which a router can reach other systems. A circuit can be a local or wide area connection.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Networks COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of networks known to the selected router. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Services COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of services that can be reached from the selected router. PAGENUM=100 ID="BP94"The "Available Options" menu allows access to additional features of IPXCON. These features are described in the following table. COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Option COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SNMP Access ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select the server you want to monitor. You can monitor the local system, which is the default, or a remote system. You can monitor the remote system through IPX or TCP/IP. You can also set the poll interval to specify how often the information will be retrieved through SNMP. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX Information COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View statistics for the selected router's IPX packet routing.To display additional packet routing statistics, select "Detailed IPX Information" from the bottom of the "IPX Information" window.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX Router Information COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View general information about the selected IPX router.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLSP Information COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the following NLSPTM information about the selected router:System informationArea addressesNeighborsRoutersLANsLSPs To view the Link State Packets (LSPs) received by the system, load IPXCON by typingMOREINFO="NONE" MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD IPXCON /PThe LSP option is enabled only if the server is running NLSP. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CircuitsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View circuit information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ForwardingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the Forwarding table.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ServicesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View information for the currently reachable services.PAGENUM=101 ID="BP95"MARK=BULLETIPXCON uses Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to exchange management information and operational statistics with remote IPX routers.IPXCON operates over both IPX and TCP/IP networks.To execute IPXCON automatically each time you boot the server, add the LOAD IPXCON command after the INITSYS.NCF line in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file.PAGENUM=102 ID="BP96"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLSPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ipxrtenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare IPX Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=103 ID="BP97"ID="FM68539"IPXPINGIDXID="w10188"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1970"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to check connectivity to an IPX server on your internetwork.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD IPXPINGRENDERAS="SECT2"Using IPXPINGMARK=BULLETIPXPING sends an IPX ping request packet to an IPX target node (server or workstation). When the target node receives the request packet, it sends back a reply packet.To select an IPX server or workstation, enter its IPX internal network number and node number. You can also specify the number of seconds between each request packet transmission.To start sending request packets, press MOREINFO="NONE"<Esc>. The sending node continues to send request packets and collect response time statistics until you press MOREINFO="NONE"<Esc> again to exit IPXPING.Request and reply packets use the same format; each packet contains the standard IPX header.To add other nodes, press <MOREINFO="NONE"Insert> and select another server.PAGENUM=104 ID="BP98"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ipxrtenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare IPX Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX network and node addressingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ipxrtenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare IPX Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=105 ID="BP99"ID="FM82911"IDXID="w10189"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1974"
IPXSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10190"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4303"
Provides IDXID="w10191"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1949"
IPX protocolIDXID="w10192"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"
 to NLM programs that require IDXID="w10193"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
STREAMSTM-based IPX. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]IPXS [LDFILE = [path]filename[ext]]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to IPXS.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10194"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1975"IDXID="w10195"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1975"
LDFILE = filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(Optional) Specify a filename that contains the SAP filtering, SAP and RIP timers, and IPX configuration parameters.Note: If you don't specify a filename, IPXS sets the parameters defined in the IPXSPX.CFG file.If you don't specify a file extension, the default is .CFG.For example, to load an alternate configuration file, typeLOAD IPXS LDFILE = IPXSPX2.CFGRENDERAS="SECT2"Using IPXSThe IPXSPX.CFG file is modified from the INETCFG utility when you set SPX/IPX parameters. MARK=BULLETWhen you load IPXS, STREAMS is autoloaded.PAGENUM=106 ID="BP100"IPXSPX.CFG contains the Service Advertising Protocol (SAP) filtering, SAP and Router Information Protocol (RIP) timers, and the IPX configuration defaults.You can create multiple configuration files in addition to IPXSPX.CFG. Use this feature if you frequently alternate between two or more IPX/SPX configurations.To create multiple configuration files, copy the IPXSPX.CFG file to a new filename (IPXSPX2.CFG, for example). Then you can change the IPXSPX.CFG file (by using INETCFG) and still preserve the original configuration in the IPXSPX2.CFG file.To load a configuration file other than the default IPXSPX.CFG file, use the LDFILE option.For example, if you have a second configuration file called IPXSPX2.CFG, you can load that configuration by typingFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD IPXS LDFILE = IPXSPX2RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Filtering RIP and SAP packets using SETCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM88068""SET" (page 291)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Filtering RIP and SAP packets using FILTCFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM77360""FILTCFG" (page 73).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting IPX parameters using SETCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM88068""SET" (page 291)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting IPX parameters using INETCFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" (page 93).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"STREAMS-based protocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"STREAMS" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=107 ID="BP101"ID="FM55248"IDXID="w10196"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2014"
KEYBRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10197"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i609"
change the IDXID="w10198"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
console IDXID="w10199"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2017"
keyboard IDXID="w10200"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2046"
type to the language of your keyboard.The language you specify with KEYB must match the language of your keyboard, not the server language.Changing the keyboard type causes some keys to represent different characters. Therefore, do not use this command unless you have the appropriate keyboard for the language you are specifying and you are familiar with the keyboard's use.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]KEYB [keyboard_type]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a list of available keyboard types.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to KEYB.NLM if you moved it from the default directory. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"keyboard_typeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify one of the following keyboard types:BelgiumCanadian French DenmarkFranceGermanyItalyLatin AmericaNetherlandsNorwayPortugalRussiaSpainSwedenSwiss FrenchSwiss GermanUnited KingdomUnited StatesPAGENUM=108 ID="BP102"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using KEYBTo change the keyboard type, unload KEYB and then reload it, specifying the new keyboard type parameter.PAGENUM=109 ID="BP103"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Changing the server keyboard typeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Changing the Server Keyboard Type" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=110 ID="BP104"ID="FM86410"IDXID="w10201"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2049"
LANGUAGERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10202"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
set the IDXID="w10203"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2046"
language for subsequently loaded modules. LANGUAGE does not change the language of the operating system or of currently loaded modules.The LANGUAGE command gives the modules access to directories containing message files in the specified language. This directory structure is under SYS:SYSTEM as follows:SYS:SYSTEM\NLS\Language_numberRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LANGUAGE [language_name | number] [LIST | REN number new_name]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the current language setting for modules.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"language_name | numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a language by its name or number. The following languages are available with the initial release of NetWare 4.1:4=ENGLISH 6=FRENCH - FRANCE7=GERMAN 8=ITALIAN 14=SPANISH - LATIN AMERICACOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LISTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display a list of language names and numbers. (Not all languages in the list are supported.) COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"REN number new_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Rename a language specified by a language number. The syntax is:LANGUAGE REN number new_namePAGENUM=111 ID="BP105"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo set a module to use the German message files, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LANGUAGE GERMAN or FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LANGUAGE 7To change the name of Spanish to Espanol, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LANGUAGE REN 14 EspanolTo display a list of language names and numbers, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LANGUAGE LIST RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specifying a language for modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Specifying a Language for an NLM" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=112 ID="BP106"ID="FM53118"LIST DEVICES IDXID="w10204"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2128"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to display a list of the devices on the server and to register new devices with the server. AIDXID="w10205"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1022"
 device can be a disk driver, tape driver, magneto-optical disc driver, CD-ROM, or any other physical storage medium.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LIST DEVICESRENDERAS="SECT2"Using LIST DEVICESThe command output is returned by the device drivers. The information for each device includes the device number and name, as well as additional information that varies by device and by manufacturer. Following is an example of a device listing:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"1. Device #0 Conner Peripherals 121MB - CF3 
2. Device #1 Compaq IDA Slot 1 Dsk 1 NFT RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=113 ID="BP107"ID="FM24893"LOADRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10206"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2123"
link IDXID="w10207"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
loadable modules to the IDXID="w10208"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2772"
operating system. 
Loadable modules include disk drivers, LAN drivers, 
NLM programs, and name space modules.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]loadable_module_name [parameter...]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to the loadable module if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"loadable_module_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the loadable module. To determine the name, see the documentation for the loadable module.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Include parameters specific to the module you are loading. See the documentation for the loadable module.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using LOADMARK=BULLETWhen a module is loaded, it links itself to the system and allocates a portion of the server's memory for its use, thus using system resources. When modules are unloaded, allocated resources are returned to the system.Some modules, such as LAN drivers and disk drivers, need to be loaded every time the server is booted. To load modules automatically when the server boots, include LOAD commands in the IDXID="w10209"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"
AUTOEXEC.NCF or IDXID="w10210"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4264"
STARTUP.NCF file. (See "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.)Other modules, such as INSTALL, can be loaded, used, and then unloaded. Refer to the documentation for the specific module.PAGENUM=114 ID="BP108"LAN drivers can also be loaded with INSTALL and with INETCFG. (See "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading and Binding LAN drivers" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network and IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" on page 93.)When you install SYSTEM and PUBLIC files, any .NLM and .LAN modules are copied to SYS:SYSTEM. The .DSK and .NAM modules are copied to the boot directory of the server.If you receive an error message indicating that a third-party NLM is not allowing low-priority processes to run, load the NLM using this option: (CLIB_OPT)/Y. This option instructs the system to run low-priority processes as well as high-priority ones. The command syntax is:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD third-party NLM (CLIB_OPT)/YThe parentheses are required.If you are unsure of the source or purpose of a third-party module, test the module in a secure environment by using a load parameter provided by DOMAIN. (For more information, IDREF="FM58192"see "DOMAIN" on page 54.)RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10211"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2148"
ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo load a DCB driver, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD A:DCB PORT=320To load an ISADISK driver, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD A:ISADISKTo load the NE3200TM driver (without parameters), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD NE3200To load the TRXNET driver (with parameters), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD TRXNET INT=3 PORT=2E0 MEM=C0000
PAGENUM=115 ID="BP109"To load the Macintosh name space module, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD MACTo load the INSTALL module, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD INSTALLRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading disk driversCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Load the Disk Drivers and CD-ROM Drivers" in Chapter 3 of Installation. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading LAN driversCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading and Binding LAN Drivers" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading name space modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up a Volume to Store Non-DOS Files" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading a NetWare Loadable Module" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protecting the operating system's memoryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Protecting the Operating System's Memory" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=116 ID="BP110"ID="FM30554"LOGINRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to IDXID="w10212"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"IDXID="w10213"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
access the network by IDXID="w10214"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2190"IDXID="w10215"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2799"
logging in to a server and running a login script.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGIN [server name/ | tree/][user] [/option...][/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Request a login prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"server name/COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the server you want to log in to.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"tree/COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the tree you want to log in to.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"userCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the username you want to log in with.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM46415"See "LOGIN Options" on page 116.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using LOGINMARK=BULLETUsing LOGIN implies use of the LOGOUT command. That is, using LOGIN to access an additional server logs you out of all other servers. To remain logged in to other servers, use the "no script" (/NS) option. Using the /NS option is similar to using the ATTACH command in NetWare 3.PAGENUM=117 ID="BP111"To use another object's login script, you need the Read property right to the Login Script property of that object. This login script replaces the profile script (if one is specified).To set your context before you log in, either use the CX command or set your context in the NET.CFG file using the following statement:MOREINFO="NONE"name context = "complete name"For OS/2 do not use the equals sign or quotation marks.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM46415"LOGIN OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a login script from running and prevent you from being logged out of other servers you are logged in to.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the "Welcome to NetWare" banner from being displayed during the login process.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/S path | object nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a login script file.Replace path with the path to the script.Replace object name with the object whose script you want to run.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/IDXID="w10216"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i438"
BCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a bindery login.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/PR=profile object nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the Profile object script you want to run.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NOSWAPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent LOGIN from swapping to extended or expanded memory, or to disk.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SWAP=pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Tells login to swap to this path when external commands are executed. DOS only.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/TREECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify that you want to log in to a tree.PAGENUM=118 ID="BP112"RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10217"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2222"IDXID="w10218"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2190"
ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo IDXID="w10219"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
log in to server MOUSE as user RICKY without logging out of other servers you are logged in to, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGIN MOUSE/RICKY /NSTo IDXID="w10220"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2190"
log in to tree TERMINAL as user RICK, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGIN TERMINAL/RICK /TREETo IDXID="w10221"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"
log in to the Directory tree as user SAM (if current context is set to SAM's container), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGIN SAMTo IDXID="w10222"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2209"
log in as user SAM and specify a Profile object to use as a login script, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGIN SAM /PR=WPGROUP.NOVELLRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Login scriptsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Login scripts" in Concepts"BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"About Login Scripts" in Chapter 3 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using NOSWAP with LOGIN.EXECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NOSWAP" in Chapter 3 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=119 ID="BP113"IDXID="w10223"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1384"ID="FM18118"IDXID="w10224"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2196"IDXID="w10225"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2226"
LOGOUTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to IDXID="w10226"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"IDXID="w10227"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
exit the network or to IDXID="w10228"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2799"
log out of servers.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGOUT [server name | /T] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Exit the network by logging out of all servers and Directory Services.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"server nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the server you want to log out of if you want to log out of one server but remain logged in to other servers or to the Directory tree.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/TCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Log out of Directory Services and all servers in the Directory tree, but not out of bindery servers (NetWare 2 and 3 servers).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using LOGOUTYou can use wildcard characters in the server name parameter.PAGENUM=120 ID="BP114"RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10229"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2226"
ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo log out of all servers, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGOUTTo log out of server EXODUS while remaining logged in to other servers, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGOUT EXODUSTo log out of all servers that begin with TEST, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOGOUT TEST*RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=121 ID="BP115"ID="FM54005"IDXID="w10230"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2298"
MAGAZINERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console in response to the screen prompts "Insert Magazine" and "Remove Magazine." The screen prompts refer to media IDXID="w10231"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2297"
magazines (hardware devices that hold several pieces of media).RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAGAZINE [parameter]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"InsertedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the media magazine was inserted in response to the "Insert Magazine" prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Not InsertedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the media magazine was not inserted in response to the "Insert Magazine" prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Not RemovedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the media magazine was not removed in response to the "Remove Magazine" prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RemovedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the media magazine was removed in response to the "Remove Magazine" prompt.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=122 ID="BP116"ID="FM51355"MAPRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10232"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
View drive mappingsIDXID="w10233"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
Create or change network or search drive mappingsIDXID="w10234"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"Map a drive to a fake root directory (for applications that must use a root directory)RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP [P | NP] [option...] drive:= [drive: | path] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View drive mappings.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10235"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
PCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Map to a physical volume. Must be listed first or second.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Overwrite local or search drives without being prompted. Must be listed first or second.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM91186"See "MAP Options" on page 123.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"drive:COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the drive you want to change.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path you want to map a drive to. To map to a physical volume on a server that is not your default server, IDXID="w10236"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3311"
specify the entire path (including server, volume, and directory name). For example, MACBETH/SYS:ACCOUNTS\PAY (server/volume:directory\subdirectory)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=123 ID="BP117"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MAPMARK=BULLETIf you don't include drive mappings in your login script, they will have to be manually recreated each time the user logs in. (See "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating Login Scripts" in Chapter 3 of Supervising the Network.)You can have up to 26 mappings, including local drives.Search drive mappings begin with the letter Z and continue backward through the alphabet.To map a search drive, use S and a number. (IDREF="FM91186"See "MAP Options" on page 123.)If you don't want to overwrite existing search drives, use the "INS" option.To map to the next available search drive, use "S16:="PAGENUM=124 ID="BP118"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM91186"MAP OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10237"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
PCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Map to a physical volume. Must be listed first or second.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NpCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Overwrite local or search drives without being prompted. Must be listed first or second.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10238"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3975"IDXID="w10239"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3162"IDXID="w10240"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Change a regular drive to a search drive, or a search drive to a regular drive.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DELCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Delete a drive mapping.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"INSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Insert a search drive mapping without replacing an existing mapping.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10241"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1236"
NCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10242"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
Map the next available drive to the specified path.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ROOTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Map a drive to a fake root directory for applications that require rights in a root directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"WCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Do not change master environment.RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM78004"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo view mappings, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAPTo map drive G: to SYS:\HOME\JAN on the current server, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP G:=SYS:\HOME\JANTo IDXID="w10243"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1400"IDXID="w10244"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
extend the mapping for drive G: above to SYS:\HOME\JAN\ PROJECTS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP G:=PROJECTS
PAGENUM=125 ID="BP119"To map search drive 4 to PRUFROCK (server) SYS (volume) APP (directory), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP S4:=PRUFROCK/SYS:APPTo change Y: from a regular NetWare drive to a search drive, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP C Y:To delete the mapping for drive G:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP DEL G:To IDXID="w10245"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1220"
map drive F: to the DOSGAMES volume of the GAMES directory as a fake root, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP ROOT F:=GAMES\DOSGAMES:To map the last possible search drive to IZARD (server) SYS (volume) PUBLIC (directory), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP S16:=IZARD/SYS:PUBLICTo map the next available drive to Z:\PUBLIC\DOS\APP from Z:\PUBLIC, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP N DOS\APPTo map the next available drive to BRUTUS/SYS:ACCT\ OLD, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP N BRUTUS/SYS:ACCT\OLDTo IDXID="w10246"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3975"
insert COUNT (server) SYS (volume) PUBLIC (directory) as a new search drive, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP INS S4:=COUNT/SYS:PUBLIC 
PAGENUM=126 ID="BP120"To map to PUBLIC\RPTS under Volume object SYS.ACCOUNTING .ACME.US from the root, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MAP H:=.SYS.ACCOUNTING.ACME.US:PUBLIC\RPTSRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory Map objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Directory Map object" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Fake rootsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Fake root" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Login scriptsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Login scripts" in Concepts."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"About Login Scripts" in Chapter 3 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search drive mappingsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Drive mapping" and "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Search drive" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=127 ID="BP121"ID="FM90293"MATHLIBRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUsed at the server to provide mathematical functions to CLIB.For maximum performance, use at the server console if IDXID="w10247"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2346"
your server has a math coprocessor, since MATHLIB invokes floating point instructions. If your server does not have a math coprocessor, IDREF="FM22623"see "MATHLIBC" on page 128.If MATHLIB is loaded and your server does not support floating point instructions, MATHLIB will still work by emulating floating point instructions. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]MATHLIBCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to MATHLIB if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MATHLIBMARK=BULLETYou must load STREAMS and CLIB before you load MATHLIB. Load the modules in the following order:TYPE="VERT"STREAMSCLIBMATHLIBTo load MATHLIB modules automatically when the server boots, add the following to the AUTOEXEC.NCF file:TYPE="VERT"LOAD STREAMSLOAD CLIBLOAD MATHLIBPAGENUM=128 ID="BP122"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing the AUTOEXEC.NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Modify the AUTOEXEC.NCF File" in Chapter 3 of Installation."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=129 ID="BP123"ID="FM22623"MATHLIBCRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUsed at the server to provide mathematical functions to CLIB.For maximum efficiency, use IDXID="w10248"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2347"
MATHLIBC if your server does not have a IDXID="w10249"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2345"
math coprocessor, since MATHLIBC automatically uses a IDXID="w10250"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1522"
floating point emulator. If your server does have a math coprocessor, IDREF="FM90293"see "MATHLIB" on page 126.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]MATHLIBCCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to MATHLIBC if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MATHLIBCMARK=BULLETYou must load STREAMS and CLIB before you load MATHLIBC. Load the modules in the following order: TYPE="VERT"STREAMSCLIBMATHLIBCTo load MATHLIBC modules automatically each time the server boots, add the following to the AUTOEXEC.NCF file:TYPE="VERT"LOAD STREAMSLOAD CLIBLOAD MATHLIBCPAGENUM=130 ID="BP124"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing the AUTOEXEC.NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Modify the AUTOEXEC.NCF File" in Chapter 3 of Installation."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=131 ID="BP125"ID="FM29456"MEDIAIDXID="w10251"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2370"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console in response to the screen prompts "Insert Media" and "Remove Media."RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MEDIA [parameter]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"InsertedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the specified media was inserted in response to the "Insert Media" prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Not InsertedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the specified media was not inserted in response to the "Insert Media" prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Not RemovedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the specified media was not removed in response to the "Remove Media" prompt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RemovedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Confirm that the specified media was removed in response to the "Remove Media" prompt.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=132 ID="BP126"ID="FM94481"IDXID="w10252"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2389"
MEMORYRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10253"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1149"
display the total amount of installed memory that the IDXID="w10254"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
operating system can IDXID="w10255"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i104"
address.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MEMORYRENDERAS="SECT2"About Memory IDXID="w10256"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
AddressingMARK=BULLETOn EISA bus computers, NetWare 3.1 and later versions address memory above 16 MB.On microchannel and ISA (AT) bus computers, NetWare (all versions) can address memory only up to 16 MB.On PCI bus computers, NetWare 4.1 can address up to 64 MB. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enabling the operating system to address memory above 16 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM73773""REGISTER MEMORY" (page 231).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=133 ID="BP127"ID="FM23731"IDXID="w10257"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2380"
MEMORY MAPRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to display the amount of memory (in bytes) allocated to DOS and to the IDXID="w10258"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MEMORY MAPRENDERAS="SECT2"Using MEMORY MAPIn NetWare 4.1 SFT III, MEMORY MAP displays the memory allocated to DOS, the IOEngine, and the MSEngine (the unclaimed memory if the MSEngine is not loaded). SFT III allocates the unclaimed memory to the MSEngine during synchronization.MARK=BULLETMEMORY MAP can help you determine if your SFT III servers are addressing equal amounts of memory. If the two servers have unequal amounts of RAM installed, you may experience synchronization problems.In SFT III, you must execute MEMORY MAP from the IOEngine. If you execute MEMORY MAP while in the MSEngine, the system recognizes MEMORY MAP as the MEMORY command.In native NetWare, MEMORY MAP displays the memory allocated to DOS and to the server's memory.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=134 ID="BP128"ID="FM78687"MIRROR STATUS IDXID="w10259"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2470"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLET View the status of IDXID="w10260"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2471"
mirrored IDXID="w10261"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1121"IDXID="w10262"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2204"
disk partitionsView the percentage of mirrored data on each partitionRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MIRROR STATUS [logical_partition_number]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a list of all logical disk partitions.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"logical_partition_number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display the partition's physical device number(s), as well as its mirrored status.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MIRROR STATUSIf you specify a logical partition number, MIRROR STATUS displays the partition's physical device number as well as its mirrored status. The possible status messages are explained in the following table.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatusCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Being remirroredCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remirroring is in progress, and the percent completed is displayed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Fully synchronizedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The mirrored partitions have the same data. Remirroring is complete.For SFT III systems, this message refers to unmirrored drives synchronized with themselves.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Not mirroredCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Disk mirroring was not set up for this partition. It has no mirrored partner.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Orphaned stateCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"An error occurred during remirroring with the result that the partition was not remirrored. Note: You can restore the orphaned partition to its mirrored partner with INSTALL.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Out of synchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"One partition does not have the same data as its partner, and it is not being remirrored.PAGENUM=135 ID="BP129"In SFT III systems, MIRROR STATUS must be executed from the MSEngine. If you execute MIRROR STATUS from either IOEngine, you receive an "Unknown command" error message.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Topic COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mirroring disksCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Mirroring and Duplexing a Hard Disk" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=136 ID="BP130"ID="FM72734"IDXID="w10263"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2500"
MODULESRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to display a list of currently loaded modules. For each module, the command displays the following information: MARK=BULLETIDXID="w10264"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
The module short nameIDXID="w10265"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
A descriptive string or long name for each moduleThe version number if the module is a IDXID="w10266"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1114"
disk driver, IDXID="w10267"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"
LAN driver, or NLMRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MODULESRENDERAS="SECT2"Using ModulesThe following example illustrates the output of the MODULES command:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ETHERTSM.NLM FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Novell Ethernet Topology Specific Module FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Version 2.30 December 30, 1994 FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Copyright 1994 Novell, Inc.  All rights reserved FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NE2000.LAN FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Novell NE2000 FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Version 3.20 December 30, 1994 FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Copyright 1994 Novell, Inc.  All rights reserved. PAGENUM=137 ID="BP131"FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"DS.NLM FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  NetWare Directory Services (419) FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Version 4.10 December 30, 1994 FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  Copyright 1993-94 Novell, Inc. All rights reserved.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loadable modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare Loadable Module" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading modulesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Loading a NetWare Loadable Module" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.IDREF="FM24893""LOAD" (page 112).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=138 ID="BP132"ID="FM70828"MONITORIDXID="w10268"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2507"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETView server activityLock the consoleAssess server RAM and CPU utilizationOptimize memory by performing garbage collectionRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]MONITOR [option]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path leading to MONITOR if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a MONITOR option. IDREF="FM43070"See "MONITOR Options" on page 138.PAGENUM=139 ID="BP133"RENDERAS="SECT3"MONITOR OptionsID="FM43070"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10269"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2179"
LCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10270"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
Lock the IDXID="w10271"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
console upon loading MONITOR.To lock the console upon booting, place this option in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file.Note: If you use this option, use the supervisor password to unlock the console.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Load MONITOR without the screen saver.By default, NetWare has a snake-like screen saver that moves randomly on the server screen.If you load MONITOR without the N option, a snake appears on the screen after 1 minute of inactivity if the console is locked (after 10 minutes if it is not locked).As network use increases, the snake moves faster and the tail gets longer. To retrieve the MONITOR display, press any key. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MONITORThe main MONITORIDXID="w10272"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"
 screen displays server IDXID="w10273"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
statisticsIDXID="w10274"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4284"
 and a menu that allows you to access additional information. The following figure shows a typical main screen display.PAGENUM=140 ID="BP134"LABEL="2-6" FLOAT="0"The MONITOR Main ScreenFILEREF="n41ut42a.tif"See the following tables for explanations of the information on the MONITOR screen: MARK=BULLETIDREF="FM96014"Table 2-1,  "Statistics in the MONITOR "General Information" Display" on page 140.IDREF="FM59707"Table 2-2,  "MONITOR "Available Options" Menu" on page 142.For information about all MONITOR statistics and menu options, press <F1> for online help.PAGENUM=141 ID="BP135"LABEL="2-1" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM96014" Statistics in the MONITOR "General Information" DisplayCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="9*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="26*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Operating system version and dateCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The version and release date of the system (upper left corner of the screen).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server server name on network tree nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The name of the server and the NetWare Directory Services tree name.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server Up TimeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The length of time the server has been running since it was last booted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UtilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reflects CPU utilization. This number is relative to the amount of time the kernel spends in the idle loop process.This value is reset when a change in system configuration occurs such as an NLM being loaded or unloaded, or a volume being mounted or dismounted.Note: To measure IDXID="w10275"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i866"
CPU utilization exactly, see the histogram displayed when you select either "Scheduling Information" or "Processor Utilization" from the "Available Options" menu.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Original Cache BuffersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of cache buffers available when the server is booted. The figure represents the number of blocks installed as cache memory in your server. Default block size: 4 KB.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Cache BuffersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10276"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2379"
The number of blocks available for file caching. This number decreases as modules are loaded.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dirty Cache BuffersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of file blocks in memory waiting to be written to disk.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Current Disk RequestsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of disk requests (in a queue) the server is waiting to service.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Packet Receive BuffersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of buffers available to handle station requests. Default: 10.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory Cache BuffersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of buffers allocated to handle directory caching.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Service ProcessesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Indicates the number of task handlers the system allocates to service client requests. The default number of service processes is 20. The possible range is 5 to 100. IDXID="w10277"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2379"
Once memory is allocated for service processes, it remains allocated even when no longer required. Each service process requires 4 KB of RAM. You can set this parameter using SET. For more information, press <F1> for online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Current Service ProcessesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of service processes currently allocated. If this number corresponds to the "Maximum Service Processes" value, you should allocate more service processes. Use the SET utility to set the Maximum Service Processes parameter. If the Current Service Processes value corresponds to the maximum possible (100), performance will be adversely affected. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Licensed Connections COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The maximum number of licensed server connections possible. This number corresponds with the number-of-users version of NetWare you purchased.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Current Licensed Connections COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of active licensed connections. These connections count toward the limit on your NetWare license. For example, if you have a NetWare license for 50 users and there are currently 45 licensed connections, you have 5 unused connections.To view the current licensed connections, choose the "Connection Information" option from the "Available Options" menu.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Open FilesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of files being accessed by the server and by workstations.PAGENUM=143 ID="BP136"RENDERAS="SECT3"LABEL="2-2" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM59707" MONITOR "Available Options" MenuCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="9*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="26*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Menu OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Connection InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List active connections.List licensed and unlicensed connections.List record locks for a user.Clear a connection.List open files.List record lock status of open files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ID="FM11781"Disk InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List system hard disks.List volume segments per hard disk. Change the "Read After Write Verify" status of the hard disk. Flash the hard disk light.Change the drive light status.Activate/deactivate a hard disk. Mount/dismount a removable media device. Lock/unlock a removable media device.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LAN/WAN InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List LAN driver configuration and statistics.View the LAN driver version and the protocols bound to it.View node and network address.Note: For information on each LAN driver statistic, IDREF="FM71375"see "LAN Driver Statistics" on page 455.Note: MONITOR does not provide LAN driver statistics for SFT III servers.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"System Module InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List modules loaded on the system by name, size, and version.List size of module code and data image.List resources allocated by the module (resource tags).View resource tag memory usage.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Lock File Server ConsoleCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Lock or unlock the server console keyboard. Once the keyboard is locked, you cannot change screens until you unlock the keyboard, using either the password that you used to lock the console or the ADMIN password.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"File Open/Lock ActivityCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Check a file's lock activity and status.View which stations have open files.View mounted volumes and directories on each volume. View files in a directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cache UtilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View disk cache block request statistics including: total cache block requests, the number of times a block request had to wait because there were no available cache blocks, long and short term cache hits and dirty cache hits.Use the Long Term Cache Hits information (the percentage of time the operating system retrieves the data it needs directly from cache) to assess server RAM. Note: For more information on these statistics, press <F1> for help while in this screen. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Processor UtilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select an active process or multiple processes and available interrupts to sample for a histogram.View a histogram for the selected processes.The histogram displays CPU usage and the number of times the CPU has serviced the process during the sample period. To measure CPU utilization, view the Idle Loop process in this screen and find the LOAD percentage associated with this process. To calculate exact CPU utilization, subtract this percentage from 100%. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Resource UtilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View IDXID="w10278"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2379"
memory usage statistics for the cache buffer pool, allocated memory in movable and non-movable memory pools, and code and data memory. View tracked resources (resource tags) allocated by the operating system and NLM programs.When you select "Resource Utilization," the upper screen displays a "Server Memory Statistics" window.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Memory UtilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View allocated memory information for the entire system or for one selected system module. View memory statistics such as the percent of allocated memory in use, memory blocks and bytes in use, free blocks.Perform garbage collection from a module's "Allocated Memory Information" screen.Note: For more information, press <F1> for help while in this screen.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scheduling InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View and change the priority of a process by delaying CPU execution of a process. View the number of times the process ran during the sample period and the CPU time spent executing code for that process.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExitCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Exit MONITOR.PAGENUM=146 ID="BP137"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="13*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Assessing server RAMCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Assessing Server RAM" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Checking a server's processor utilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Checking a Server's Processor Utilization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Checking for disk errorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Checking For Disk Errors" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Listing LAN drivers and statisticsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Viewing LAN Driver Statistics" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LAN driver statisticsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Appendix B, IDREF="FM71375""LAN Driver Statistics" (page 455).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Clearing workstation connectionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Clearing A Workstation Connection" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.IDREF="FM79441""CLEAR STATION" (page 34)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Increasing communications buffersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Increasing the Maximum Number of Packet Receive Buffers" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prioritizing server processesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM87700""SCHDELAY" (page 271)."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Prioritizing Server Processes" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=147 ID="BP138"ID="FM86528"IDXID="w10279"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2517"
MOUNTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to make a IDXID="w10280"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
volume IDXID="w10281"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2520"
available to users.CD-ROM volumes must be mounted using the CD command. For more information, IDREF="FM28663"see "CD" on page 24.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOUNT volume_name | ALLCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"volume_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the volume you want to mount.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ALL COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mount all volumes not mounted.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MOUNTMARK=BULLETIf you set up the AUTOEXEC.NCF file to mount all volumes automatically each time the server comes up, then you would use the MOUNT command only if you have dismounted a volume and want to remount it. After you replace a removable drive, use this command to mount all volumes residing on the removable drive. You can mount and dismount volumes while the server is running.You can also use INSTALL to mount a volume. Select "Volume Options" from the "Installation Options" menu.PAGENUM=148 ID="BP139"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo mount volume STATISTICS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOUNT STATISTICSTo mount all unmounted volumes at once, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOUNT ALLRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=149 ID="BP140"ID="FM93885"IDXID="w10282"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2545"
MSERVERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to load the IOEngine on each NetWare 4.1 SFT III server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IDXID="w10283"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4127"
MSERVER [parameter...]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-nsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent execution of the IDXID="w10284"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1903"
IOSTART.NCF file. This parameter is useful if you are changing commands in your IOSTART.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-naCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent execution of the IDXID="w10285"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1900"
IOAUTO.NCF file. This parameter is useful if you are changing the modules loaded by your IOAUTO.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Both (-ns -na)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Load the IOEngine without executing the IOSTART.NCF and IOAUTO.NCF files.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using MSERVERMARK=BULLETMSERVER executes the IOSTART.NCF and IOAUTO.NCF files.Execute MSERVER from the DOS prompt of each SFT III server.Type MSERVER parameters in lowercase.If the IOSTART.NCF file doesn't exist, MSERVER prompts you for an IOEngine name and an IPX internal network number.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=150 ID="BP141"ID="FM64796"IDXID="w10286"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2592"
NAMERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to display the server IDXID="w10287"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2803"
name.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NAMERENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=151 ID="BP142"ID="FM56995"NCOPYRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10288"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
Use at a workstation toIDXID="w10289"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2617"
 copy files or directories from one location to another. IDXID="w10290"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1091"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY [source_path] filename target_path [filename] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"source_pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path leading to the source file. (You can use a drive letter.) Include this if the file is not in your current directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the file you want to copy.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"target_pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path for the directory you are copying the file to. (You can use a drive letter.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[filename]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a new name for the file (if you want to rename the file.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM70906"See "NCOPY Options" on page 151.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=152 ID="BP143"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NCOPYMARK=BULLETYou can use drive letters instead of directory paths to specify source and target paths.You can use wildcard characters.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM70906"NCOPY OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="12*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="14*"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(Option Name)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A(Archive Bit Only)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy only those files that have the archive bit set. The attribute of the source file is not changed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"M(Archive Bit Set)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy files that have the archive bit set. Turns off the archive bit of the source file. This option allows NCOPY to be used in backup.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"C(Copy)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy files without preserving extended attributes and name space information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"F  (Force Sparse Files)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Force the operating system to copy sparse files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"I(Inform)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Notify you when extended attributes or name space information cannot be copied because the target volume doesn't support those features.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10291"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i723"
R(Retain Compression)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Keep compressed files compressed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/R/U(Retain Unsupported Compression)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Keep compressed files compressed even when they are copied to media that doesn't support compression.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10292"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4312"
S(Subdirectories)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy subdirectories as well as files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/S /E(Subdirectories Empty)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy empty subdirectories as well as files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"V(Verify)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Verify that the original and the new files are identical. For local DOS drives only.PAGENUM=153 ID="BP144"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo copy an empty subdirectory to the subdirectory above your current drive, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY WORK .. /S /ETo copy files that start with S and have a .TXT extension and have the archive bit set to a subdirectory named TEST below your current directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY S*.TXT TEST /ATo copy all files from C:\DOS to D:\TEMP when you are not in either directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY C:\DOS *.* D:\TEMPTo copy all files with the .RPT extension to SERVER1_SYS:PUBLIC\SHARE on another volume and be notified if extended attributes or name space information cannot be copied, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY *.RPT SERVER1_SYS:PUBLIC\SHARE /ITo IDXID="w10293"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1484"
copy all files with the .DOC extension to directory ACCT and IDXID="w10294"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
verify that the original and the new files are identical, typePAGENUM=154 ID="BP145"FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY *.DOC ACCT /VTo copy a file named MARCH.RPT to drive G:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY MARCH.RPT G:
PAGENUM=155 ID="BP146"To copy all files and subdirectories in the current directory to a subdirectory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY *.* .. \TEMP /STo copy all files with the .RPT extension to PUBLIC\RPTS under Volume object ACCT_SYS.ACCOUNTING. ACME.US from the root, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCOPY *.RPT .ACCT_SYS.ACCOUNTING .ACME.US:PUBLIC\RPTSRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sparse filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Sparse file" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name spaceCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Name space support" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Archive bitCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=156 ID="BP147"ID="FM24526"NCUPDATEIDXID="w10295"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2626"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to automatically update users' NET.CFG files with a new name context after a container has been moved or renamed.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NCUPDATE [/? | /VER] [/NP]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Avoid getting the prompt that asks whether to update the name context in the NET.CFG file."RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NCUPDATEMARK=BULLETYou can execute NCUPDATE at the command line, but it is designed to be run from a container login script.When you move or rename a container object using NetWare Administrator or NETADMIN, you can create an alias that points to the moved or renamed container.An alias allows users who don't know the container has been moved or renamed to continue seeing the container (and the objects in it) by its original name or in its original location.In addition, an alias allows users whose name context in their NET.CFG file refers to the moved or renamed container to continue to be able to log in, even though their actual context in the Directory tree has changed.PAGENUM=157 ID="BP148"Since moving or renaming a container object changes the context of both the container and any users below the container, users in and below that container must update their name context in their NET.CFG file.To automatically update user NET.CFG filesIDXID="w10296"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2907"IDXID="w10297"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2582"
, place a command to execute NCUPDATE in the login script of the moved or renamed container and every container in and below it.When users who are in or below the moved or renamed container log in, LOGIN will recognize that the context used to log in contains an aliasIDXID="w10298"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i156"
. Then LOGIN will set the internal script variable LOGIN_ALIAS_CONTEXT to "Y."The network supervisor can place a command to run NCUPDATE in the login script of a container using NetWare Administrator or NETADMIN.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesThe network supervisor---or a user with the Supervisor object right to the moved or renamed container---can place the following lines in the login script of the container and every container in and below the container:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IF LOGIN_ALIAS_CONTEXT = "Y" THEN BEGIN FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  MAP INS S1:=<server name>/SYS:PUBLIC FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  #NCUPDATE /NP FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"  MAP DEL S1: FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"END When users log in to the server using an alias context, NCUPDATE updates each user's name context in the NET.CFG file.NCUPDATE updates the NET.CFG file that the Virtual Loadable ModuleTM (VLM) programs load from. The location of this NET.CFG file on users' workstations may vary, so the path to the NET.CFG file that will be updated is listed on the screen as NCUPDATE executes.PAGENUM=158 ID="BP149"In the example login script, the supervisor maps a temporary search drive to SYS:PUBLIC so the container login script can locate NCUPDATE.EXE in the PUBLIC directory. Then the search drive is deleted.The supervisor deletes the /NP in the example login script if he or she wants the users to be prompted to update their NET.CFG files.Once all user NET.CFG files are updated, the supervisor deletes the alias that points to the moved or renamed container.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Alias objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Alias object" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Login scriptsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"About Login Scripts" in Chapter 3 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Moving container objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Moving Objects in the Directory Tree" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Renaming container objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Renaming Leaf and Container Objects" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=159 ID="BP150"ID="FM55548"NDIRRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10299"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1464"
View information about files (date, size, owner, attributes, archive information)IDXID="w10300"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10301"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1058"
View information about directories (creation date, owner, subdirectories, Inherited Rights Filter, effective rights)View volume informationSort information according to creation date, owner, file or directory attributes, etc.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR [path] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path leading to the information you want to view. Include the volume, directory, or filename.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. See the following NDIR options:IDREF="FM60882""NDIR Display Options" on page 158.IDREF="FM92583""NDIR Format Options" on page 159.IDREF="FM81514""NDIR Sort Options" on page 159.IDREF="FM37265""NDIR Attribute Options" on page 160.IDREF="FM92321""NDIR Restriction Options" on page 162.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=160 ID="BP151"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NDIRMARK=BULLETA forward slash (/) must precede the first option of the option list. Use backslashes (\) in pathnames.You can use several options, but separate the options by spaces.To view several files in your default directory, include a comma between filenames.You can use wildcard characters.RENDERAS="SECT3"NDIR Display OptionsID="FM60882"IDXID="w10302"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4785"IDXID="w10303"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"IDXID="w10304"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DOCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort and view directories only.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FOCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort and view files only.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View every occurrence of the specified files within your current directory and your PATH environment.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SUBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort and view all subdirectories and their files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VOLCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View volume information for the specified volume.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SPACOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View directory space limitation information for the specified directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through a display.PAGENUM=161 ID="BP152"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM92583"NDIR Format OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DAIDXID="w10305"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i886"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View dates when files were last updated, archived, accessed, created, and copied.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10306"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2585"
DECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View file details.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COMPIDXID="w10307"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i723"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View file and compression sizes for NetWare 4 files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LONGIDXID="w10308"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2585"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View name space long filenames.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MACCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View Apple* Macintosh* files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RIDXID="w10309"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10310"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1071"
IDXID="w10311"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1807"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View file attributes, the compression and migration status, your effective rights, and the rights allowed to pass through the Inherited Rights Filter.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM81514"IDXID="w10312"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1058"
NDIR Sort OptionsIDXID="w10313"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4205"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"REVCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reverse the direction of a sort. Put REV before SORT. Example: /REV SORT OW.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT CRCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort by creation or copy date, from earliest to latest.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT UNCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Suspend sorting.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT ACCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort by date last accessed, from earliest to latest.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT ARCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort by date last archived, from earliest to latest.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT UPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort by last update, from earliest to latest.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT OWCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort alphabetically by file owner names.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SORT SICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sort by file size, from smallest to largest.PAGENUM=162 ID="BP153"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10314"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1451"IDXID="w10315"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1464"
ID="FM37265"IDXID="w10316"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1043"
NDIR Attribute OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Option  (option name)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NOTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files that don't have a specified attribute. For example, to display all files in the current context that do not have the Di (Delete Inhibit) attribute, type:MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.* /NOT /DICOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A  (Archive Needed)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files modified since the last backup.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ci  (Copy Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the file from being copied. This attribute applies to MAC files only.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Di  (Delete Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the file from being deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dc  (Don't Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the file from being compressed (regardless of what the volume or directory is set to).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dm  (Don't Migrate)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent the file from being migrated to a secondary backup (regardless of what the volume or directory is set to).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ds  (Don't Suballocate)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent an individual file from being suballocated, even if suballocation is enabled for the system. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"X  (Execute Only)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being copied or copied over. This attribute can be given only to .EXE or .COM files, and cannot be removed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"H  (Hidden)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being seen with the DOS DIR command. The file can't be copied or deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ic  (Immediate Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Compress a file as soon as possible.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"P  (Purge)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Purge a file immediately if the file is deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"R  (Rename Inhibit)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being renamed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ro  (Read Only)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow a file to only be read---it can't be written to or deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Rw  (Read Write)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow a file to be read and written to.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"S  (Shareable)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow a file to be used by several users simultaneously.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sy  (System)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Prevent a file from being seen with the DOS DIR command. The file can't be copied or deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"T  (Transactional)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protect a file by using the Transaction Tracking System (TTS).PAGENUM=163 ID="BP154"RENDERAS="SECT3"NDIR Status FlagsStatus flags provide you with information only. You can't change them.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Flag (flag name)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This flag meansVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cc (Can't Compress)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The file won't be compressed because of limited space savings.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Co (Compressed)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The file is compressed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"M (Migrated)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The file has been migrated.PAGENUM=164 ID="BP155"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM92321"NDIR Restriction OptionsIDXID="w10317"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4205"IDXID="w10318"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3165"
IDXID="w10319"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1464"IDXID="w10320"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i886"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Option (option name)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[NOT] (Not)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View all files except those the option specifies.Example: /CR [NOT] BEF | EQ | AFT  mm-dd-yyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CR BEF | EQ | AFT mm-dd- yy (Creation date)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files created on, before, or after the date specified.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/AC BEF | EQ | AFT mm-dd- yy (Last access)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View file last accessed before, on, or after the date specified.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/AR BEF | EQ | AFT mm-dd- yy (Last archive)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files last archived on, before, or after the date specified.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/UP BEF | EQ | AFT mm-dd- yy (Last update)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files last updated on, before, or after the date specified.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/OW EQ user (Owner)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files created by a specific user.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/SI GR | EQ | LE number(Size)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View files with byte sizes greater than, equal to, or less than a specified number.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo view all files in the current directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.*To view the version of all .EXE files on drive Z:, typePAGENUM=165 ID="BP156"FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR Z:\*.EXE /VERTo view only directories on drive F:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR F:\*.* /DOTo view rights for all files in the current directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.* /RTo view the date of file RECORD.TXT, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR RECORD.TXT /DATo view detailed file information on RECORD.TXT, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR RECORD.TXT /DTo view all Read Only files in SYS:PUBLIC, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR SYS:PUBLIC\*.* /ROTo search for all batch files on drive C:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR C:\*.BAT /SUBTo search (from the root) all subdirectories on your current drive for TEXTUTIL.MSG, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR TEXTUTIL.MSG /STo view all files in the current directory that are not Read Only, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.* /NOT ROTo view all files on the current directory by file size from smallest to largest, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.* /SORT SITo view all files in drive Z: by the most recent access date first, typePAGENUM=166 ID="BP157"FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR Z:*.* /REV SORT AC
PAGENUM=167 ID="BP158"To view all files updated before June 5, 1991, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.* /UP BEF 6-05-91To view all files not owned by user PAT, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR *.* /OW NOT EQ PAT.SALESYou must type the user's complete name.To find where COMMAND.COM is located, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NDIR COMMAND.COM /FIRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Complete nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Context" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Transactional attributeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"File and directory attributesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Attributes" in Concepts. IDREF="FM28275""FLAG" (page 76).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=168 ID="BP159"IDXID="w10321"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"IDXID="w10322"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3049"IDXID="w10323"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3042"IDXID="w10324"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3042"IDXID="w10325"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10326"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"
ID="FM71682"IDXID="w10327"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2639"
NETADMINRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeID="FM88680"Use at a workstation to manage NetWare Directory Services (NDS) objects and their properties. Users can view, create, move, delete, and assign rights to any NDS object under their jurisdiction.You can't manage printing and file system environments from NETADMIN. Use PCONSOLE and FILER, respectively.IDREF="FM49628"Figure 2-7 shows the functions you can select from the "NetAdmin Options" main menu.LABEL="2-7" FLOAT="0"ID="FM49628"NETADMIN FunctionsFILEREF="n41ut58a.tif"PAGENUM=169 ID="BP160"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NETADMIN [/VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.For help with tasks, press <F1> while you are in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NETADMINNETADMIN displays information in windows, representing layers of the Directory tree. You can select the level of the tree in either of two ways: browsing the tree or choosing "Search" from the main menu.RENDERAS="SECT3"Using the Browse ScreenBrowsing is selecting objects to work with by moving through the Directory tree. As shown in the following figure, you select a container and press MOREINFO="NONE"<Enter> to open it. When you have found the object you want, highlight it and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10> to view the available options.PAGENUM=170 ID="BP161"LABEL="2-8" FLOAT="0"IDXID="w10328"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2097"IDXID="w10329"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"IDXID="w10330"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i534"IDXID="w10331"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2097"NETADMIN Browse ScreenFILEREF="n41ut65a.tif"Use the following table as a guide in browsing the tree.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10332"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1082"
ToCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Do thisVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Browse up the Directory tree to the parent containerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Choose ".. (parent)."COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or edit the properties of the current container objectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select ". (current context)" and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Browse down the Directory tree COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Choose objects with a plus (+) in front of them. IDXID="w10333"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i806"
When you choose a container object, you can see the objects in that container.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or modify an object's propertiesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10> on the object. PAGENUM=171 ID="BP162"RENDERAS="SECT3"Searching for an ObjectYou can define where and what you want to search for. The following figure shows elements that can be defined for a search.LABEL="2-9" FLOAT="0"Search CriteriaFILEREF="n41ut01a.tif"Highlight each field to define the required criteria and press MOREINFO="NONE"<Enter>. When all fields are defined properly, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10> to start the search. All objects found are displayed in a new window. Select the appropriate object and press <MOREINFO="NONE"Enter>. From the "Actions for:" menu, select "View or Edit Properties" or "View or Edit Trustees of This Object."RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10334"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"IDXID="w10335"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2097"
Managing Object PropertiesAll IDXID="w10336"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"
objects have properties that define them. Some properties are mandatory. You must specify their values before the object can be created. (Mandatory properties are listed on the screen where you create a new object.) Other properties are optional; they help define the object or help you search for an object. PAGENUM=172 ID="BP163"IDXID="w10337"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"
The following screen appears when you press <MOREINFO="NONE"F10> to view or edit an object's properties. The last name and login name are mandatory for the User object.LABEL="2-10" FLOAT="0"User PropertiesFILEREF="n41ut63a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10338"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3049"IDXID="w10339"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3049"
Assigning RightsAfter you select an object, you can view or change access rights byMARK=BULLETChanging that object's rights to files on a volumeChanging who has rights to view or change the properties of that objectRENDERAS="SECT4"IDXID="w10340"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3049"
Rights to Files and DirectoriesTo make trustee assignments, you must choose the level of the Directory tree you want. IDREF="FM41678"Figure 2-11 shows the window where you will make this choice.PAGENUM=173 ID="BP164"LABEL="2-11" FLOAT="0"ID="FM41678"View or Edit Object's RightsFILEREF="n41ut50a.tif"MARK=BULLETAfter you select a volume object and its path, all of the object's trustee assignments in that directory are listed. You can change the rights granted, or add or remove other trustee assignments.You must have the Access Control right to a file or directory to change an object's rights to it. For procedures to perform these tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> in the utility.RENDERAS="SECT4"IDXID="w10341"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4595"IDXID="w10342"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3049"IDXID="w10343"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i609"IDXID="w10344"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3051"
Rights to ObjectsIf you select "View or Edit the Trustees of this Object" from the "Actions for Organizational Role:" menu, and then select "Trustees," the following screen appears, listing all trustee assignments that grant rights to access this object and its properties.MARK=BULLETYou can change the rights that any trustee has to this object, or add and delete trustee assignments from the list.You can also view or change the Inherited Rights Filter of the object, if you have sufficient rights.PAGENUM=174 ID="BP165"LABEL="2-12" FLOAT="0"Trustee AssignmentsFILEREF="n40ut48a.tif"Example:IDXID="w10345"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3049"
Assigning Rights to Objects and PropertiesIf you press MOREINFO="NONE"<Ins> at the screen shown in the previous figure, the following screen appears, allowing you to select a property (or the object) that a new trustee should be granted rights to.PAGENUM=175 ID="BP166"LABEL="2-13" FLOAT="0"Property ListFILEREF="n41ut49a.tif"To change the trustees who have rights to it, you must have at least the Write property right to the ACL property of this object. (For procedures to perform these tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> while you are in the utility.)RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10346"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4722"IDXID="w10347"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4722"
Creating User TemplatesIf you need to create many users in the same container who need some of the same information in their properties, you can create a user template.A user template is an object that contains default information that you can apply to users when you create them. This makes creating a large number of users easier.You can create a user template in any Organization or Organizational Unit. When you create an Organization or Organizational Unit, you are asked if you want to create a user template.Press <MOREINFO="NONE"F1> to get more information.PAGENUM=176 ID="BP167"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10348"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3042"
Create ObjectsPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Objects"; browse the Directory tree and select the container object where the new object will be located.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<Ins> and select the object type.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10349"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3833"IDXID="w10350"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"
Edit User Password Expiration DatePERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Objects"; highlight the user object and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View or Edit Properties of This Object"; select "Account Restrictions"; then select "Password Restrictions" from the menu.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Manage Directory and File Rights for an ObjectPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Objects"; highlight the object and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View or Edit This Object's Rights to Files and Directories."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Manage Other Objects' Rights for an ObjectPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Objects"; highlight the object and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View or Edit Trustees of This Object."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.
PAGENUM=177 ID="BP168"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10351"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2209"IDXID="w10352"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"IDXID="w10353"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i66"IDXID="w10354"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"IDXID="w10355"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"IDXID="w10356"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"IDXID="w10357"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3833"
Modify Object PropertiesPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Objects"; highlight the object whose properties you want to modify and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "View or Edit Properties of This Object"; select the property to modify, such as "Groups," "Login Script," "Account Restrictions," etc., from the menu.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Move Objects to Another Location in the Directory TreePERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Manage Objects"; highlight the object you want to move and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Move" from the menu.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ObjectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Object" in ConceptsAppendix A, IDREF="FM97054""NDS and Bindery Objects and Properties" (page 443).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"User templateCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"User template" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Container objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Container object" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Leaf objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Leaf objects" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ContextCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Context" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=178 ID="BP169"ID="FM28471"NETSYNC3RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeLoad IDXID="w10358"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2682"
at a NetWare 3 file server console to enable the NetWare Bindery Synchronizer.You need to load NETSYNC4 on the NetWare 4.1 server before loading NETSYNC3 on the NetWare 3 servers.MARK=BULLETCopies (uploads) the NetWare 3 server's bindery information to the NetWare 4.1 server's bindery context, and then continues to communicate with the NetWare 4.1 server in order to receive updates to Directory information. Moves printing objects and converts the NetWare 3 PRINTDEF database into a NetWare 4.1-compatible database. Creates a working directory (NETSYNC) for the NetSyncTM log files under SYS:SYSTEM.NETSYNC3 should run continuously, so you should add it to the IDXID="w10359"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"
AUTOEXEC.NCF file on the NetWare 3 server. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD NETSYNC3For help with tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="13*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"For information onCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Installing and Using NETSYNC3COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ntsncenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Installing and Using NetSync.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=179 ID="BP170"ID="FM31683"NETSYNC4RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeLoad IDXID="w10360"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2684"
at the NetWare 4.1 "host" server console to enable the NetWare 
Bindery Synchronizer. MARK=BULLETAuthorizes NetWare 3 servers to be part of the NetSync cluster.Receives information from the NetWare 3 binderies in its cluster, and then continually copies (downloads) updated Directory information to all of the attached NetWare 3 servers.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD NETSYNC4For help with tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="13*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Installing and Using NETSYNC4COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ntsncenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Installing and Using NetSync.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=180 ID="BP171"IDXID="w10361"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2687"ID="FM50765"NETUSERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to manage network tasks.ID="FM35615"LABEL="2-14" FLOAT="0"NETUSER FunctionsFILEREF="n40ut74a.tif"PAGENUM=181 ID="BP172"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NETUSER [/VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.For help with tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> in the utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"Capture a PrinterPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Printing."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select the printer port from the available list.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Change Printers." PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Print a JobPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Printing."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Print Jobs."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Send Messages PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Messages."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Send Messages to Users" or "Send Messages to Groups."
PAGENUM=182 ID="BP173"PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Map a DrivePERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Drives."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Drive mappings" or "Search mappings."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Change a PasswordPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Attachments."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select the NetWare server and the username for which you want to change the password.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Password."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"Attach to a NetWare ServerPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select "Attachments"; press <MOREINFO="NONE"Alt><F1> to display more options at the bottom of the screen.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <Ins> to display a list of available servers.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NetWare User Tools in DOSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="ws_d1enu" COLLECTION="nw41"Understanding Client Tools" in Chapter 3 of NetWare Client for DOS and MS Windows User Guide.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=183 ID="BP174"ID="FM63957"NetWare AdministratorRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to perform in Microsoft* Windows (MS Windows) or OS/2 the supervisory tasks that are available in FILER, NETADMIN, PARTMGR, and PCONSOLE.IDXID="w10362"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2697"
 You canMARK=BULLETCreate users and groupsCreate and delete Directory Services objectsMove and rename Directory Services objectsAssign rights in the Directory tree and in the file systemSet up printing servicesSet up and manage Directory Services partitions and replicasRENDERAS="SECT2"Starting NetWare AdministratorDuring installation, files for the MS Windows NetWare Administrator are copied to the SYS:PUBLIC directory. For the OS/2 NetWare Administrator, the files are copied to the SYS:PUBLIC/OS2 directory.Before you use the NetWare Administrator for the first time in MS Windows or OS/2, create an NWADMIN icon. Thereafter, you can choose the icon to start the utility.For instructions, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Installing an MS Windows Workstation and Starting NetWare Administrator" or "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Installing an OS/2 Workstation and Starting NetWare Administrator" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NetWare AdministratorNetWare Administrator has a graphical user interface (GUI) and runs as a multiple-document interface (MDI) application. PAGENUM=184 ID="BP175"For help in NetWare Administrator, choose the Help button on the screen, pressMOREINFO="NONE" <F1>, or use the pull-down Help menu.RENDERAS="SECT3"Using the Menu BarID="FM96655"The menu bar displays headings for several menus. To complete a task, you first select an object in the browser, next select a menu heading, and then choose the option you want to use in the menu.
FILEREF="n41ut02a.tif"Each time you select a menu option, a message appears in the title bar explaining briefly what the menu option does. If an option is grayed, it is not available for the object you selected.RENDERAS="SECT3"Using the BrowserWhen you launch NetWare Administrator, you will notice that its primary window is a browser that displays the NetWare Directory Services (NDS) container objects and leaf objects at your current context in the Directory tree.You can open up to nine additional browsers. You might want to open an additional browser to see a different context in the Directory tree.To open another browser, select a container object (this will be the root object in the browser window) and, from the "Tools" menu, select "Browser."RENDERAS="SECT3"Working with ObjectsMARK=BULLETTo view the file system of a server in your tree,MARK=BULLETDouble-click on the Volume object associated with that server For example, to see the file system in the SYS: volume of server KATT, double-click on the Volume object KATT_SYS.To open a container object and view the objects in itMARK=BULLETDouble-click anywhere on the container object's name or icon.PAGENUM=185 ID="BP176"Select the container object and, from the "View" menu, choose "Expand." To view the object dialog (object details) of a container objectMARK=BULLETSelect the container object and from the "Object" menu, choose "Details." Select the container object, right-click once, and choose "Details" from the short menu that appears.To view the object dialog (object details) of a leaf objectMARK=BULLETSelect the leaf object and double-click.Select the leaf object and from the "Object" menu, choose "Details."Select the leaf object, right-click once, and choose "Details" from the short menu that appears.RENDERAS="SECT3"Using the Object DialogThe object dialog allows you to view and edit information about an object's properties. When you open an object dialog, you will notice that along the right side of the dialog are "pages" that you view one at a time. The pages are part of one dialog. When you select a different page, you're still in the same dialog.The "Identification" page is the first page you see when you open an object dialog. IDREF="FM26498"Figure 2-15 shows the "Identification" page of a User object.PAGENUM=186 ID="BP177"LABEL="2-15" FLOAT="0"ID="FM26498"Identification PageFILEREF="n41ut04a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10363"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3972"
Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Creating container objects with NetWare AdministratorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating Container Objects" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Creating leaf object with NetWare AdministratorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating Leaf Objects" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Moving objects with NetWare AdministratorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Moving Objects in the Directory Tree" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Assigning rights to the file system in NetWare AdministratorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Understanding File and Directory Rights" in Chapter 2 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Assigning rights to NDS objectsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Trustee Assignments to Objects" in Chapter 1 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Printing in NetWare AdministratorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 3, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Print Services with the NetWare Administrator Utility" in Print Services.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using Partition Manager in NetWare AdministratorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating and Managing Directory Services Partitions" in Chapter 5 of Supervising the NetworkRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=188 ID="BP178"ID="FM25543"NLISTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation toMARK=BULLETView information about objects such as users, groups, volumes, servers, etc.Search on objects and object propertiesRENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10364"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"ID="FM43712"IDXID="w10365"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"IDXID="w10366"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"IDXID="w10367"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"
SyntaxNLIST [class type [property search option]  [object name] [/basic option] [display option]] |  [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"class typeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an object type, such as USER, SERVER, PRINTER, GROUP, VOLUME, etc. (IDREF="FM66693"See "NDS Object Classes" on page 444.) For bindery servers (NetWare 3), replace class type with USER, SERVER, QUEUE, GROUP, or VOLUME. These are the only objects available in bindery services mode for NetWare 3.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"property search optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a search option.For online help, type NLIST /? RCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"object nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the object you want information about.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/basic optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify any available option. IDREF="FM63596"See "NLIST Options" on page 186."COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"display optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Select how data is displayed. For online help, type NLIST /? DCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=189 ID="BP179"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM63596"NLIST OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View users who are logged in.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"B[= server name]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View information stored in the bindery of the specified server. (Bindery servers only.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"C COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CO[=context]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the context to be searched (NDS servers only).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"D COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View all object properties.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"N COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View object names.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"S COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search all levels of the database, beginning at the current context.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SHOW[property]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a specific property of an object.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TREECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View all tree names visible from this login.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NLISTMARK=BULLETSearching on objects and properties allows you to view specific groups of objects.For example, you can view all users whose passwords will expire on a certain date. Or you can view all groups that have a particular user as a membe.rPAGENUM=190 ID="BP180"You can use Property groups only with a bindery connection, or with bindery services.USER, SERVER, QUEUE, GROUP, and VOLUME are the only objects you can search on in a bindery context.IDREF="FM12068"Table 2-3 shows the syntax for some of the most frequently use NLIST operations.For detailed information on the parameters in this table, see the online help.LABEL="2-3" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM12068" NLIST SyntaxCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="9*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="26*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"To listCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use this syntaxVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Any informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST [class type] [=object name] [/option...]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ID="FM48663"User informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST user=[username] [WHERE [property] [operator] [value]] [SHOW [property]] [/option...]For bindery servers, use [property group] instead of [property]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10368"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2922"IDXID="w10369"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"
ID="FM31162"IDXID="w10370"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"IDXID="w10371"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2802"IDXID="w10372"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2803"IDXID="w10373"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2844"IDXID="w10374"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"
Server informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST server=[server name] [WHERE [property] [operator] [value]] [SHOW [property]] [/option...]For bindery servers, use [property group] instead of [property]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10375"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"ID="FM31751"IDXID="w10376"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"IDXID="w10377"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1616"IDXID="w10378"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"IDXID="w10379"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"
Group informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST group=[group] [WHERE [property] [operator] [value]] [SHOW [property]] [/option...]For bindery servers, use [property group] instead of [property]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10380"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3515"IDXID="w10381"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3515"
ID="FM44803"IDXID="w10382"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"IDXID="w10383"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"IDXID="w10384"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"
Printer informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST printer=[printer] [WHERE [property] [operator] [value]] [SHOW [property]] [/option...]For bindery servers, use [property group] instead of [property]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10385"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"IDXID="w10386"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2132"
ID="FM56894"IDXID="w10387"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"IDXID="w10388"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3439"IDXID="w10389"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3439"
Print Queue informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST queue=[queue] [WHERE [property] [operator] [value]] [SHOW [property]] [/option...]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10390"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"IDXID="w10391"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"
ID="FM71497"IDXID="w10392"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"IDXID="w10393"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4787"IDXID="w10394"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4787"IDXID="w10395"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4787"
Volume informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST volume=[volume] [WHERE [property] [operator] [value]] [SHOW [property]] [/option...]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10396"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3985"ID="FM10216"IDXID="w10397"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3042"
Object informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST [class type] [=object name] [[WHERE name [operator] [value1] | WHERE object] [operator] [value2]] [/option...]COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery object informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLIST /OT [=value] [WHERE name [operator] [value1] | WHERE object] [operator] [value2]] [/option...]PAGENUM=191 ID="BP181"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"UsersMARK=BULLETTo list all users whose password length is less than 5, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER WHERE "PASSWORD MINIMUM LENGTH" LT 5To IDXID="w10398"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i64"IDXID="w10399"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i66"
list all users whose accounts will expire by June 30, 1995, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER WHERE "ACCOUNT EXPIRATION" LE 06-30-95To IDXID="w10400"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"
list all users who are members of group MANAGERS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER WHERE "GROUP MEMBERSHIP" = MANAGERSTo IDXID="w10401"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"IDXID="w10402"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"
list all users logged in, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER /ATo list all users who have supervisor equivalence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER WHERE "SECURITY EQUAL TO" = SUPERVISORTo list all properties of user CINDY, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER=CINDY /D
PAGENUM=192 ID="BP182"To list all users managed by JOE (bindery users only), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER WHERE MANAGERS=JOETo list users logged in to the database, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER /A /STo list properties of users in the current context, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER /DTo list the login script of every user who has a login script in all contexts, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER SHOW "LOGIN SCRIPT" /STo list users whose telephone numbers begin with 4 (search all subordinate containers), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER WHERE "TELEPHONE NUMBER" = 4* /STo IDXID="w10403"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"
list users at a context, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER /CO <context>To list telephone numbers of all users in the current context, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST USER SHOW "TELEPHONE NUMBER"RENDERAS="SECT3"ServersMARK=BULLETTo list servers running NetWare 4.1, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVER WHERE VERSION = "NOVELL NETWARE 4.10[DS]"If you don't know the version number of a server, use the SHOW option. In this case, you can use NLIST SERVER SHOW VERSION.PAGENUM=193 ID="BP183"To list the network address of server ACCT (search all subordinate containers), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVER=ACCT SHOW "NETWORK ADDRESS" /SFor bindery servers, type,FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVER=ACCT SHOW "ATTACHMENT INFORMATION"To IDXID="w10404"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2802"IDXID="w10405"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i813"
list servers in the current context, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVERTo IDXID="w10406"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2802"
search for servers in the Directory tree, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVER /STo see if server ACCT is up, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVER=ACCT /ATo list servers whose name begins with L, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST SERVER = L*RENDERAS="SECT3"GroupsMARK=BULLETTo IDXID="w10407"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"
list members of group TEMPORARY, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST GROUP=TEMPORARY SHOW MEMBERSTo list groups with MSMITH as a member, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST GROUP WHERE MEMBER EQ MSMITHTo IDXID="w10408"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"
list the owner of group RECORDS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST GROUP=RECORDS SHOW OWNER
PAGENUM=194 ID="BP184"To IDXID="w10409"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"
list all information about group RECORDS (bindery servers only), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST GROUP=RECORDS SHOW MISCRENDERAS="SECT3"PrintersMARK=BULLETTo list operators for printer P1, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST PRINTER=Q1 SHOW OPERATORTo IDXID="w10410"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3515"
list users for printer P1, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST PRINTER=Q1 SHOW USERTo list printers whose name begins with P, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST PRINTER WHERE NAME = P*To list printers in the current context and below, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST PRINTER /SRENDERAS="SECT3"Print Queues (Bindery Servers)MARK=BULLETTo list operators for print queue Q1, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST QUEUE=Q1 SHOW OPERATORSTo IDXID="w10411"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3439"
list users for print queue Q1, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST QUEUE=Q1 SHOW USERSTo list print queue names, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST QUEUE /N
PAGENUM=195 ID="BP185"RENDERAS="SECT3"VolumesMARK=BULLETTo IDXID="w10412"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
list host servers where all volumes beginning with A reside, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST VOLUME=A* SHOW "HOST SERVER"To IDXID="w10413"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
list the bindery server where volume VOL1: resides, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST VOLUME=VOL1 SHOW SERVERTo list the server running Directory Services where volume VOL1 resides, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST VOLUME=VOL1 SHOW "HOST SERVER"RENDERAS="SECT3"ObjectsMARK=BULLETTo list objects named MYSERVER, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST * WHERE NAME = MYSERVERTo list objects in the current context, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NLIST *RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Current ContextCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Context" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PropertiesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Property" in Concepts. RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=196 ID="BP186"ID="FM58814"ID="FM43531"IDXID="w10414"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i56"IDXID="w10415"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2939"
NMENURENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to IDXID="w10416"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2402"
access customized menus that have been created.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NMENU menu_name [/?]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"menu_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the .DAT menu file. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NMENUMARK=BULLETYou can only use NMENU when a menu file already exists. You must know the name and location of the menu file and have Read and File Scan rights to the directory containing the menu file.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Creating menu filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating a Menu File" in Chapter 4 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=197 ID="BP187"NPAMSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeLoad on a NetWare 4.1 SFT III server to enable the mounting of a IDXID="w10417"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
CD-ROM as a NetWare volume.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD IDXID="w10418"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4127"
NPAMSRENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10419"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3000"
Using NPAMSMARK=BULLETNPAMS (NetWare Peripheral ArchitectureTM Mirrored Server) is a custom device module that is required for mounting a CD-ROM as a NetWare SFT III IDXID="w10420"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
volume. Load NPAMS in the MSEngine after loading the CD-ROM driver and the NetWare Peripheral Architecture driver (NPAIO.DSK) in the IOEngine.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mounting a CD-ROM as an SFT III volumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Mounting a CD-ROM as a NetWare 4.1 SFT III Volume" in Appendix C of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=198 ID="BP188"ID="FM89986"NPATHIDXID="w10421"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3002"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to view the NetWare search sequence for a file. This information helps you troubleshoot why your station can't find a particular file, why it's finding an incorrect version of the file, or why it's displaying a foreign language.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH [utility][filename[,filename...]] [/option...] [/? | /VER]When you view your workstation's search sequence for a file, include the name of the utility in the command. The search sequence depends on the drive and directory that the utility is executed from.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"utilityCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the utility you are trying to execute.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify either the message or the Unicode* filename (and its extension) that your workstation either can't find or can't find the correct version of.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option.IDREF="FM26739"See "NPATH Options" on page 197.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=199 ID="BP189"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using NPATHMARK=BULLETUse NPATH when you try to execute a utility and have one of these problems:MARK=BULLETYou get a message that you're missing a message file (either an .MSG, .HEP, .IDX, or .XLT file), or a Unicode file. This message identifies the file you're missing.You get a message that you have an incorrect version of a message file (an .MSG, .HEP, .IDX, or .XLT file). This message shows the version of the file your workstation found, and the version you need.You get a foreign language displayed on your screen.Your workstation does not find a particular file in its search sequence.To find your workstation's file search sequence for message files, use NPATH with no parameters.If you include a filename in the command, NPATH displays the path to the first occurrence of the file in the search sequence.To search for multiple files at the same time, separate the filenames with commas.A Unicode file without an extension defaults to the country code.Unicode files are not required to run NPATH. NPATH runs without a message file if the correct file is not available.The way the file search sequence is designed for NetWare utilities, the same path may be looked at more than once.PAGENUM=200 ID="BP190"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM26739"NPATH OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="12*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="14*"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(option name)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A (All)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List the path to all occurrences of the file you specify.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"D (Details)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the language, version number, date, and time of the file you specify.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/Uni /D (Unicode details)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the code page and country code your workstation is set to, the Unicode files needed to run the NetWare utility, and the path to the first occurrence of each file. Does not require a filename. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Uni (Unicode)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"List all paths to Unicode files.RENDERAS="SECT3"Troubleshooting with NPATHCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IfCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Do the followingVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"You get a message that you're missingIDXID="w10422"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
 a file but you know the file is located in a particular directoryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1. Map a search drive to the directory that the file is in. (To make the search drive permanent, add it to your login script.)2. Use NPATH if you want to confirm that your workstation can now find the file in its search sequence.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"You get a message that you're missing a file and you don't know where the file is locatedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1. Check the PUBLIC/NLS\<language> directory.2. Use NDIR to locate the directory that the file is in if it's not in the PUBLIC\NLS\<language> directory.3. Use NWXTRACT to get the file from diskette or CD if the file isn't on any of your drives (if it's not in PUBLIC\NLS\<language> and NDIR can't find it).4. Map a search drive to the directory that the file is in. (To make the search drive permanent, add it to your login script.)5. Use NPATH to confirm that your workstation can now find the file in its search sequence.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"You get a message that you have the incorrect versionIDXID="w10423"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
 of a fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1. Use NPATH to view the search sequence your workstation is using to find each occurrence and version number of the file.2. Identify whether the version of the file you need is in the search sequence.Note: If your workstation finds an older version of a file in the search sequence before it finds a newer version, the older version is the one your workstation loads.3. Run the utility from the directory that the version you need is in if that version is displayed in the search sequence, or copy the file to your current directory.4. Use NWXTRACT to get the file from diskette or CD if the version you need is not in the search sequence.5. Use NPATH if you want to confirm that your workstation can now find the correct version (before any other versions) in its search sequence.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"You get a foreign languageIDXID="w10424"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2053"IDXID="w10425"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1540"IDXID="w10426"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3031"
 displayed on your screenCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1. Change your NWLANGUAGE environment variable to your native language. 2. Use the SET NWLANGUAGE = command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.3. Use NPATH to confirm that your workstation can now find your native language message files in its search sequence.PAGENUM=203 ID="BP191"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo view your workstation's search sequence for message files, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATHTo view the path to the first occurrence of NCOPY.MSG found in the search sequence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH NCOPY NCOPY.MSGTo view the path to each occurrence of FILER.MSG found in the search sequence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH FILER FILER.MSG /ATo view the path to the first occurrence of SEND.HEP found in the search sequence, as well as its language, version number, date, and time, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH SEND SEND.HEP /DTo view the path to each occurrence of BIND.VLM in the search sequence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH BIND.VLM /ATo view the path to each occurrence of TEXTUTIL.MSG (for NETADMIN) found in the search sequence, as well as each file's language, version number, date, and time, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH NETADMIN TEXTUTIL.MSG /A /DTo view your workstation's search sequence for the Unicode files needed to execute FLAG, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH FLAG /Uni
PAGENUM=204 ID="BP192"To view which code page and country code your workstation is set to, the Unicode files needed to execute RIGHTS, and the path to the first occurrence of each Unicode file found in the search sequence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH RIGHTS /Uni /DTo view the path to the first occurrence of UNI_MON.001 found in the search sequence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH UNI_MON.001 /Uni To view the path to each occurrence of UNI_MON.001 found in the search sequence, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH UNI_MON.001 /Uni /ATo view the code page and country code your workstation is set to, the Unicode files your workstation needs to run NetWare utilities, and the path to each occurrence of each file, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPATH /Uni /D /ARENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Unicode filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Unicode" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search drive mappingsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Drive mapping" in Concepts."BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Search drive" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NetWare utilities' search sequenceCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Search algorithm" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=205 ID="BP193"IDXID="w10427"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3435"IDXID="w10428"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
ID="FM44269"NPRINTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to print plain text files or files from outside an application.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPRINT filename [P=printername | Q=queuename] [/option...] [/? | /VER]RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Refer toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using NPRINTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using NPRINT" in Chapter 5 of Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=206 ID="BP194"ID="FM90082"NPRINTER.EXERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to attach a printer to a workstation.RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10429"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3004"
Command SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NPRINTER printername [/options...]orFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"NPRINTER printservername printernumber [/options...]RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using NPRINTER.EXECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 7, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up Printers Attached to Workstations or Servers" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=207 ID="BP195"ID="FM50813"NPRINTER.NLMRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse to attach a printer to a NetWare server.Multiple NPRINTER.NLMs can be loaded on a NetWare server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD NPRINTER printernameorFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD NPRINTER printservername printernumberRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using NPRINTER.NLMCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 7, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up Printers Attached to Workstations or Servers" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=208 ID="BP196"IDXID="w10430"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4761"IDXID="w10431"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"IDXID="w10432"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3027"ID="FM57493"NVERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation toMARK=BULLETView version information for the workstation and attached serversView Novell OS/2 Requester version information for OS/2 and attached serversRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NVER [/C] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=209 ID="BP197"ID="FM96277"IDXID="w10433"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3040"
NWXTRACTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to extract and IDXID="w10434"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i603"
copy files from CD-ROM or from the installation diskettes to the network or to local drives.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NWXTRACT path filename | groupname [destination] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to the master data file (FILES.DAT).Note: Master data files are language-specific and are located in their respective language subdirectories in the Directory tree.For example, the master data file for English (FILES.DAT) is located in the \NETWARE.40\ENGLISH directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"filename COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the file you want to extract. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"groupname COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the group of files you want to extract. A list of group names is available in online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"destination COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path where you want the extracted files copied to (if you don't want them copied to the directories they were copied to at installation).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM12002"See "NWXTRACT Options" on page 207.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=210 ID="BP198"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM12002"NWXTRACT OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"S=server | server objectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy files to their normal location on the specified server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"T=typeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the type of file to be extracted. Types: DOS, MAC, OS2, SER (server), UNX, WIN.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo extract FILER.EXE from the diskette and put it in the normal location on server ACCT, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NWXTRACT A:FILER.EXE /S=ACCTTo extract NCOPY.MSG from the diskette and put it on drive C:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NWXTRACT A:NCOPY.MSG CTo extract the OS/2 FILER.EXE from the diskette and put it in the normal location on server ACCT, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"NWXTRACT A:FILER.EXE /S=ACCT /T=OS2RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=211 ID="BP199"ID="FM77858"IDXID="w10435"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3066"
OFFRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10436"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i639"
clear the IDXID="w10437"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
console screen. (You can also use CLS to clear the screen.)RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"OFFRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=212 ID="BP200"ID="FM21408"PARTMGRRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to IDXID="w10438"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3238"
manage partitions and their replicas. IDREF="FM78084"Figure 2-16 shows the functions available in PARTMGR.LABEL="2-16" FLOAT="0"ID="FM78084"Functions in PARTMGRFILEREF="n41ut57a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PARTMGR [/VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. For help with tasks, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> in the utility. PAGENUM=213 ID="BP201"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using PARTMGRRENDERAS="SECT3"Using the PARTMGR BrowserIDREF="FM30776"Figure 2-17 shows the PARTMGR browser that opens when you choose "Manage Partitions" from the "Partition Administration" menu.LABEL="2-17" FLOAT="0"ID="FM30776"The PARTMGR BrowserFILEREF="n41ut66a.tif"PAGENUM=214 ID="BP202"MARK=BULLETTo browse up the Directory tree to the parent container, choose ".. (parent)."To view or edit the replicas of the current container object (if that container object is a partition), select ". (current context)" and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>. To browse down the Directory tree, choose objects with a plus (+) in front of them. When you choose a container object, you can see the objects in that container. To create a new partition with a container object as the root of the partition, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10> on the container that you want to be the root of the partition.To view or modify a partition's replicas, to merge a partition with its parent partition, or to abort a partition operation that's in progress, select the partition and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.Objects that don't have a plus (+) sign are servers. To see a list of the replicas stored on a server, select a server object and press MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10439"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3790"
Managing ReplicasReplicas are copies of the information in the partition. They are stored on servers in the Directory tree. There are four types of replicas: master read/ write, read-only, and subordinate. For an explanation of replica types, see "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Replica" in Concepts.IDREF="FM31490"Figure 2-18 shows the replica list, which includes the servers where the replicas are stored.PAGENUM=215 ID="BP203"LABEL="2-18" FLOAT="0"ID="FM31490"Replicas Stored on a ServerFILEREF="n41ut64a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"Merge PartitionsPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"From the PARTMGR menuMOREINFO="NONE", select "Manage Partitions" and browse the Directory tree to select the partition you want to merge with its parent.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10> and select "Merge with Parent Partition."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10440"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3234"
Create PartitionsPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"From the PARTMGR menuMOREINFO="NONE", select "Manage Partitions" and browse the Directory tree to select the container you want to be the root object for the partition.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>. 
PAGENUM=216 ID="BP204"PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10441"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3790"IDXID="w10442"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2496"
View or Manage ReplicasPERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"From the PARTMGR menuMOREINFO="NONE", select "Manage Partitions" and browse the Directory tree to select the partition whose replicas you want to manage.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10> and select "View/Edit Replicas."PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"To manage replicas, press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<F10>.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Press <F1> for help from here.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PartitionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Partition (NetWare Directory)" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReplicasCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Replica" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Partition and replica operationsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 5, "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing the NetWare Directory Tree" in Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=217 ID="BP205"IDXID="w10443"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3515"IDXID="w10444"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3456"IDXID="w10445"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3439"IDXID="w10446"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2496"
ID="FM88294"PCONSOLERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation toMARK=BULLETCreate, assign, modify, delete, and monitor print queues, print servers, and printersSend, monitor, modify, pause, resume, and delete print jobsQuickly install basic print services using Quick SetupEnable and view the print server auditing logChange your NetWare Directory Services contextPCONSOLE is the primary administrative utility for NetWare print services. NetWare Administrator provides functionality in the graphical environment similar to that provided by PCONSOLE in a menu environment.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"PCONSOLERENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PCONSOLECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 4, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Print Services with PCONSOLE" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=218 ID="BP206"ID="FM13876"IDXID="w10447"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3313"
PINGRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request packet to an IP node on your internetwork.PING determines whether an IP node is reachable on your internetwork.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD PINGRENDERAS="SECT2"Using PINGMARK=BULLETPING sends an ICMP echo request packet to an IP node on your internetwork. If the target node receives the packet, it sends back a reply packet.To select an IP node, enter its hostname or IP address in the "Host Name" field.You can also specify the number of seconds between each packet transmission and the size of the packet, in bytes.To start sending packets, press MOREINFO="NONE"<Esc>. The sending node continues to send request packets and collect response time statistics until you press MOREINFO="NONE"<Esc> again to exit PING.To select additional IP nodes, press MOREINFO="NONE"<Ins>. Enter the hostname or IP address of the node in the "Host Name" field. Press MOREINFO="NONE"<Esc> to start sending packets.PAGENUM=219 ID="BP207"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP protocolCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP addressingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=220 ID="BP208"PMMONRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse on a NetWare Server for OS/2 to monitor OS/2 and NetWare Server for OS/2 CPU use to allocate memory and to set performance tuning levels on a NetWare Server for OS/2.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxMARK=BULLETFrom within the Novell group on your OS/2 desktop, double-click on the "PMMON" icon.From the command line in an OS/2 window or full screen session, change to the \NWOS2 directory and typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PMMONAn example of the PMMON main screen is shown in the following figure.LABEL="2-19" FLOAT="0"The PMMON Main ScreenFILEREF="n41ut03a.tif"PAGENUM=221 ID="BP209"For help in PMMON, you can either press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1>, use the pull-down Help menu, or click on the Help buttons.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using PMMONMARK=BULLETPMMON tracks many of the same server statistics for NetWare Server for OS/2 as does MONITOR for regular NetWare 4.MONITOR should be used in most cases for monitoring NetWare Server for OS/2. However, you should always use PMMON, rather than MONITOR, to monitor CPU utilization between OS/2 and NetWare Server for OS/2 because it is more accurate. For example, the server CPU usage may always read 100% in MONITOR and information about OS/2 CPU usage may not be gathered correctly.The following statistics are gathered and displayed in PMMON:MARK=BULLETNetWare Server for OS/2 useOriginal, total, dirty, and directory cache buffersPacket receive buffersService processesPercent of OS/2 CPU and NetWare CPU useDisk requestsConnections in useNumber of open filesRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PMMON to monitor NetWare Server for OS/2, set processing time, and set memory sharing optionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Appendix B, "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing NetWare Server for OS/2" in Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=222 ID="BP210"IDXID="w10448"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3479"IDXID="w10449"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3417"IDXID="w10450"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3417"ID="FM98231"PRINTCONRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse to create or modify print job configurations to specify a default printer and other options for users who use CAPTURE, NPRINT, NETUSER, or PCONSOLE.PRINTCON also allows you to change your current User or container object (in NetWare Directory Services) or your NetWare server (in bindery mode).RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"PRINTCONRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PRINTCONCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 8, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating and Managing Print Job Configurations" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=223 ID="BP211"ID="FM88436"PRINTDEFRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse to view, modify, import, or export print device definitions and to monitor, modify, or create printer forms. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"PRINTDEFRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PRINTDEFCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 9, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Working with Print Device Definitions and Printer Forms" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=224 ID="BP212"IDXID="w10451"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3456"IDXID="w10452"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3536"
ID="FM63503"PROTOCOLIDXID="w10453"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3608"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10454"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3588"
View the protocols registered on your NetWare serverIDXID="w10455"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3588"
Register additional IDXID="w10456"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3724"
protocols and IDXID="w10457"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3724"
frame typesRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PROTOCOL [REGISTER protocol frame id#]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display the protocols registered on your server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"REGISTER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Register a protocol. It is only necessary to use PROTOCOL REGISTER in unusual cases, such as when using a new media.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"protocol COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the protocol name.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"frame COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name representing the frame type that is to be bound to the communication protocol.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"id#COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the protocol identification number (also called a protocol ID, PID, an Ethernet type or E- type, or an SAP). This number is a unique, assigned hexadecimal number that tells the server how to recognize data coming from a certain network board through a designated communication protocol (such as IPX).PAGENUM=225 ID="BP213"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using PROTOCOLMARK=BULLETLAN drivers automatically register IPX; other protocol stacks register themselves.For approved protocol loadable modules, consult your reseller. For the protocol name, check the documentation that comes with the protocol module.LAN drivers automatically register a frame type when they are loaded. If the LAN driver supports more than one frame type, the frame type is registered when you load the driver with that frame type.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Binding protocols to a LAN driverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Load the LAN Drivers" in Chapter 2 of Installation.IDREF="FM25939""BIND" (page 15)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=226 ID="BP214"ID="FM15064"PSCRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to perform tasks that you might otherwise perform in PCONSOLE. Specifically, use PSC toMARK=BULLETView network printer informationControl network printersControl the print serverRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PSC ps=printserver p=printer [/option...] [/? | /VER]RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Refer toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PSCCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using PSC" in Chapter 10 of Print ServicesRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=227 ID="BP215"ID="FM49470"PSERVERIDXID="w10458"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3621"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse to monitor and manage printers and print queues. Multiple PSERVER modules cannot run concurrently on the same NetWare server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD PSERVER .CN=printservername .OU=container.O=containerRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Refer toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PSERVERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Appendix A, "BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up and Servicing Print Servers" in Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=228 ID="BP216"ID="FM51558"PUPGRADERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the sever console to MARK=BULLETUpgrade your NetWare 3 print servers and printers to NetWare 4 Directory Service objects Upgrade your NetWare 3 PRINTCON and PRINTDEF databases to NetWare 4 formatUnless you run PUPGRADE, your NetWare 3 bindery print objects will not be upgraded.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD PUPGRADERENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Refer toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using PUPGRADECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="printenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using PUPGRADE.NLM" in Chapter 10 of Print Services.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=229 ID="BP217"PURGERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the workstation to permanently remove previously deleted files from the file system.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PURGE [filename | path] [/option...] [/? | /VER]RENDERAS="SECT2"ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace filename with the names of the files you want to purge. Wildcards are allowed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace path with the complete path of the directory containing the files you want to purge.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM59558"See "PURGE Options" on page 227COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using PURGEMARK=BULLETYou must have the Delete right to the specified directory. If you have the Delete right in the directory, and you don't specify deleted files to be removed, all deleted files are removed, even if you don't own them.PAGENUM=230 ID="BP218"If you have the Delete right at the root, you can use PURGE to remove all deleted files in the entire volume.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM59558"PURGE OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ACOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Purge all files in the current directory and its subdirectories.If you don't use /A, PURGE removes only the files in the specified directory. RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo purge all files in the current directory, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PURGE *.*To purge all .RPT files in the current directory and the subdirectories, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PURGE *.RPT /ATo purge all files starting at the root of the volume (you must have delete rights to the entire volume), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"PURGE \*.* /ARENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using FILERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM48071""FILER" (page 67)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RIGHTSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM39407""RIGHTS" (page 252)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Salvaging deleted filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Salvaging and Purging Deleted Files and Directories" in Chapter 2 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=231 ID="BP219"IDXID="w10459"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3748"IDXID="w10460"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3741"IDXID="w10461"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"IDXID="w10462"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i56"
ID="FM12952"IDXID="w10463"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4772"IDXID="w10464"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3676"
RCONSOLERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to access the server by creating a remote server console.RCONSOLE will not allow remote access to a server if the network supervisor has not enabled remote connections using REMOTE.During a remote console session, you can load and unload modules, execute console commands, and copy files to NetWare directories or to non-NetWare partitions. You cannot transfer files from a server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RCONSOLE [server name] | [server name*] COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Start a remote session either through a direct connection (SPX) or through an asynchronous connection (a modem). The system displays a menu from which you choose the connection type.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"server nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the server or the IPX address you want to reach through a direct connection.Note: You can only specify the server name if you are establishing an SPX connection. You can't use this parameter when establishing an asynchronous connection.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"server_name*COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the partial name of the server you want to connect to via SPX.RCONSOLE then lists servers that begin with the specified sequence of letters.For example, to list servers that begin with SLS, typeRCONSOLE SLS*PAGENUM=232 ID="BP220"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using RCONSOLEMARK=BULLETYou can access a remote server on the same network (a direct connection) or through a modem or null modem cable (an asynchronous connection). Instructions for establishing each kind of connection are found in "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Console to Manage a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.To access a server remotely, the necessary remote modules must be loaded on the server, the RCONSOLE.EXE file must be loaded on the workstation, and you must know the remote password.The remote modules that must be loaded on the server depend upon the way you are accessing the server: through a direct or an asynchronous connection. For more information, refer to "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Console to Manage a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.In NetWare 4.1, the supervisor password doesn't allow remote access unless you set it as the password when you load REMOTE.You can execute RCONSOLE from your local hard drive or from a network drive.You don't need Supervisor object rights to the remote server, since RCONSOLE doesn't use NetWare Directory Services. During a remote console session, you can press MOREINFO="NONE"<Alt>+<F1> to display the RCONSOLE "Available Options" menu. This menu allows you to do the following:PAGENUM=233 ID="BP221"MARK=BULLETCycle through the screens being managed by the serverView lists of files and directories on the serverTransfer files to a serverDisplay the operating system promptExit RCONSOLEDisplay the address of the workstationBuffer keystrokes sent to the serverWhile the menu is displayed, press MOREINFO="NONE"<F1> to display a help screen.You can use the following keystrokes during a remote console session. All other keys function as if you were at the server console.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="12*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ToCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PressVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Access the RCONSOLE "Available Options" menuCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"<Alt>+<F1>COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Exit RCONSOLECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"<Alt>+<F2>COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cycle through the console screensCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"<Alt>+<F3> or <Alt>+<F4>COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Show the address of the workstation you are usingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"<Alt>+<F5>RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RCONSOLECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Console to Manage a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using REMOTECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM20097""REMOTE" (page 240)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=234 ID="BP222"ID="FM73773"REGISTER MEMORYRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to configure IDXID="w10465"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3724"
the IDXID="w10466"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2772"
operating IDXID="w10467"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
system to IDXID="w10468"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i104"
recognize installed IDXID="w10469"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
memory above the amount of memory that is automatically registered.NetWare 4.1 canIDXID="w10470"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
 address up to 3.25 gigabytes. This limitation is due to the size of the cache block tables used for memory management. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REGISTER MEMORY start_address amountCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"start_address COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the hexadecimal address where the memory you're adding will start. This is the amount of RAM your server currently recognizes and addresses. This number is usually 16 MB (1000000h); however, the default varies depending on the machine type. To obtain the start address, use the MEMORY command and convert its output to hexadecimal.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"amountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an amount of memory, expressed in hexadecimal, that is installed beyond the start address. This number must be divisible by 10h.In the preceding table and in the following sections, the "h" after the number denotes a hexadecimal number. The "d" denotes a decimal number. For example, 1000000h is 1 million in IDXID="w10471"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
hexadecimal, and 1000000d is 1 million in decimal.The hexadecimal numbers A through F correspond to the decimal numbers 10 through 15, respectively. PAGENUM=235 ID="BP223"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using REGISTER MEMORYMARK=BULLETNetWare registers all memory that it recognizes according to bus type. On an ISA bus, NetWare recognizes up to 16 MB. On an EISA or MCA bus, NetWare recognizes all of the memory that is present. On a computer with a Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, NetWare 4.1 recognizes up to 64 MB.To have the additional memory registered automatically when the server boots, add the REGISTER MEMORY line to the STARTUP.NCF file. Add this line just after the commands for the server name and internal network number, and before the volumes are mounted.Place theID="FM62879"REGISTER MEMORY command before the MOUNT ALL command in the STARUTP.NCF file so that the registered IDXID="w10472"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2379"
memory will be available to all volumes. Failure to register memory before the SYS: volume is mounted can result in error messages indicating that the cache memory allocator is out of available memory, or that there is IDXID="w10473"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2379"
insufficient memory to mount volumes. If the memory does not register, check for the following possible errors:MARK=BULLETAn incorrect hexadecimal value was specified for start address or amount.The amount value exceeds the total installed memory. Use the setup or reference diskette that came with the computer to determine the total amount of installed memory.If you have more than 16 MB of server memory installed, you must avoid memory address conflicts. A conflict occurs if an adapter board uses 16- or 24-bit DMA or Bus-Master DMA.To resolve this conflict, upgrade to 32-bit bus adapters or use drivers that are modified and certified to compensate for memory-addressing limitations. Or use the machine's configuration program to "move" system memory around the adapter if the program allows.In some cases, the ISA (16-bit) host adapter driver must be loaded
in memory below 16 MB. To do so, add the following to the STARTUP.NCF file:SET AUTO REGISTER MEMORY ABOVE 16 MEGABYTES=OFFLOAD disk_driverPAGENUM=236 ID="BP224"REGISTER MEMORY 
amount of memory to addFor more information, consult the driver documentation.RENDERAS="SECT3"Determining the Amount of Memory The following table lists common start address and amount values for standard computers.In the table, total memory = start address + amount of memory to add.COLS=3 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="8*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Memory COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Start AddressCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Amount of Memory to AddVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"20 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"4 MB = 400000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"24 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"8 MB = 800000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"28 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"12 MB = C00000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"32 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"36 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"20 MB = 1400000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"40 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"24 MB = 1800000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"64 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"48 MB = 3000000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"112 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"96 MB = 6000000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"128 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"112 MB = 7000000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"256 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"240 MB = F000000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"400 MBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"384 MB = 18000000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1 GB (1000 MB)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"984 MB = 3D80000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"3 GB (3000 MB)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"16 MB = 1000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"2984 MB = BA800000hCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"3 GB (3000 MB)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"64 MB = 4000000hCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"2936 MB = B7800000hREGISTER MEMORY requires that the amount of memory to be registered is stated in hexadecimal format. If you are adding an amount of memory that is not in the preceding table, then you need to calculate the amount. PAGENUM=237 ID="BP225"RENDERAS="SECT4"Calculating the Amount of MemoryThe following figures illustrates how to calculate the amount of memory you are adding:FILEREF="n41ut73a.tif"NUMERATION=ARABIC CONTINUATION="RESTARTS" INHERITNUM="IGNORE"Start with the amount of memory you are adding stated in decimal MB. Obtain this number from the documentation that came with the memory you are adding.Convert the memory value from MB to bytes.A megabyte of memory is more than a million bytes. One megabyte equals 1,048,576 bytes in decimal. Convert the number of bytes from decimal to hexadecimal notation.To do this calculation, you can either use a calculator that converts decimal numbers to hexadecimal, or you can convert manually. For example, 1 megabyte = 1,048,576d, which is the same as 100000h.So 1,048,576 bytes in decimal equals 100000 in hexadecimal.To convert manually, consult a specialized manual. 
PAGENUM=238 ID="BP226"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo add 4 MB of memory above 16 MB, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REGISTER MEMORY 1000000 400000To add 24 MB of memory above 16 MB, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REGISTER MEMORY 1000000 1800000RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing the AUTOEXEC.NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Modify the AUTOEXEC.NCF File" in Chapter 3 of Installation."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Displaying the total amount of memory the server is addressingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM94481""MEMORY" (page 131)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=239 ID="BP227"ID="FM10203"IDXID="w10474"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3729"
REINITIALIZE SYSTEMRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to enable configuration changes made since the commands in the NETINFO.CFG file were executed.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REINITIALIZE SYSTEMRENDERAS="SECT2"Using REINITIALIZE SYSTEMMARK=BULLETREINITIALIZE SYSTEM compares the current NETINFO.CFG file with the previous one, which became effective the last time you ran the INITIALIZE SYSTEM or REINITIALIZE SYSTEM command. If REINITIALIZE SYSTEM finds any new commands in the current NETINFO.CFG file, it executes them.REINITIALIZE SYSTEM also informs any Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)-registered NLM file that it is executing. This is a "call-back" mechanism that enables NLM files that store configuration information outside the NETINFO.CFG file to know that changes to the configuration have taken place.RENDERAS="SECT2"Limitations of REINITIALIZE SYSTEMMARK=BULLETREINITIALIZE SYSTEM unloads any NLM affected by a configuration change. If REINITIALIZE SYSTEM cannot unload the NLM because of interdependencies with other modules, the configuration change will not take effect. Additionally, not all NLM files register with SNMP for notification of REINITIALIZE SYSTEM.When you create a new configuration or delete an existing configuration, REINITIALIZE SYSTEM recognizes the change. However, REINITIALIZE SYTEM may not recognize changes to an already configured NLM that involve more than loading, unloading, binding, or unbinding protocol stacks.PAGENUM=240 ID="BP228"If you are changing an existing configuration, the most effective way to ensure the changes are recognized is to down the server. Alternatively, if you know which NLM files have been changed by your modifications, you can unload them, then execute REINITIALIZE SYSTEM.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NETINFO.CFG fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" (page 93)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"INITIALIZE SYSTEMCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM46223""INITIALIZE SYSTEM" (page 97)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=241 ID="BP229"ID="FM34488"REMAPIDRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeAssists IDXID="w10475"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3734"
NETSYNC3 in handling password changes.REMAPID is autoloaded by NETSYNC3 on every NetWare 3.1x server in the NetSync cluster.REMAPID also handles password IDs that are changed by NetSync. It must remain loaded even after NETSYNC3 is unloaded so that users can continue to log in to the NetWare 3.1x server.The NetSync installation program adds the command to load REMAPID to the AUTOEXEC.NCF file on the 3.1x server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxAutoloaded by NETSYNC3.NLM.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="13*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Installing REMAPIDCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="ntsncenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Installing and Using NetSync.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=242 ID="BP230"ID="FM46705"REMIRROR PARTITION IDXID="w10476"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3735"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to start the IDXID="w10477"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3736"
remirroring of a IDXID="w10478"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2204"
logical IDXID="w10479"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1125"
partition.Because the server remirrors partitions automatically, you should use REMIRROR PARTITION only if you have stopped remirroring or something has caused your server to cease remirroring.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"ID="FM55591"REMIRROR PARTITION numberCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="19*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of the logical partition you want to start remirroring.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExampleTo start remirroring for logical partition 4, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMIRROR PARTITION 4RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Stopping remirroringCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM56807""ABORT REMIRROR" (page 3)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mirroring and unmirroring hard disksCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Mirroring and Duplexing a Hard Disk" and "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Unmirroring Hard Disks" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=243 ID="BP231"ID="FM20097"IDXID="w10480"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3751"
REMOTERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeLoad at the server console to allow remote IDXID="w10481"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3741"
access to the IDXID="w10482"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4772"
server from a workstation.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path] REMOTE password | -EIDXID="w10483"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"
EpasswordIDXID="w10484"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="19*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to REMOTE.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"password COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the password you want administrators of the remote server to use. REMOTE requires either a password or an encrypted password.When you execute RCONSOLE, you use the password you established when you loaded REMOTE.Note: In NetWare 4.1, the supervisor password doesn't allow remote access unless it is set as the password when you load REMOTE.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-ECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"If you specify this parameter, the password that follows must be an encrypted password.Note: You can't use this parameter until you have first loaded REMOTE using the unencrypted password and then determined the encrypted value of the password by executing the REMOTE ENCRYPT command. Refer to the next section for more information about encrypting passwords. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"EpasswordCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the encrypted value of the password you want administrators of the remote server to use. To obtain the encrypted value of a password, use REMOTE ENCRYPT as described in the next section.PAGENUM=244 ID="BP232"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using REMOTEMARK=BULLETBefore RCONSOLE can be used to access a server from a workstation, you must load REMOTE on the server. When you load REMOTE, you establish a password that must also be entered when you execute RCONSOLE on the workstation.To optimize security, use an encrypted password when loading REMOTE.To encrypt the password, follow these steps:PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Load REMOTE with the unencrypted password.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Type
FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOTE ENCRYPTThe system prompts you for a password to encrypt. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Type the password and press 
MOREINFO="NONE"<Enter>.The system displays the encrypted value and a message asking if the LOAD REMOTE command should be written to the SYS:SYSTEM\LDREMOTE.NCF file.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Respond "Yes." The system places a LOAD REMOTE command into the LDREMOTE.NCF file with the encrypted password as a parameter. You can execute this file to load the REMOTE module with the encrypted password. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"To execute the file, type LDREMOTE at the console prompt. 
MARK=BULLETAfter you load REMOTE, you must load other modules to make remote console sessions available. MARK=BULLETFor direct connections, load the following: RSPX PAGENUM=245 ID="BP233"For asynchronous connections, load the following in the order shown: TYPE="VERT"AIOCOMX (or other communication port driver)AIORS232If you load AIOCOMX, you do not need to load AIO, because it is autoloaded by AIOCOMX. However, if you load another communication port driver, you may have to load AIO manually.To make RCONSOLE sessions available whenever you boot the server, enter the following commands in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file in the order shown.MARK=BULLETFor direct connections: TYPE="VERT"LDREMOTELOAD RSPX For asynchronous connections: TYPE="VERT"LDREMOTELOAD AIOCOMX (or other communication port driver)LOAD AIOLOAD RS232 
com_port baud_rate [N] [C]
 Include the N parameter if you are using a null modem cable. Include the C parameter if you are using a callback list. For more information about these parameters, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Running a Remote Console Session Over a Modem" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.If you load AIOCOMX, you do not need to include the command to load AIO. However, if you load another communication port driver, you may have to include the LOAD AIO command.Once you load REMOTE, you can use the REMOTE command to enable or disable remote connections. The syntax isFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOTE [parameter]
PAGENUM=246 ID="BP234"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LOCK OUTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10485"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3763"
Prevent new remote connections.This parameter prevents new remote console sessions from being established with the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UNLOCKCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10486"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3764"
Allow new remote connections. This parameter is used to reenable remote sessions after the LOCK OUT parameter disabled them.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HELPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.IDXID="w10487"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo load REMOTE with password SECRET, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD REMOTE SECRETTo obtain the encrypted value of a password, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOTE ENCRYPT To load REMOTE with an encrypted password, previously obtained by executing REMOTE ENCRYPT, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD REMOTE -E 870B7E366363To disable new remote connections to the server, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOTE LOCK OUTTo enable new connections to the server, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOTE UNLOCK
PAGENUM=247 ID="BP235"To view help information for the REMOTE command, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOTE HELPRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading RSPXCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM50434""RSPX" (page 267) COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading RS232COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM42584""RS232" (page 265)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting up a remote consoleCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Console to Manage a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RCONSOLECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM12952""RCONSOLE" (page 228)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing the AUTOEXEC.NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Modify the AUTOEXEC.NCF File" in Chapter 3 of Installation."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=248 ID="BP236"ID="FM21937"IDXID="w10488"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3769"
REMOVE DOSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10489"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3771"
Remove IDXID="w10490"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1181"
DOS from the server's memoryCause the server to be IDXID="w10491"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3815"
cold booted with the EXIT commandA cold boot powers down the machine, clears memory and internal settings, and boots the machine.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"REMOVE DOSRENDERAS="SECT2"Using REMOVE DOSMARK=BULLETIf available memory in the server is low, use this command to free additional memory for file caching. When you execute REMOVE DOS, the memory used for DOS is returned to the system for IDXID="w10492"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
file IDXID="w10493"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1454"
caching.Removing DOS increases network IDXID="w10494"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
security because loadable modules can't be loaded from the server's DOS drives.Once this command is issued, DOS is no longer resident in the server and NLM programs on DOS drives aren't accessible. If you need to load these modules, copy them to a network drive before executing REMOVE DOS.If you remove DOS from the server, then when you use the EXIT command to exit the server console, you are not returned to DOS as you normally would be. Instead, the server reboots. This functionality of the REMOVE DOS command allows those using RCONSOLE to IDXID="w10495"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3746"
reboot the server remotely.PAGENUM=249 ID="BP237"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remote booting a serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Rebooting a Remote Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=250 ID="BP238"ID="FM19429"RENDIRRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10496"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3782"
Use at a workstation to IDXID="w10497"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1091"
rename a directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RENDIR path [TO] directory name [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path leading to and including the directory you want to rename.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"directory name COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the new name of the directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using RENDIRMARK=BULLETIf you rename a directory, change any drive mappings that include the directory to reflect the new name.You can use a period to represent your default directory.You can use :/ to represent your current drive and volume.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo rename DOSAPPS (your current directory) to WINAPPS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RENDIR DOSAPPS WINAPPS
PAGENUM=251 ID="BP239"To rename directory USE on drive Z: to USERS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RENDIR Z:USE USERSTo rename your current directory to PROGRAMS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RENDIR . PROGRAMSTo rename the directory where drive G: is mapped to PROGRAMS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RENDIR G: PROGRAMS To rename directory TOOL to TOOLKIT on your current drive and volume, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RENDIR :/TOOL TOOLKIT RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory structureCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Directory structure" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Drive mappingsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Drive mapping" in Concepts."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"MAP" in Chapter 3 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=252 ID="BP240"ID="FM18608"RESET IDXID="w10498"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3812"
ROUTERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to rIDXID="w10499"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3814"
eset the IDXID="w10500"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3892"
router IDXID="w10501"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
table in the server if the table becomes inaccurate or corrupted.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RESET ROUTERRENDERAS="SECT2"Using RESET ROUTERMARK=BULLETIf several servers or bridges go down, packets sent to or through their routers are lost. Use RESET ROUTER to update router tables on active servers. Normally, the router updates its tables every minute. This command updates the router table immediately.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=253 ID="BP241"ID="FM83114"IDXID="w10502"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3825"
RESTARTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to reload the IOEngine on one NetWare 4.1 SFT III server while leaving the other server running, or to force a server to IDXID="w10503"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4124"
switch over from IDXID="w10504"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3387"
primary to IDXID="w10505"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3988"
secondary.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IDXID="w10506"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4127"
RESTARTRENDERAS="SECT2"Using RESTARTMARK=BULLETRESTART is valid only when servers are IDXID="w10507"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2475"
mirrored.Execute RESTART from the appropriate IOEngine. If you execute RESTART from an MSEngine, you receive an "unknown command" message.When the primary IOEngine is reloaded using RESTART, the secondary server takes over as the primary server. When the secondary IOEngine is restarted, the primary server remains running.Disks should be mirrored before you restart the primary IOEngine. If disks aren't mirrored when you execute RESTART, the following message appears:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WARNING!!! Not every disk is remirrored. Answering yes may cause some volumes to dismount and open files to be lost.FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"Are you sure you wish to halt then restart the primary server?RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=254 ID="BP242"ID="FM55915"RESTART SERVERRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10508"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3823"
Use at the IDXID="w10509"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4260"
server console to restart the server after downing it. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RESTART IDXID="w10510"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
SERVER [-parameter]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restart the server and invoke all .NCF files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-nsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restart the server without invoking the STARTUP.NCF file.For example, type:RESTART SERVER -nsCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-naCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restart the server without invoking the AUTOEXEC.NCF file.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using RESTART SERVERRESTART SERVER is useful when troubleshooting requires that you frequently down the server. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restarting the server from DOSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM93874""SERVER" on page 284RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=255 ID="BP243"IDXID="w10511"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3779"ID="FM39407"IDXID="w10512"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4595"IDXID="w10513"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1071"
ID="FM57924"IDXID="w10514"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1614"
RIGHTSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10515"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3852"
Use at a workstation toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10516"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"IDXID="w10517"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1469"
View or modify user or group rights for filesIDXID="w10518"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1071"
View or modify user or group rights for directories and volumesRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RIGHTS path [[ + | - ] rights] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to the file, directory, or volume you want to modify or view rights to (you must always specify a path).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"+ | -COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Add or delete the specified rights. See IDREF="FM38755""Using RIGHTS" (page 254)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"rights COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify one or more file or directory rights. IDREF="FM94289"See "File and Directory Rights" on page 253COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/option COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM73750"See "RIGHTS Options" on page 253COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=256 ID="BP244"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM73750"RIGHTS OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through output.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/FCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the Inherited Rights Filter (IRF).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/IDXID="w10519"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1807"
ICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the trustee and group rights that created the inherited rights, and view where the inherited rights came from.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NAMECLASS=OPTION MOREINFO="NONE"=usernameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or modify rights for the user or group listed. Replace username with the name of the user or group whose rights you want to view or modify.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/SCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or modify subdirectories below the current level.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/TCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View trustee assignments in a directory.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM94289"IDXID="w10520"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1071"
File and Directory RightsThe following table lists the rights, the letter to use for each right, and what the right is used for.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RightCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"S (Supervisor)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Grant all rights to the file or directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"R (Read)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Open and read files in the directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"W (Write)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Open and write to files in the directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"C (Create)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Create files and subdirectories.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"E (Erase)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Erase files and directories.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"M (Modify)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Rename files and directories, and change file attributes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"F (File Scan)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View and search on file and directory names in the file system structure.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A (Access Control)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Add and remove trustees and change trustee rights to files and directories.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"N (No Rights)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remove all rights.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"REM (Remove)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remove the user or group as a trustee of the specified file or directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ALL COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Add All rights except Supervisor.PAGENUM=257 ID="BP245"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM38755"Using RIGHTSMARK=BULLETIf you use + (plus) to add rights, the rights you list are added to the existing rights.If you use - (minus) to remove rights, the rights you list are deleted from the existing rights.If you add and delete rights in the same command, group all added rights together and all deleted rights together.If you list rights without using + or -, the rights you list replace the existing rights.You must always specify a path. You can use a period (.) to represent your current directory.You can use wildcard characters.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo set the trustee rights in the current directory for user JANICE to Read, Write, and File Scan, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RIGHTS . R W F /NAME=JANICE
PAGENUM=258 ID="BP246"To remove user JACIE from ALICE/SYS:USERS, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RIGHTS ALICE/SYS:USERS REM /NAME=JACIETo see where user PAT's inherited rights came from for SYS:USERS/HOME, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RIGHTS SYS:USERS/HOME /NAME=PAT /IRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Trustee assignmentsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Trustee" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Inherited rightsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Security" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=259 ID="BP247"ID="FM79736"IDXID="w10521"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3883"
ROUTERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console on a IDXID="w10522"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4511"
token ring cabling system to pass IDXID="w10523"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1572"
frames (IDXID="w10524"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3192"
packets) from NetWare through IDXID="w10525"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1737"
IBM-compatible source route bridges. ROUTE enables the operating system toMARK=BULLETKeep track of the source routing information in the framesConfigure the source routing information in the frames according to the parameters with which ROUTE is loadedYou must load the token ring LAN driver before you load ROUTE. ROUTE and most ROUTE parameters can also be configured using the INETCFG utility. See the section below, "Configuring Source Route End Station Parameters with INETCFG."RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]ROUTE [BOARD=number] [NAME=board_name] [DEF|GBR|MBR] [TIME=number] [RSP=AR|NR] [CLEAR] | [REMOVE=number] [XTX=number] [UNLOAD [BOARD=number]]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="11*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="18*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to ROUTE.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOARD=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the board you want to change parameters on or load ROUTE for. Replace number with the board number.If you don't specify a board number, the default is board number 1, or the board name specified in the NAME parameter. The system numbers the boards, using 1 for the first driver loaded. (Check the order in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NAME=board_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the board name. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DEF (Default)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify that all Unknown Unicast frames are to be sent as All Routes Broadcast frames. If DEF is specified, all frames with addresses not in the server's Source Routing table are forwarded as All Routes Broadcast frames.If DEF is not specified, all frames with addresses not in the server's Source Routing table are forwarded as Single Route Broadcast frames. If ROUTE is already loaded with the DEF parameter, reloading ROUTE with DEF sends all Unknown Unicast frames as All Routes Broadcast frames. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GBR (General Broadcast frames)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify that all General Broadcast frames are to be sent as All Routes Broadcast frames.If this parameter is not specified when ROUTE is loaded, all General Broadcast frames are broadcast as Single Route Broadcast frames.If ROUTE is already loaded with the GBR parameter, reloading ROUTE with GBR broadcasts all General Broadcast frames as All Routes Broadcast frames.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MBR (Multicast Broadcast frames)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify that all Multicast frames are to be sent as All Routes Broadcast frames.If the parameter is not specified when ROUTE is loaded, all Multicast frames are broadcast as Single Route Broadcast frames.If ROUTE is already loaded with the MBR parameter, reloading ROUTE with MBR broadcasts all Multicast frames as All Routes Broadcast frames.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIME=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how often the Source Routing table should be updated.Replace number with a value from 3 to 255 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.This parameter forces the table to be updated with a new route if the route isn't used during the specified time.It enables ROUTE to determine alternate routes dynamically when an IBM bridge goes down.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RSP=value (Respond)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how the server should respond to a broadcast request.Replace value with one of the following:NR: Specifies that all Broadcast Requests are to be responded to directly; a Broadcast Response isn't required. AR (the default): Specifies that all Broadcast Requests are to be responded to with an All Routes Broadcast frame.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CLEARCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Clear the Source Routing tableIDXID="w10526"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4213"
. Use when an IBM bridge has gone down and an alternate route is available.CLEAR forces a dynamic rebuilding of the table by sending a default frame to each specific node in the network.Use CLEAR to completely clear the Source Routing table, or use REMOVE to clear only one node address from the Source Routing table.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"REMOVE=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remove a specified node address from the server's Source Routing table.Replace number with a 12-digit (6-byte) hexadecimal number. If you enter fewer than nine digits, ROUTE prefixes the address with 4000 in hexadecimal.For example, REMOVE=2 becomes REMOVE=400000000002. Use REMOVE when a bridge has gone down. When you remove the node from the Source Routing table, you force the server to determine an alternate route.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"XTX=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of times to transmit on a timed-out route, using the old route. Replace number with a value between 00 and 255 seconds. The default is 02 times. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UNLOAD [BOARD=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use to remove source routing support for a specified board. If you don't specify a board number, the default is 1.Example: MOREINFO="NONE"LOAMOREINFO="NONE"D ROUTE UMOREINFO="NONE"NLOAD BOARD=2Note: This parameter does not unload ROUTE.NLM, but disables source routing only for the board that you specify.RENDERAS="SECT2"PAGENUM=263 ID="BP248"ID="FM30444"Using ROUTEMARK=BULLETNo parameters are required. However, you can load ROUTE a second time with a specified parameter to change the configuration.Most of the parameters have default values that should work with simple configurations for IBM bridges. If you have parallel IBM bridges, you can change some of the parameters to reduce traffic on some of the paths.As frames pass through an IBM bridge, source routing information is added to the frame header at the Media Access Control (MAC) layer. The operating system's bridging is done above this layer.ROUTE can be loaded re-entrantly.MARK=BULLETIf you have two token ring boards in the server, load ROUTE twice. The second time you load it, use the BOARD or NAME parameter to specify a particular board.To change the configuration, load ROUTE with the parameter that needs to be changed.PAGENUM=264 ID="BP249"RENDERAS="SECT2"Configuring Source Route End Station Parameters with INETCFG You can use INETCFG to load ROUTE and configure many source route end station parameters.To use INETCFG, follow these steps. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Load INETCFG.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"From the "Internetwork Configuration" menu, choose the "Board
s" option to load a toke
n ring board
. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Return to the "Internetwork Configuration" menu and use the "Protocol
s" option to enable "Source Route End Statio
n." PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Return to the "Internetwork Configuration" menu and select 
"Bindings
."A list of bindings appears. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select an existing binding or press MOREINFO="NONE"<Insert> to add a new binding.A list of enabled protocols appears. PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Select 
"Source Route End Station
." A list of boards is displayed.PERFORMANCE="REQUIRED"Selec
t the toke
n ring boar
d you configured with the 
"Boards
" option.
 The "Attach Source Route End Station to an Interface" menu appears. PAGENUM=265 ID="BP250"The following Source Route End Station parameters are available:COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="11*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="18*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Interface Name (same as NAME=board_name command line parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the name of the interface to which the end station source router is bound. This field is read-only. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Frame TypeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View or modify the source route end station list of frame types.Press <Enter> to see the list. Press <Insert> to select a frame type. Press <Delete> to remove a frame type. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Frames with Unknown Address(same as DEF [Default] command line parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the type of explorer frame the end station source router sends to an unknown node address. Options: Single Route Explorer Frame, All Routes Explorer FrameDefault: Single Route Explorer FrameCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Broadcast Frames(same as GBR command line parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the type of explorer frame the end station source router sends to a broadcast destination address. Options: Single Route Explorer Frame, All Routes Explorer FrameDefault: Single Route Explorer FrameCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Multicast Frames(same as MBR command line parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the type of explorer frame the end station source router sends to a multicast, group, or functional address. Options: Single Route Explorer Frame, All Routes Explorer FrameDefault: Single Route Explorer FrameCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Respond to Broadcast Request (same as RSP command line parameter) COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how the end station source router responds to a single route explorer frame. Options: Specifically Routed Frame, All Routes Explorer FrameDefault: All Routes Explorer FrameCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Route Update Interval(same as TIME=number command line parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the minimum delay in seconds before the end station source router updates the route for a given node. Range: 0 to 65,535 seconds (0=infinite)Default: 10PAGENUM=266 ID="BP251" To remove source route bridge support for the specified board, disable the binding. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"INETCFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" on page 93COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Source routingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Source routing" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Source routing and broadcast framesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=267 ID="BP252"ID="FM96507"IDXID="w10527"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3920"
RPLRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10528"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"
enable the remote IDXID="w10529"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i499"
booting of IDXID="w10530"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1138"
diskless IDXID="w10531"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"
workstations that have network boards installed. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]RPLCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Parameter COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to RPL.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using RPL MARK=BULLETIDXID="w10532"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3756"
The RPL.NLM program is used in networks that have diskless workstations installed with the RPL BIOS module. RPL.NLM provides the Remote Program Load protocol stack to the server.After loading the RPL protocol stack, you must bind RPL to the network board in the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RPL to set up Remote DOS workstationsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 6, "BOOK="ws_d1enu" COLLECTION="nw41"Setting Up Remote Client Workstations" in NetWare Client for DOS and MS Windows User Guide.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RPL to set up Remote OS/2 workstationsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 11, "BOOK="ws_osenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Program Load" in NetWare Client for OS/2 User Guide.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=268 ID="BP253"ID="FM42584"IDXID="w10533"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3925"
RS232RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to sIDXID="w10534"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4772"
et IDXID="w10535"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3748"
up a IDXID="w10536"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i704"
communication IDXID="w10537"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3342"
port for IDXID="w10538"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"
remote IDXID="w10539"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3741"
management over a modem or null modem cable.The RS232 module is an asynchronous communications driver that initiates the server's communication port and transfers screen and keystroke information to and from REMOTE.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]RS232 [COM port] [modem speed] [N][C]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to RS232.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COM port COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the communication port (1 or 2). If you don't specify a COM port with the LOAD command, you are prompted for it.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"modem speed COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the baud rate of your modem (2400, 4800, or 9600). If you don't enter the modem speed with the LOAD command, you are prompted for it. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"N COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify that a null modem cable will be used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enable callback functions.RENDERAS="SECT3"Using RS232You must load a communication port driver (such as AIOCOMX) and AIO before you load RS232. (If you load AIOCOMX first, it autoloads AIO. If you use a third-party communication port driver, you may need to load AIO manually.)PAGENUM=269 ID="BP254"After RS232 is loaded, you can execute the following commands while in the utility:COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CommandCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RS232COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View RS232 driver settings.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MODEMCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Interact with the modem.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MODEM @filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Retrieve modem commands from a file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MODEM modem_commandCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send commands directly to the modem.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RS232COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Console to Manage a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=270 ID="BP255"ID="FM50434"IDXID="w10540"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3923"
RSPXRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to allow IDXID="w10541"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3676"
RCONSOLE to IDXID="w10542"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3741"
access a IDXID="w10543"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"
server over a direct connection. IDXID="w10544"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"
RSPX loads the SPX driver for REMOTE and advertises the server to workstations.RSPX provides an optional security feature requiring that all RSPX packets contain signatures.RSPX packet signatures are not related to NCP packet signatures. To modify RSPX packet signature requirements, use RSPX. To modify NCP packet signature requirements, use SERVMAN or SET. IDREF="FM67672"See "SERVMAN" on page 286 or IDREF="FM88068""SET" on page 291.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]RSPX [SIGNATURES OFF]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to RSPX.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SIGNATURES OFFCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow remote console RSPX packets without signatures.The default is packet signatures ON.Note: If you use a NetWare 3.11 version of RCONSOLE to access a NetWare 4 server, turn packet signatures off when you load RSPX.PAGENUM=271 ID="BP256"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using RSPXAfter RSPX is loaded, the following commands are valid:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"RSPX MOREINFO="NONE"[parameterMOREINFO="NONE"]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View RSPX status information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SIGNATURES ONCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Require all RCONSOLE client RSPX packets to contain signatures.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SIGNATURES OFFCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow RCONSOLE client packets without signatures.Note: If you use a NetWare 3.11 version of RCONSOLE to access a NetWare 4 server, turn packet signatures off when you load RSPX on the server. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HELPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using RSPXCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using Remote Console to Manage a Server" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=272 ID="BP257"ID="FM25552"ID="FM74549"IDXID="w10545"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3955"
SBACKUPIDXID="w10546"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4298"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse
 at the server console to IDXID="w10547"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i394"
back up and IDXID="w10548"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3828"
restore specified IDXID="w10549"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2361"
data on a IDXID="w10550"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2801"
server, IDXID="w10551"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"
workstation, or 
service that you select.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]SBACKUP SIZE=xx BUFFER=x COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to SBACKUP.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SIZE=xxCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the size of the buffer (in KB). Supported values: 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256.Default: 64 KB.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BUFFER =xCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of buffers. Supported values: 2 to 10.Default: 4.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using SBACKUPCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Chapter 9, "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Backing Up and Restoring Data," in Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=273 ID="BP258"ID="FM86801"SCAN FOR NEW DEVICES IDXID="w10552"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3957"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to register new devices with the media manager so they are available to the operating system.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SCAN FOR NEW DEVICESRENDERAS="SECT2"Using SCAN FOR NEW DEVICESMARK=BULLETUse this utility if you add new devices after you boot your server and the devices do not then appear with the LIST DEVICES command.If devices have been added, but the drivers aren't loaded in STARTUP.NCF, use SCAN FOR NEW DEVICES after loading the drivers to register the devices with the system.If NetWare detects new devices since you booted the server, SCAN FOR NEW DEVICES registers the devices with the operating system. It does not return a message to the screen.SCAN FOR NEW DEVICES does not produce any output.If you remove a hot-plug mirrored disk without bringing down the server, you must execute SCAN FOR NEW DEVICES as soon as you remove the disk. This lets the system know that the remaining disk in the mirrored pair is no longer synchronized with a mirrored partner. If you unmirror the disk before removing it, you do not need to run SCAN FOR NEW DEVICES.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=274 ID="BP259"ID="FM87700"IDXID="w10553"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3959"
SCHDELAYRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10554"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i975"
Prioritize IDXID="w10555"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4078"
server processesSchedule processes to use less of the server's IDXID="w10556"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i864"
CPUSlow IDXID="w10557"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4078"
processes when the IDXID="w10558"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2801"
server is very busyRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD SCHDELAY [process_name = number...] COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View a list of all valid process names and their current SCHDELAY values. If the list scrolls off the screen, you may choose to view the list in the "Scheduling Information" option in MONITOR.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"process_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a process that will use the scheduling delay. Valid processes are those that access the server's CPU. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the frequency at which the process should run. Valid values are 0 (run every cycle) and from 2 to 10000. For example, 2 means run every second cycle.You can undo SCHDELAY values for all processes by replacing process_name with ALL PROCESSES and replacing number with 0. This causes all processes to run with no delays. The command syntax isFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE" LOAD SCHDELAY ALL PROCESSES = 0
PAGENUM=275 ID="BP260"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SCHDELAYThe SCHDELAY value affects processes only when the system is busy.MARK=BULLETYou can specify multiple process delays at one time. To slow specific processes and use less of the server's CPU each time the server boots, place a SCHDELAY command in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file.You can also view scheduling delays with the "Scheduling Information" option in MONITOR.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExampleTo schedule the Remirror process to skip every other cycle, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD SCHDELAY REMIRROR PROCESS = 2RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Determining which processes are hoarding CPU time or which SCHDELAY value to assign to a processCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Prioritizing Server Processes" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing the AUTOEXEC.NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="instlenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Modify the AUTOEXEC.NCF File" in Chapter 3 of Installation."BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=276 ID="BP261"ID="FM40964"SEARCHIDXID="w10559"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3983"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETTell the IDXID="w10560"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2772"
server where to look for IDXID="w10561"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
loadable module IDXID="w10562"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"
files and .NCF IDXID="w10563"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4264"
files Add other IDXID="w10564"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3972"
search paths or delete current search pathsView the current search paths for the operating systemRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEARCH [ADD [number] path]orFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEARCH DEL [number]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the current search paths.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of the search drive you want to add or remove.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the complete path of the directory you want searched. (The default is SYS:SYSTEM.) Begin the path with a DOS drive letter or a NetWare volume name.PAGENUM=277 ID="BP262"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SEARCHMARK=BULLETTo set search paths each time the server comes up, place the SEARCH commands in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file. If you execute SECURE CONSOLE, SEARCH is disabled. The SYS:SYSTEM search path remains in effect, but you cannot create new search paths. Once you execute SECURE CONSOLE, you must bring down the server and reboot it to create additional search paths.When the server comes up and the SYS: volume is mounted, the search path to the boot partition is deleted. RENDERAS="SECT2"ExampleMARK=BULLETTo display the current server search paths, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEARCHTo add VOL1:NCF (a network directory) as a search path, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEARCH ADD VOL1:NCFRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Adding a search pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Viewing and Adding Server Search Paths" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=278 ID="BP263"ID="FM55207"IDXID="w10565"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3991"
SECURE CONSOLERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10566"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1782"
increase IDXID="w10567"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
network IDXID="w10568"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
security byMARK=BULLETPreventing loadable modules from being loaded from any directory other than SYS:SYSTEMPreventing keyboard entry into the operating system debuggerPreventing the server date and time from being changedRemoving DOS from the server and sending it to disk cacheRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SECURE CONSOLERENDERAS="SECT2"Using SECURE CONSOLEMARK=BULLETWhen you execute SECURE CONSOLE, path specifiers are disabled. The SYS:SYSTEM search path remains in effect, but you cannot create new search paths.Use of SECURE CONSOLE is recommended, especially in security-sensitive environments. SECURE CONSOLE prevents the following types of breaches in security:MARK=BULLETIDXID="w10569"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3993"Trojan 
Horse modules. If you don't use SECURE CONSOLE, a module can be loaded from a DOS partition, a diskette drive, or any directory on a NetWare volume.If you allow modules to be loaded from all these drives, anyone who has access to the server console can load a loadable module. An intruder could create a module to access or alter any information on the server, or to change user account information at the server security level.PAGENUM=279 ID="BP264"IDXID="w10570"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3993"Date and 
Time Modifications. Some security and accounting features (such as password expiration, time restrictions, intruder detection, and lockout intervals) depend on date and time for their enforcement. If you don't use SECURE CONSOLE, an intruder can change the date and time at the server and bypass these time-dependent features. IDXID="w10571"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3993"DOS Access. If DOS is installed on the server console, an intruder can bring down the server and execute a DOS file developed expressly to steal or alter data.Because SECURE CONSOLE removes DOS, the intruder must turn the server off and then on again to access DOS.If your server has a power-on password, the intruder cannot access DOS. (See the documentation that comes with the computer for information on setting a power-on password. Not all computers have this feature.)To disable SECURE CONSOLE, down the server properly, and then reboot the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Additional security tipsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Server console" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Removing DOSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM21937""REMOVE DOS" (page 245)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=280 ID="BP265"IDXID="w10572"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"IDXID="w10573"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4027"IDXID="w10574"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4026"IDXID="w10575"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3722"
ID="FM11207"IDXID="w10576"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i522"IDXID="w10577"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i477"
SENDRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation or server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10578"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2425"
Send messages to users attached to the serverSet a workstation to receive all messages, only system messages, or no messagesView the current broadcast mode at the clientIDXID="w10579"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3335"
Poll for messagesIDXID="w10580"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4026"
Send a message to IDXID="w10581"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i521"
all users logged in or attached to the NetWare server, or to a list of users or connection numbersThe console command SEND has the same functionality as the BROADCAST command from previous versions of NetWare. The BROADCAST command is also available in NetWare 4. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxRENDERAS="SECT3"At the Server ConsoleFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "message" [[TO] username|connection number] [[AND|,] username|connection number]Unlike the client SEND command, groupname is not a valid parameter at the server. COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"message COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the message (up to 55 characters) you want to send.Note: Quotation marks around the message are not required if you send the message to all users.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"username COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the users you want to send the message to. To send to all users, don't include any usernames or connection numbers. Separate users with a comma, a space, or "and." Depending on the connection type, you need to specify either the user's complete name (for example, BOB.SALES.NOVELL), or the user's name (For example, BOB). Use the user name as it appears in "Connection Information" in MONITOR.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"connection number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of the station you want to send the message to. Separate connection numbers with a comma, a space, or "and." To determine the connection number, find the corresponding connection number next to the user's name in "Connection Information" in MONITOR.PAGENUM=281 ID="BP266"RENDERAS="SECT3"At a WorkstationRENDERAS="SECT4"Workstations on NDS Servers (NetWare 4)FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND ["message"MOREINFO="NONE" [TO] [username | groupname | servername]] [/options...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"message COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the message you want to send.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"username, groupname, or servername COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recipient of the message. Separate multiple names with a comma, a space, or and. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM79926"See "SEND Options" on page 279COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.PAGENUM=282 ID="BP267"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM79926"SEND OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/A=A or /ACOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Accept all messages.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/A=CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Accept messages only from the server console.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/A=NCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Accept no messages.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/A=PCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Stores the last message sent until you poll to receive it.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/PCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Poll the server for the last stored message.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/SCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Show the current broadcast mode.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/BCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send across a bindery connection when logged in to NDS.PAGENUM=283 ID="BP268"RENDERAS="SECT3"Workstations on Bindery Servers (NetWare 2 and 3)FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "message" MOREINFO="NONE"[TO] [servername/ [username | groupname | station number]] [servername/ [/option...]] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"message COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the message you want to send.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"servernameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the server the user is logged in to. If no server is specified, the message is sent to the server your current drive is mapped to.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"username or groupname COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recipient of the message. Separate multiple names with a comma, a space, or and. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"station number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a workstation connection number. Separate multiple numbers with a comma, a space, or and. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify any available option. IDREF="FM74891"See "Options for Workstations on Bindery Servers" on page 281COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.PAGENUM=284 ID="BP269"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM74891"Options for Workstations on Bindery ServersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use this option toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"EVERYONECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sends message to members of the group EVERYONE.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CONSOLECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sends message to the server console.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/BCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allows bindery syntax from an NDS connection.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SENDMARK=BULLETAll users except the following receive messages:MARK=BULLETThose who used SEND at the workstation with the "Accept None" option.Those logged in using ACS or NACS.Those logged in on remote workstations.Those using some graphics applications.Those who are attached to the server but not logged in.Messages don't interfere with a workstation's display; however, the user can't make entries on the screen until messages are cleared.RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10582"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4023"
ExamplesRENDERAS="SECT3"Workstation ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo send the message "Time for the meeting" to Bob, Sue, and Jeff, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "TIME FOR THE MEETING" BOB, SUE, JEFF
PAGENUM=285 ID="BP270"To send the message "Time for the meeting" to Bob, using a complete name, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "TIME FOR THE MEETING" .BOB.NOVELLTo send the message "Time for the meeting" to KELLEY on bindery server FRIENDLY (if you are logged in to NDS), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "TIME FOR THE MEETING" FRIENDLY/KELLEY /B(If you are not logged in to NDS, you don't need to use /B.)To set your workstation to receive only console or system messages, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND /A=CTo IDXID="w10583"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i639"
clear a message from a workstation and resume work, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"<Ctrl>+<Enter>RENDERAS="SECT3"Server ExamplesIDXID="w10584"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4021"MARK=BULLETTo send the message "The server is going down" to all users logged in or attached to the server, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "THE SERVER IS GOING DOWN"To send "The server is going down" to user ANDREA, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "THE SERVER IS GOING DOWN" ANDREATo send "Log out please" to user ANDREA, using the complete name, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "LOG OUT PLEASE" ANDREA.SALES.NOVELLTo send "Paychecks are here!" to connection 1 (from a bindery connection), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE""Paychecks are here!" 1
PAGENUM=286 ID="BP271"To send "Meeting time" to users ANDREA, BRYAN, and MICHAEL and to stations 1 and 4, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SEND "MEETING TIME" TO ANDREA, BRYAN, MICHAEL, 1, 4RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using SEND to send a message from the consoleCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Sending Console Messages to Workstations" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery-based serverCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Bindery" in Concepts.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Stopping message displaysCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Sending Console Messages to Workstations" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=287 ID="BP272"ID="FM93874"SERVERIDXID="w10585"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4058"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console from the DOS prompt toMARK=BULLETBoot NetWare on your serverExecute the STARTUP.NCF fileMount volume SYS:Execute the AUTOEXEC.NCF fileExecute the INITSYS.NCF fileRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SERVER [parameter]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-s [path]filename.NCFCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an alternative to STARTUP.NCF. Replace filename with the name of the alternate file. (The file extension must be .NCF)The system looks for the file in the current boot directory, unless you specify a path.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-naCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10586"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"
Prevent the AUTOEXEC.NCF file that you created in INSTALL from executing.This parameter is useful if you are changing drivers or other commands in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"-nsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10587"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4264"
Prevent the STARTUP.NCF and AUTOEXEC.NCF files created in INSTALL from executing.This parameter is useful for changing the boot process.PAGENUM=288 ID="BP273"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SERVERMARK=BULLETSERVER is a DOS-executable file that boots the NetWare operating system.If neither of the .NCF files exists, SERVER prompts you for a server name and an IPX internal network number; SERVER then brings up the console prompt (:).To automatically bring up the server when you boot up the machine, you can do one of the following:MARK=BULLETPlace the SERVER command in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file in your boot partition.Use REMOVE DOS to boot the NetWare operating system automatically after you down the server and use the EXIT command.SERVER executes STARTUP.NCF and AUTOEXEC.NCF, if they exist.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restarting server execution from the console promptCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM55915""RESTART SERVER" on page 251COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing NCF filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=289 ID="BP274"ID="FM67672"IDXID="w10588"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4084"
SERVMANRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10589"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"
View and IDXID="w10590"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i759"
configure IDXID="w10591"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2773"IDXID="w10592"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
system parametersIDXID="w10593"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"
Change system parameter values in the AUTOEXEC.NCFIDXID="w10594"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4264"
, STARTUP.NCF, and TIMESYNC.CFG filesIDXID="w10595"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"
View IDXID="w10596"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
volume, storage, IDXID="w10597"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"IDXID="w10598"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2839"
network, IDXID="w10599"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i87"
adapter, IDXID="w10600"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1022"
device, and disk IDXID="w10601"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1125"
partition informationSERVMAN has the same functionality as the SET command.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD SERVMANRENDERAS="SECT2"Using SERVMANThe SERVMAN (Server Manager) main screen displays statistics about the server, such as processor use, processor speed, and number of modules loaded. See IDREF="FM14590"Figure 2-20.The main screen also displays an "Available Options" menu. These options give you access to more detailed information.Earlier versions of SERVMAN allowed you to configure IPX/SPX. Configuration of IPX/SPX is now done through the INETCFG utility. See IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" on page 93.For more information, pressMOREINFO="NONE" <F1> while you are in the utility.PAGENUM=290 ID="BP275"LABEL="2-20" FLOAT="0"ID="FM14590"The SERVMAN Main ScreenFILEREF="n41ut46a.tif"RENDERAS="SECT3"Statistics Displayed on the SERVMAN Main ScreenThe SERVMAN utility updates statistics every second. COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server uptimeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Length of time the server has been running since it was last booted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Processor utilizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Percentage of time that the server CPU is busy.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Processor speedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Speed at which the processor is running, based on CPU clock speed, CPU type, and the number of memory wait states.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server processesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of processes running on the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loaded NLMsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of modules loaded on the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mounted volumesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of volumes mounted on the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Active queuesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of active queues on the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Logged-in usersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of users logged in to the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loaded name spacesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of name spaces loaded on the server.PAGENUM=291 ID="BP276"RENDERAS="SECT3"Selections in theID="FM42907"SERVMAN "Available Options" MenuCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Menu OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MARK=BULLETView and configure operating system parameters. Change system parameter values in the AUTOEXEC.NCF and STARTUP.NCF files. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Storage informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View adapter, device, and partition information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View information about volumes mounted on the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View network information, such as number of packets received and transmitted.PAGENUM=292 ID="BP277"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SET commandCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM88068""SET" (page 291)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=293 ID="BP278"ID="FM88068"SETRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to vIDXID="w10602"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"
iew and IDXID="w10603"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2773"
configure IDXID="w10604"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i609"
operating system IDXID="w10605"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
parameters. You can also use SERVMAN to configure and set operating system parameters. The default SET parameters give maximum performance for most systems. Network supervisors should seldom need to change parameters.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET [parameter] = [value]RENDERAS="SECT3"Parameters:TYPE="VERT"IDREF="FM17687"Communication Parameters (page 294)IDREF="FM19881"Memory Parameters (page 299)IDREF="FM84175"File Caching Parameters (page 302)IDREF="FM80201"Directory Caching Parameters (page 305)IDREF="FM81341"File System Parameters (page 311)IDREF="FM13560"Lock Parameters (page 320)IDREF="FM43997"Transaction Tracking Parameters (page 322)IDREF="FM29477"Disk Parameters (page 324)IDREF="FM70918"Time Synchronization Parameters (page 326)IDREF="FM59825"NCP Parameters (page 333)IDREF="FM48390"Miscellaneous Parameters (page 337)IDREF="FM51342"Error Handling Parameters (page 344)IDREF="FM63498"NetWare Directory Services Parameters (page 346)IDREF="FM75725"SFT III Parameters (page 351)PAGENUM=294 ID="BP279"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SETAlthough most parameters don't need to be changed, you might increase the performance of your system by changing some parameters. Suggestions for improving server performance can be found in "Monitoring and Optimizing the Server," in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT3"Displaying and Changing Current SettingsIDXID="w10606"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2773"MARK=BULLETIf you type SET without a parameter, a list of categories appears. When you select a category, the current settings for the parameters in that category appear, along with the setting limits and a brief description of each parameter.If you type SET with a parameter but no value, the current setting, setting limits, and a brief description of the parameter appear.If you type SET with a parameter and a value, the operating system is reconfigured according to the specified value.You can also use the SERVMAN NLM to display and modify parameter settings. IDREF="FM67672"See "SERVMAN" on page 286.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10607"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"
Entering ParametersMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10608"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2773"
You can use most SET parameters at the console prompt. The system is immediately configured to that setting. Any setting in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file is overridden until the server is rebooted.IDXID="w10609"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i362"IDXID="w10610"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2773"
You can save SET commands you execute at the console prompt in the AUTOEXEC.NCF file. When a parameter is saved, the server configures itself to the parameter each time the server is booted.If the parameter isn't saved in the file, the system returns to the default setting for the parameter when the server is booted. Some commands can be saved in the STARTUP.NCF file.Edit the AUTOEXEC.NCF or the STARTUP.NCF file with INSTALL. If you use SERVMAN to change SET parameters, you are prompted to update .NCF files before exiting the utility.PAGENUM=295 ID="BP280"RENDERAS="SECT3"Parameters that Control the Allocation of ServicesIDXID="w10611"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2773"Some SET parameters control how the system dynamically allocates services. Three types of parameters interact to control the allocation of a service:MARK=BULLETMaximum limits control how many resources the operating system can allocate for a particular service.Minimum limits allow the operating system to allocate a minimum number of resources as soon as a request is received. Low minimum limits slow the growth of a particular service. High minimum limits allow rapid growth.For example, if the minimum number of directory cache buffers is set to 20, the system allocates another buffer resource as soon as a request is made until 20 cache buffers have been allocated.When 20 directory cache buffers are allocated, the system waits 2.2 seconds (default) when a request comes in, and then allocates another buffer if the request is still active. However, if the minimum number of directory cache buffers is set to 40, the system allocates 40 directory cache buffers before it starts slowing the growth by waiting 2.2 seconds after each request. Wait time limits control how rapidly the operating system can allocate a new resource.PAGENUM=296 ID="BP281"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM17687"Communication ParametersIDXID="w10612"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i702"IDXID="w10613"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"Communication parameters control settings for communication buffers. Four parameters configure packet receive buffers; four control the watchdog.MARK=BULLETPacket IDXID="w10614"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3182"
Receive Buffers are areas in the server's memory that are set aside to hold data packets. The packets remain in the buffers while the server processes them. To view the number of packet receive buffers allocated, use MONITOR.IDXID="w10615"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4818"
Watchdog Packets make sure stations are connected. If the server doesn't receive a packet from a station within a set time (Delay Before First Watchdog Packet), a watchdog packet is sent to the station.If the station doesn't respond within a set time (Delay Between Watchdog Packets), another packet is sent. If the station doesn't respond to a set number of packets, the server assumes that the station is no longer connected and clears the station's connection.ID="FM70047"ID="FM95040"ID="FM42512"PAGENUM=297 ID="BP282"See IDREF="FM89289"Table 2-4 for a description of communication parameters.IDXID="w10616"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i702"LABEL="2-4" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM89289" Communication ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Packet Receive Buffers = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of packet receive buffers the operating system can allocate. Supported values: 50 to 4000. Default: 100. Note: For SFT III systems, the default is 400.Before increasing this parameter, use MONITOR to view the server's use of packet receive buffers and service processes. If the number of packet receive buffers is at maximum, increase this parameter in increments of 10 until you have one packet receive buffer per workstation.If you have EISA or microchannel bus master boards in your server, increase this parameter to provide at least five buffers per board. If the board is producing "No ECB available count" errors, provide 10 buffers per board. Use MONITOR ("LAN Information") to determine if the board is producing errors.If the number of allocated service processes is at maximum, you can increase the "Maximum Service Processes" parameter to decrease the need for more packet receive buffers.The value of this parameter should be greater than the value of the Minimum Packet Receive Buffers parameter. If it is less, the system increases the value to match that of the Minimum Packet Receive Buffers parameter.This parameter can be set in the appropriate startup .NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum IDXID="w10617"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3182"
Packet Receive Buffers = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the minimum number of packet receive buffers the operating system can allocate. The operating system allocates this number of buffers as soon as the server boots. You must add this command to the STARTUP.NCF file. You cannot change the setting at the console prompt.Supported values: 10 to 2000. Default: 50.Note: For SFT III systems, the default is 100. This parameter must be set to the same value in the MSSTART.NCF and IOSTART.NCF files.Before increasing this parameter, use MONITOR to view the server's use of packet receive buffers.If you have EISA or microchannel bus master boards in your server and are receiving "No ECB available count" errors (see "LAN Information" in IDREF="FM70828""MONITOR" on page 137) right after the server boots, increase this parameter so that each board can have at least five packet receive buffers.If the allocated number is higher than 10 and the server doesn't respond immediately after booting, increase this parameter.In NetWare 4.1, the value of this parameter must be less than the value of the Maximum Packet Receive Buffers parameter. If it is greater, the system increases the value of the Maximum Packet Receive Buffers parameter to match that of the Minimum Packet Receive Buffers parameter.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10618"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3192"
Physical Receive Packet Size = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum size of packets that can be transmitted on the network. You must add this command to the STARTUP.NCF file. You cannot change the setting at the console prompt.Supported values: 618 to 24682. Default: 4202.The default allows 2 KB (data with the packet header). If you use token ring or Ethernet boards, the default is acceptable.If some of your network boards transmit more than 512 bytes of data per packet, set this parameter for the largest packet size.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX NetBIOS Replication Option = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how the IPX router handles replicated NetBIOS broadcasts.Supported values:0 = Do not replicate NetBIOS broadcasts.1 = Duplicate broadcasts when there are redundant routes.2 = Suppress duplicate broadcasts.Default: 2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Interrupt Events = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of IDXID="w10619"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1882"
interrupt time events (such as IPX routing) allowed before a thread switch is guaranteed to have occurred.Supported values: 1 to 1000000. Default: 10.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reply to Get Nearest Server = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the server responds to "Get Nearest Server" requests from stations trying to locate directory and file servers.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10620"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2801"
Number of IDXID="w10621"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4818"
Watchdog IDXID="w10622"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4818"
Packets = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of unanswered watchdog packets that the server sends to a workstation before closing its connection.Supported values: 5 to 100. Default: 10.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Delay IDXID="w10623"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4818"
Between Watchdog Packets = timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the amount of time between watchdog packets.Supported values: 9.9 seconds to 10 minutes 26.2 seconds. Default: 59.3 seconds.After a server sends out the first watchdog packet, it waits the specified time before sending out succeeding packets if it receives no reply.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Delay IDXID="w10624"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3182"
Before First Watchdog Packet = timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the amount of time the server waits without receiving a request from a workstation before sending out the first watchdog packet to that station.Supported values: 15.7 seconds to 14 days. Default: 4 minutes 56.6 seconds.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"New Packet Receive Buffer IDXID="w10625"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3182"
Wait Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long the operating system waits after receiving a request for a packet receive buffer before granting a new buffer. Supported values: 0.1 second to 20 seconds. Default: 0.1 second.This parameter prevents the system from granting too many buffers during a sudden peak in usage.If you have an EISA bus master board in your server, don't change this parameter.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Console Display Watchdog IDXID="w10626"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4818"
Logouts = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether a console IDXID="w10627"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
message is displayed when a connection is cleared. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: OFF. If your network is running smoothly, you don't need to display watchdog logouts.If your workstations are having connection problems, the watchdog logout messages can help you isolate which stations aren't receiving or sending watchdog packets.ID="FM71112"PAGENUM=301 ID="BP283"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM19881"Memory ParametersIDXID="w10628"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2381"IDXID="w10629"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"
Memory parameters control the size of the dynamic memory pool and the automatic registering of memory on EISA bus computers.For a description of memory parameters, see IDREF="FM68552"Table 2-5.LABEL="2-5" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM68552" Memory ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow IDXID="w10630"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1895"
Invalid Pointers = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether invalid pointers are allowed to cause a nonexistent page to be mapped in with only one notification.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Read IDXID="w10631"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3680"
Fault Notification = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the console and error log are IDXID="w10632"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2984"
notified of emulated read page faults.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Read Fault Emulation = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether a read that occurs from a nonpresent page is emulated.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Write IDXID="w10633"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4849"
Fault Notification = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the console and error log are notified of emulated write page faults.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Write Fault Emulation = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether a write that occurs from a nonpresent page is emulated.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Garbage IDXID="w10634"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1591"
Collection Interval = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum time between garbage collections.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: 1 minute to 1 hour. Default: 15 minutes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of Frees for Garbage Collection = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the minimum number of times memory must be freed before a garbage collection can occur. This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: 100 to 100000. Default: 5000.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum Free Memory for Garbage Collection = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the minimum free allocation bytes needed for garbage collection.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: 1000 to 1000000. Default: 8000.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Alloc IDXID="w10635"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i159"
Memory Check Flag = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the server will do IDXID="w10636"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i856"
corruption checking in the alloc memory nodes.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ID="FM34904"Auto Register IDXID="w10637"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i104"
Memory IDXID="w10638"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3724"
Above 16 Megabytes = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control the automatic registering of memory above 16 MB in IDXID="w10639"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1299"
EISA computers. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.You must set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file. You cannot set the value at the command line.Use OFF if you have installed a network board or a disk adapter board that uses an online DMA or AT bus. (The board can address only 16 MB of memory correctly.)If you install one of these boards and the server addresses more than 16 MB of memory, the board corrupts server memory because it addresses low memory instead of its assigned high memory and corrupts the low memory in use.Use ON if you want memory above 16 MB to be registered with the operating system.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reserved Buffers Below 16 Meg = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of file cache buffers IDXID="w10640"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1453"
reserved for IDXID="w10641"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3810"
device drivers that can't access memory above 16 MB.Supported values: 8 to 300. Default: 16.You must set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file. You cannot set the value at the command line.PAGENUM=304 ID="BP284"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM84175"File Caching ParametersIDXID="w10642"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1454"IDXID="w10643"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"File 
caching allows faster access to frequently used files by holding a file (or a portion of it) in memory. Files being read from or written to are kept in file cache buffers. The number of files kept in memory depends on the number of file cache buffers allowed. This is determined by the amount of memory available and the Minimum File Cache Buffers parameter.PAGENUM=305 ID="BP285"See IDREF="FM81279"Table 2-6 for a description of file caching parameters.LABEL="2-6" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM81279" File Caching ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Read IDXID="w10644"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3679"
Ahead Enabled = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the system conducts background reads to cache in advance of blocks soon to be requested. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ONRead-aheads can happen only when sequential file accesses are occurring.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Read Ahead LRU Sitting Time Threshold = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the minimum cache LRU (least recently used) sitting time for read-aheads to take place.Supported values: 0 seconds to 1 hour. Default: 10 seconds.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum IDXID="w10645"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1453"
File Cache Buffers = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the minimum number of cache buffers the operating system can allow for file caching.Supported values: 20 to 1000. Default: 20.All memory not allocated for other processes is given to file caching. As memory is requested for other processes, the server gives up cache buffers.This limit specifies when the server must stop giving file cache buffers to other processes. If you set the minimum too high, other processes may not be able to allocate necessary memory resources.For example, a module could fail to load because the server is out of available memory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Concurrent Disk Cache Writes = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of IDXID="w10646"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4853"
write requests for changed file data that can be put in the elevator before the disk head begins a sweep across the disk.Supported values: 10 to 4000. Default: 50.A high number creates more IDXID="w10647"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4853"
efficient write requests. A low number creates more IDXID="w10648"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3685"
efficient read requests.Monitor the number of dirty cache buffers on the information screen in MONITOR. If this number is above 70% of total cache buffers, optimize the write speed by increasing this parameter.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10649"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1098"
Dirty Disk Cache Delay Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10650"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4853"
Specify how long the system keeps a write request (that does not fill a cache buffer) in memory before writing the request to disk. Supported values: 0.1 second to 10 seconds. Default: 3.3 seconds.Increasing the time makes disk writing more efficient if your users make many small write requests. Decreasing the time can reduce performance drastically, and reduces the chances of losing data only slightly.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum File Cache Report Threshold = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how few cache buffers can be available before the operating system IDXID="w10651"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1453"
warns you that the number of buffers is getting low.Supported values: 0 to 1000. Default: 20For example, if the Minimum File Cache Buffers parameter is set to 20 and this parameter is set to 25, you are warned when all but 45 cache buffers are allocated for other processes.Regardless of how this parameter is set, the operating system warns you when it reaches the minimum number of cache buffers. You receive the following message: "Cache memory allocator exceeded minimum cache buffer left limit."PAGENUM=308 ID="BP286"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM80201"Directory Caching ParametersIDXID="w10652"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1047"IDXID="w10653"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"Directory caching allows fast access to frequently used directories. A IDXID="w10654"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1046"directory cache buffer is a portion of NetWare server memory that holds entries from the directory table. A directory entry stays in a cache buffer as long as it is accessed frequently (default: 33 seconds). The system can overwrite the directory entry if the allocated directory cache buffers are accessed more frequently.See IDREF="FM39161"Table 2-7 for a description of directory caching parameters.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10655"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1046"
Allocation of Directory Cache BuffersWhen the server boots, the system allocates a minimum number of directory cache buffers (default: 20). It creates these buffers immediately when it receives a request for a new buffer.When the minimum number of buffers is allocated and another is needed, the system must wait a specified amount of time before allocating another buffer.If necessary, the system allocates buffers until it reaches the maximum. If enough directory cache buffers are allocated and enough memory is available for directory caching, all directory tables can be cached in memory.RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10656"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1047"
How Directory Caching and File Caching Work TogetherIDXID="w10657"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1454"As directory cache buffers increase, file cache buffers decrease. Thus, a tradeoff exists between directory caching and file caching. Directory caching and file caching must be balanced carefully for maximum performance.PAGENUM=309 ID="BP287"If you adjust the system to use too much memory for directory caching, you can leave too little memory for file caching, and vice versa.LABEL="2-7" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10658"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1047"ID="FM39161" Directory Caching ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Dirty Directory Cache Delay Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long the system keeps a directory table IDXID="w10659"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4853"
write request in memory before writing it to disk.Supported values: 0 to 10 seconds. Default: 0.5 secondIncreasing the delay time gives slightly quicker performance but increases the probability of the directory tables becoming corrupted.Decreasing the delay time slightly reduces the chance of directory tables becoming corrupted, but can reduce performance slightly.A zero setting reduces performance dramatically.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Concurrent Directory Cache Writes = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many write requests from directory cache buffers are put in the elevator before the disk head begins a IDXID="w10660"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4853"
sweep across the disk.Supported values: 5 to 50. Default: 10.A high number creates more IDXID="w10661"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4853"
efficient write requests. A low number creates more IDXID="w10662"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3685"
efficient read requests.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory Cache Allocation Wait Time = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long the system must wait after allocating a new directory cache buffer before it can allocate another buffer.Supported values: 0.5 second to 2 minutes. Default: 2.2 seconds.During this time, all requests for a new directory cache buffer are ignored.If the wait time is too low, peak usage requests cause more resources than necessary to be allocated to directory caching.If the wait time is too high, the system is very slow in allocating the directory cache buffers necessary to service the usual number of directory requests.If directory searches seem slow even after the server has been running for 15 minutes, you may want to decrease this parameter.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory Cache Buffer NonReferenced Delay = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long a directory entry must be cached before it can be IDXID="w10663"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1051"
overwritten by another directory entry.Supported values: 1 second to 5 minutes. Default: 5.5 seconds.Increasing this parameter speeds directory access. The system allocates more directory cache buffers, and a directory is more likely to be cached in memory.Decreasing this parameter slows directory access but also reduces the need for directory cache buffers.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10664"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1046"
Directory Cache Buffers = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of cache buffers that the system can allocate for directory caching. Supported values: 20 to 4000. Default: 500.This parameter keeps the system from allocating too many directory cache buffers so that memory is available for other server processes.Increase this limit if the server responds slowly to directory searches.Decrease this limit if too much memory is being allocated for directory caching.If users are warned that the server is IDXID="w10665"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2240"
low on IDXID="w10666"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
memory, this parameter should be one of the first to be reduced. (Reboot the server to return the memory to the cache buffer memory pool.)When a directory cache buffer is allocated, the allocation is permanent until the server reboots; the buffers don't return to file caching when the need for directory cache buffers decreases.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum IDXID="w10667"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1046"
Directory Cache Buffers = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the minimum number of cache buffers that the system can allocate for directory caching. Supported values: 10 to 2000. Default: 20.The number needs to be high enough that directory searches can be done quickly, but no higher than necessary.If the system doesn't need the minimum number of directory cache buffers, the buffers can't be reallocated to file caching. The unneeded portion remains unused.If the server responds slowly to directory searches after it is booted, monitor the number of directory cache buffers usually allocated for directory caching.If the number is significantly higher than this limit, consider increasing the limit to remove the delay time that normally occurs while the server is self-configuring. Use MONITOR to view the current statistics.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Number of Directory Handles = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of directory handles available for each connection.Supported values: 20 to 1000. Default: 20.A directory handle is a version of the directory access rights that is held in cache memory. Caching the access rights speeds mapping to the rights. Each time a connection accesses a file or directory, a directory handle is allocated (up to the total specified by this parameter). COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Number of Internal Directory Handles = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of directory handles available for internal NLMs that use connection 0.Supported values: 40 to 1000. Default: 100.A directory handle is a version of the directory access rights that is held in cache memory. Caching the access rights speeds mapping to the rights. Connection 0 is the connection number reserved for use by the server itself and by NLMs operating within the server.Each time an NLM program using connection zero accesses a file or directory, a directory handle is allocated (up to the total specified by this parameter). This value represents the total number of handles available to be shared by all NLMs using connection 0.PAGENUM=314 ID="BP288"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM81341"File System ParametersIDXID="w10668"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"MARK=BULLETThree parameters control warnings about volumes that are almost full. Four parameters control file purging. File-purging parameters influence other parameters, which in turn control warnings about almost-full volumes.All deleted files remain on the disk for a specified minimum amount of time. The system calculates a volume's remaining space by subtracting the following from the total space:MARK=BULLETActual filesSalvageable files that can't be purged because their "Minimum File Delete Wait Times" have not expiredOne parameter controls the reuse of turbo FATs.Eight parameters control file compression.See IDREF="FM59114"Table 2-8 for a description of file system parameters.LABEL="2-8" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM59114" File System Parameters COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum File Delete Wait Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long a IDXID="w10669"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"
deleted file remains IDXID="w10670"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3940"
salvageable on the volume. Supported values: 0 seconds to 7 days. Default: 1 minute 5.9 seconds.Files deleted for less than this minimum aren't automatically purged even if the volume is full and users can't create new files.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"File Delete Wait Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify when a salvageable file can be purged to create free space on a volume. Supported values: 0 seconds to 7 days. Default: 5 minutes 29.6 seconds.Set this parameter as high as is useful for your users, but this parameter doesn't guarantee that a file remains salvageable.The system tries to keep at least 1/32 of available space on the volume free for new files. This parameter only guarantees that files aren't purged to maintain this free disk space.Files that haven't met this time limit are purged if the volume is full and the system needs space for a user to create a new file.When a deleted file remains on the server longer than the File Delete Wait Time parameter setting, the system marks the file as purgeable. When the volume is full of purgeable files and needs free space, the oldest purgeable files are purged.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow Deletion of Active Directories = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether a IDXID="w10671"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1091"
directory can be deleted when another connection has a drive mapped to it.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Percent of Volume Space Allowed for Extended Attributes = percentageCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Limit the portion of IDXID="w10672"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1392"
volume space used for extended attribute storage. The setting takes effect only when the volume is being mounted.Supported values: 5 to 50. Default: 10.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Extended Attributes per File or Path = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Limit the IDXID="w10673"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1392"
number of extended attributes that can be assigned to a file or path (subdirectory). This limit applies to all volumes on the server.Supported values: 4 to 512. Default: 16.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Percent of Volume Used by Directory = percentageCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Limit the portion of aIDXID="w10674"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4791"
 volume that can be used as directory space.Supported values: 5 to 50. Default: 13.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Immediate Purge of Deleted Files = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10675"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3940"
Controls whether IDXID="w10676"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3643"
deleted files can be salvaged. If this parameter is set to OFF, files can be salvaged with the FILER utility. IDREF="FM48071"See "FILER" on page 67.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: OFF.If this parameter is set to ON, all files are purged immediately when they are deleted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10677"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4312"
Subdirectory Tree Depth = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many levels of subdirectories the system supports.Supported values: 10 to 100. Default: 25.You must set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file. You cannot set the parameter at the command line.Increase the number if your applications support trees deeper than 25.Decrease the number if your applications support only shallow tree structures. (Some DOS applications can't support more than 10 levels if the subdirectories have 11-character names.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume Low IDXID="w10678"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4791"
Warn All Users = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Have the system notify users when a volume is almost full. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.If you choose not to have your server warn users, monitor volume statistics at least daily with SERVMAN or MONITOR.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume Low Warning Reset Threshold = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control how much disk space must be freed up before a second warning is issued that the volume is almost full. (The first warning is controlled by the "Volume Low Warn All Users" parameter.) Supported values: 0 to 100000 blocks. Default: 256 blocks.When a volume is almost full, it can hover at its warning threshold as users create and delete files. This parameter controls the minimum amount of space that must be made available above the threshold before the warning message disappears. Example: Assume the volume block size is 4 KB, the "Volume Low Warning Reset Threshold" is set to 256, the "Volume Low Warning Threshold" is set to 256, and the volume has less than 1 MB of free space.Given these conditions, the volume must gain at least 1 MB of free space (for a total of 2 MB of free space) and then dip below 1 MB before the system sends another warning that the volume is almost full.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume Low IDXID="w10679"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4791"
Warning Threshold = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of blocks of free disk space that can remain on a volume before the system issues a warning.Supported values: 0 to 1000000 blocks. Default: 256 blocks.Consider the following: A block is the minimum space allocated to a file; a file can grow only in multiples of the block size.The block's physical size is determined when the volume is created. A volume can be assigned these block sizes: 4 KB, 8 KB, 16 KB, 32 KB, or 64 KB. For example, if you enter 256 blocks for this parameter and the volume's block size is 4 KB, the system warns you that the volume is full when about 1 MB of space is left.If your volumes are assigned different block sizes, each volume has a different amount of free space when the warning is issued.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Turbo IDXID="w10680"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4608"
FAT Re-Use Wait Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long a turbo FAT buffer remains in memory after an indexed file is closed. Supported values: 0.3 second to 1 hour 5 minutes 54.6 seconds. Default: 5 minutes 29.6 seconds.Once the wait-time value has passed, the system can allocate the buffer to another indexed file.Increase the wait time if MARK=BULLETYou want the turbo FAT index to remain in memory for long periods of time, even when the file is closed.You frequently reopen the same file after a specific delay and know that another file opened during that delay will reuse the index.Decrease the wait time if you want the memory released immediately to service the next file that needs to be indexed.When a program randomly accesses a file that contains more than 64 FAT entries, the system builds a turbo FAT index for the file so that information is accessed quickly. (The NetWare 3 system indexes any randomly accessed file with 64 entries in the FAT.)The system doesn't immediately delete the index from its buffer when the file is closed.Having the turbo FAT index in memory makes reopening the file and accessing information faster.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Compression Daily Check Stop Hour = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10681"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1456"
Specify the hour when you want the file compressor to stop scanning enabled volumes for files that need to be compressed. Supported values: 0 to 23. Default: 6.Hours are specified by a 24-hour clock: 0 = midnight; 23 = 11 p.m.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Compression Daily Check Starting Hour = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the hour when you want the file compressor to start scanning enabled volumes for files that need to be compressed. Supported values: 0 to 23.Default: 0.Hours are specified by a 24-hour clock: 0 = midnight; 23 = 11 p.m.Note: If the Compression Daily Check Stop Hour parameter is the same as the "Compression Daily Check Starting Hour," then the file compressor starts checking every day at the Compression Daily Starting Hour time and runs as long as necessary to finish all files that meet the compressible criteria.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Minimum Compression Percentage Gain = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the minimum IDXID="w10682"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1456"
percentage a file must compress to remain in a compressed state.Supported values: 0 to 50. Default: 2.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enable File Compression = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether IDXID="w10683"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1456"
file compression is suspended. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.ON allows file compression on compression-enabled volumes.OFF suspends compression; immediate compress requests are queued until value is reset to ON, when the files meeting criteria will be compressed.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Concurrent Compressions = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the IDXID="w10684"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1456"
maximum concurrent or simultaneous compressions allowed. Supported values: 1 to 8. Default: 2.Concurrent compressions can occur only if there are multiple volumes.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Convert Compressed to Uncompressed Option = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10685"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1456"
Specify what the system does with an uncompressed version of a file after the server has uncompressed it.Supported values:0 = Always leave the file compressed.1 = Leave the file compressed until second access if it is read only once during the time specified by the Days Untouched Before Compression parameter.2 = Always leave the file uncompressed. Default: 1This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10686"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1461"
Decompress Percent Disk Space Free to Allow Commit = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the percentage of free disk space required on a volume for file uncompression to permanently change compressed files to uncompressed.Supported values: 0 to 75. Default: 10.This parameter prevents newly uncompressed files from filling up the volume. This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Decompress Free Space Warning Interval = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the time between alerts when the file system is not changing compressed files to uncompressed because of insufficient disk space.Supported values: 0 seconds to 29 days 15 hours 50 minutes 3.8 seconds. Default: 31 minutes 18.5 seconds.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Deleted Files Compression Option = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether and when IDXID="w10687"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"
deleted files are compressed.Supported values: 0 = Don't Compress deleted files.1 = Compress deleted files the next day.2 = Compress deleted files immediately.Default: 1.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Days Untouched Before Compression = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of days the system waits after a file was last accessed before it is compressedSupported values: 0 to 100000. Default: 7.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow Unowned Files To Be Extended = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether files can be modified when the owner has been lost or deleted.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ONThis parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.PAGENUM=323 ID="BP289"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM13560"Lock ParametersIDXID="w10688"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2181"IDXID="w10689"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"Lock parameters controlMARK=BULLETHow many open files each workstation can haveHow many open files the system can handleHow many record locks each connection can haveHow many record locks the system can handleIDXID="w10690"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2181"
There are three types of locks:MARK=BULLETIDXID="w10691"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1465"
File locks secure the file and prevent other stations from accessing it.IDXID="w10692"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3310"
Physical record locks control data access by multiple users. They prevent other users from accessing or changing a range of bytes (a record) in a file. PAGENUM=324 ID="BP290"Physical record locks are enforced by the system. If a user tries to access a range of bytes that is physically locked, the user receives an "Access Denied" error message.IDXID="w10693"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2205"
Logical record locks also control data access by multiple users. The application assigns a name to each section of data that needs to be locked. The application then locks this name whenever it accesses the data. Logical locks are enforced only to the extent that the application checks the name each time it needs access to data.See IDREF="FM31267"Table 2-9 for a description of lock parameters.LABEL="2-9" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10694"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2181"ID="FM31267"Lock Parameters COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10695"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3704"
Record Locks Per Connection = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control how many record locks a workstation can use at one time. (Use MONITOR to view how many record locks a station is using.)Supported values: 10 to 100000. Default: 500.Increase this parameter when an application can't lock enough records and fails.Decrease this parameter if stations are using too many server resources.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10696"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1465"
Maximum File Locks Per Connection = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control how many opened and locked files a station can use at one time. (Use MONITOR to view how many opened and locked files a station is using.)Supported values: 10 to 1000. Default: 250.Increase this parameter when an application can't open enough files and fails.(An OS/2 station might need a higher default than 250. You may also need to increase the number of file handles in the station's NET.CFG file.)Decrease this parameter if stations are using too many server resources.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10697"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3704"
Record Locks = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control how many record locks the operating system can handle. (Use MONITOR to view how many record locks a station is using on that server.)Supported values: 100 to 400000. Default: 20000.Increase this parameter if users have problems running applications and receive messages indicating that not enough record locks are available.Decrease this parameter if users are using too many server resources.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10698"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1465"
File Locks = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control how many opened and locked files the operating system can handle. (Use MONITOR to view the number of files that are open during peak usage.)Supported values: 100 to 100000. Default: 10000.Increase this parameter if the number of open files is near or equal to the default.Decrease this parameter to restrict the number of available server resources.PAGENUM=326 ID="BP291"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM43997"Transaction Tracking ParametersIDXID="w10699"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"IDXID="w10700"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"MARK=BULLETA IDXID="w10701"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4553"t
ransaction is a set of write operations that must be completed together to maintain file and database integrity.IDXID="w10702"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4851"Write operations consist not only of data and data records, but also of changes to the index and the key structures that are important to an application's continual operation.IDXID="w10703"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
The Transaction Tracking System€PAGENUM=327 ID="BP292" (TTS) guarantees that a transaction is written to disk in its complete form or is backed out if incomplete. This ensures database integrity in case a failure occurs before a transaction is completed.See IDREF="FM22629"Table 2-10 for a description of transaction tracking parameters.LABEL="2-10" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10704"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"ID="FM22629" Transaction Tracking ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Auto TTS Backout Flag = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether a crashed server with transactional files can IDXID="w10705"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
automatically back out of incomplete transactions when the server is booted. Supported values:ON = The server backs out incomplete transactions when booting.OFF = The server waits for you to answer a prompt before it boots.Default: ON.You must set this parameter in STARTUP.NCF. You cannot set the parameter at the command line.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TTS Abort Dump Flag = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether a file is created to IDXID="w10706"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
log transactional backout data. Supported values: ON = The information is saved in TTS$LOG.ERR.OFF = The information backed out is not saved.Default: OFF.When a server fails during a data write to a file flagged Transactional, the system can back out the incomplete write. The backed-out information is written to file TTS$LOG.ERR on volume SYS:. You can print the file or view it with a text editor.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Transactions = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many IDXID="w10707"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
transactions can occur at the same time.Supported values: 100 to 10000. Default: 10000.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TTS UnWritten Cache Wait Time = time COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10708"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
Specify how long a block of transactional data can be held in memory. Supported values: 11 seconds to 10 minutes 59.1 seconds. Default: 1 minute 5.9 seconds.Some blocks of transactional data wait for other transactional blocks to be written first. If one of these blocks reaches its maximum time limit, other write requests are held up and this block is written to disk.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TTS Backout File Truncation Wait Time = timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10709"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"
Specify how long allocated blocks remain available for the TTS backout file when these blocks are not in use.Supported values: 1 minute 5.9 seconds to 1 day 2 hours 21 minutes 51.3 seconds. Default: 59 minutes 19.2 seconds.PAGENUM=328 ID="BP293"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM29477"Disk ParametersIDXID="w10710"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1123"IDXID="w10711"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"Disk parameters control one part of IDXID="w10712"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1697"
Hot FixTM redirection. IDXID="w10713"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1697"
Hot Fix redirection can occur during a write request, a read request, or a read-after-write verification.MARK=BULLETWrite redirection occurs when the disk reports an error during a write request. The system marks the block as bad and redirects the data to a different block.Read redirection occurs when a disk error happens during a read request. If the disk is mirrored, the system retrieves the data from the mirrored disk and redirects the data on the primary disk. If the disk isn't mirrored, the data is lost, but the block is marked as bad.Read-after-write verify redirection occurs after data is written to disk. The data on disk is then read and compared to that in memory. PAGENUM=329 ID="BP294"If the two don't match, the system marks the block as bad and redirects the data to a different block.See IDREF="FM50325A"Table 2-11 for a description of disk parameters. LABEL="2-11" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM50325A"IDXID="w10714"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1123"Disk Parameters COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enable Disk Read After Write Verify = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether information written to disk is compared with that in memory. Usually, you shouldn't disable this portion of Hot Fix.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default: ON.If your disks are mirrored and reliable and you need extra speed on disk writes, using OFF can almost double the IDXID="w10715"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1133"
speed of disk writes.Some disks and drivers provide their own read-after-write verify procedure. In this case, set the parameter to OFF, so the read- after-write-verify operation isn't done twice.Changing this value affects only disks loaded after the parameter is changed. To set this value for currently loaded disks, use the "Disk Information" option of the MONITOR utility. IDREF="FM70828"See "MONITOR" on page 137.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remirror Block Size = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the IDXID="w10716"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3736"
remirror block size in 4 KB increments. (1=4 KB, 2=8 KB, 8=32 KB, etc.)Supported values: 1 to 8. Default: 1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Concurrent IDXID="w10717"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3736"
Remirror Requests = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sets the number of remirror requests per logical partition.Supported values: 2 to 32. Default: 4.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mirrored Devices Are Out of Sync Message Frequency = timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10718"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3736"
Sets the frequency (in minutes) for checking out-of-sync devices.Supported values:5 to 9999 minutes. Default: 30 minutes.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.PAGENUM=330 ID="BP295"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM70918"Time Synchronization ParametersIDXID="w10719"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"IDXID="w10720"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4491"Time IDXID="w10721"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2797"
parameters control time synchronization, the TIMESYNC.CFG file, and time zone settings to insure that the time reported by all servers is consistent, or synchronized. (See "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Time synchronization" in Concepts.)See IDREF="FM50325"Table 2-12 for a description of time parameters.LABEL="2-12" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1" Time Synchronization ParametersID="FM50325"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC ADD Time Source = server nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10722"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Specify a server as a time source. Use EDIT, rather than this parameter, to add a server to the time source list in the TIMESYNC.CFG fileIDXID="w10723"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4503"
.Maximum: 48 characters.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Configuration File = pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10724"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Specify theIDXID="w10725"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4503"
 path where the TIMESYNC.CFG configuration file is located.Maximum: 255 characters.Example: SET TIMESYNC CONFIGURATION FILE = SYS:SYSTEM\TIMESYNC.CFGCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Configured Sources = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10726"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4488"
Specify what time sources the server listens to.IDXID="w10727"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"Supported values:ON = The server ignores SAP time sources and relies on time sources custom-configured with the TIMESYNC Time Source parameter.OFF = The server listens to any advertising time source.Default: OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Directory Tree Mode = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control the use of IDXID="w10728"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3943"
SAP packets in the Directory tree. Supported values: ON = Time synchronization ignores SAP packets that don't originate from within the Directory tree the server is on.OFF = The server can receive SAP packets from any time source on the network.Default: ON.Don't set this parameter to OFF if SAP is set to ON. Using OFF could corrupt the time synchronization for this server's Directory tree.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Hardware Clock = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Controls IDXID="w10729"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
hardware clock synchronization.Supported values:ON = The Primary and Secondary time servers set the hardware clock, and the Single Reference and Reference Servers set their time from the hardware clock at the beginning of each polling interval.OFF = Use only if this server uses an external time source (such as a radio clock).Default: ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC IDXID="w10730"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3335"
Polling Count = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10731"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Specify how many time packets to exchange while polling. Increasing the number of packets adds unnecessary traffic to the network.Supported values: 1 to 1000. Default:  3.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Polling Interval = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the long polling interval, in seconds.Supported values: 10 to 2678400 seconds (31 days). Default:  600 seconds (10 minutes).All servers in the same tree must use the same setting.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC REMOVE Time Source = server nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10732"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4503"
Delete a server as a time source. IDXID="w10733"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"Use EDIT, rather than this parameter, to delete a server from the time source list in the TIMESYNC.CFG file.Maximum: 48 characters.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC IDXID="w10734"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
RESET = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reset time synchronization and clear the time source list.Use EDIT, rather than this parameter, to reset values in the TIMESYNC.CFG file and to remove the time source list from the file.Supported values: ON = Selected internal values are reset and the configured server list is cleared. Flag automatically resets to OFF.Default:  OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Restart Flag = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control IDXID="w10735"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
restarts of time synchronization.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.Set this parameter to ON only if you want to reload TIMESYNC without rebooting the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC IDXID="w10736"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4075"
Service Advertising = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control time IDXID="w10737"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4207"
source advertising.Supported values: ON = The Single Reference, Reference, and Primary time source advertise using SAP.OFF = Use only if you are using a custom-configured list of time sources.Default:  ON.Note: Secondary time services do not advertise.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Synchronization Radius = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10738"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Control the maximum time adjustment (in milliseconds) a server is allowed while still being considered synchronized. Supported values: 0 to 2147483647 milliseconds. Default:  2000.Increase this parameter to allow a wider margin of error for time synchronization between servers.Important: Lowering the synchronization radius increases the chance of servers losing synchronization due to randomness between clocks.Setting the synchronization radius for under 2000 milliseconds (2 seconds) is not recommended.Set the synchronization radius for under 2 seconds only if you are using an application that uses synchronized time stamps which do not tolerate a 2-second deviation between time sources.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Time Adjustment = [+ or -] hour:minute:second [at month/day/ year hour:minute:second AM or PM]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10739"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Specify when a time adjustment will take place. Note: You cannot use this parameter on a Secondary time server.Maximum: 99 characters. Default:  None scheduled.Use this parameter sparingly to correct network-wide time errors. Default date and time is six polling intervals or 1 hour (whichever is longer) from the current time.Misuse of this parameter can corrupt time synchronization and the order of events on your network. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Time Source: server nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a server as time source. If no server name is entered, the parameter displays the list of configured servers.Use EDIT, rather than this parameter, to IDXID="w10740"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
add a server to the configuration list in the TIMESYNC.CFG file.Maximum: 48 characters.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Type = type of time sourceCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the default time source type.Use EDIT, rather than this parameter, to specify the default time source type in the TIMESYNC.CFG file.Supported types: Reference, Primary, Secondary, Single Reference..Maximum: 23 characters. Default:  Single Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Write Parameters = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10741"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Specify whether parameters specified by the "TIMESYNC Write Value" parameter are written to the configuration file.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNC Write Value = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10742"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Control which parameters are written by "TIMESYNC Write Parameters."Supported values:1 = Write internal parameters only.2 = Write configured time sources only.3 = Write both parameters and configured time sources.Default:  3COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Time Zone = time zone stringCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specifies the IDXID="w10743"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4495"
time zone string, which indicates:MARK=BULLETThe abbreviated time zone name.The offset from Universal Time (UTC).The alternate abbreviated time zone name to be used when daylight saving time is in effect.Maximum: 80 characters.Default:  No Time Zone.This parameter causes UTC time to be recalculated from local time.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Default Time Server Type = type of time sourceCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the IDXID="w10744"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
default time synchronization server type. This parameter can be overridden by other time synchronization parameters.Supported types: Reference, Primary, Secondary, Single Reference. Maximum: 50. Default:  Secondary.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Start of IDXID="w10745"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i944"
Daylight Savings Time = date and timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the local date and time when the IDXID="w10746"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4495"
change to daylight saving time should occur.Maximum: 79 characters.Important: You must set both the start and end of daylight saving time before either date is actually scheduled.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"End of Daylight Savings Time = date and timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the local date and time when the change from daylight saving time should occur.Maximum: 79 characters.Important: You must set both the start and the end of daylight saving time before either date is actually scheduled. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Daylight Savings Time Offset = [+ or -] hour:minute:secondCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control the offset applied to time calculations when daylight saving time is in effect. Default:  +1:00:00.This parameter causes UTC time to be recalculated from local time.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Daylight Savings Time Status = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Indicate whether daylight saving time is in effect.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.If this parameter is set to ON, you should also use the Daylight Savings Time Offset parameter.Changing the daylight saving time status does not change the local time.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"New Time With Daylight Savings Time Status = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control the adjustment of local time when daylight saving time is in effect.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.ON = Adjust the local time by adding or subtracting the Daylight Saving Time Offset parameter.PAGENUM=337 ID="BP296"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM59825"NCP ParametersIDXID="w10747"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2714"With NetWare Core ProtocolTM (NCP) parameters, you canMARK=BULLETControl NCPTM packetsControl boundary checkingAssign the NCP Server Packet Signature levelsSee IDREF="FM22107"Table 2-13 for a description of NCP parameters.LABEL="2-13" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM22107" NCP Parameters COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NCP File Commit = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether applications can flush pending file writes to disk. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.If the value is set to ON then when a "File Commit NCP" is issued, a file is sent from cache to disk immediately, instead of waiting for the cache manager to send it to disk later.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display NCP Bad Component Warnings = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10748"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i721"
Control whether NCP bad component IDXID="w10749"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
alert messages are displayed.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reject NCP Packets with Bad Components = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether NCP packets that fail IDXID="w10750"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i721"
component checking are rejected.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display NCP Bad Length Warnings = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether NCP bad length alert messages are displayed.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Reject NCP Packets with Bad Lengths = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether NCP packets that fail IDXID="w10751"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i508"
boundary checking are rejected. This parameter can be used as a debugging tool.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum Outstanding NCP Searches = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of NCP directory searches that can be processed simultaneously. Supported values: 10 to 1000. Default:  51.Normally, only one NCP directory search occurs at a time.Increase the default only if you use applications that support multiple outstanding directory search operations and you have problems with corrupted or invalid directory information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NCP Packet IDXID="w10752"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3192"
Signature Option = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control the NCP packet IDXID="w10753"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4152"
signature level on the server.Supported values: 0 = Server doesn't sign packets (regardless of the client level).1 = Server signs packets only if the client requests it (client level is 2 or higher).2 = Server signs packets if the client is capable of signing (client level is 1 or higher).3 = Server signs packets and requires all clients to sign packets (or logging in will fail).Default:  1.NCP Packet Signature prevents packet forgery on servers and clients using NCP by requiring server and client to "sign" each NCP packet.Note: Because Packet Signature consumes CPU resources and slows performance on both client and server, NCP Packet Signature is optional.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enable IPX IDXID="w10754"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i626"
Checksums = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the enabling of IDXID="w10755"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1949"
IPX checksums.Supported values:0 = For no checksums.1 = To checksum if enabled at the client.2 = To require checksums.Default:  1.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow Change to Client Rights = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether a job server can assume the rights of a client for NCP packet signatures.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.Note: Some job servers and third-party applications can't function without changing to client rights. Using OFF may prevent some job servers from getting access to the files they need, but it prevents the forging of a packet through the job or print server.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow IDXID="w10756"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2066"
LIP = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set Large Internet Packet (LIP) support.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.PAGENUM=341 ID="BP297"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM48390"Miscellaneous ParametersIDXID="w10757"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"These parameters include various alert settings, as well as other miscellaneous parameters.See the parameter descriptions in IDREF="FM91751"Table 2-14..LABEL="2-14" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM91751"Miscellaneous Parameters COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Sound IDXID="w10758"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
Bell for Alerts = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether a bell sounds when an alert message appears on the console.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace IDXID="w10759"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3573"
Console IDXID="w10760"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2790"
Prompt with Server Name = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether the console prompt is replaced with the NetWare server name.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10761"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
Alert Message Nodes = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of alert message nodes that have been previously allocated.Supported values: 10 to 256. Default:  20.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Worker IDXID="w10762"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4477"
Thread Execute In a Row Count = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of times the scheduler consecutively dispatches new work before allowing other threads to run.Supported values: 1 to 20. Default:  10.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Halt System on IDXID="w10763"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1894"
Invalid Parameters = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to stop the system when invalid parameters are detected.Supported values:ON = You want the system to halt when an invalid parameter or condition is detected.OFF = You want the system to display an alert and continue running when an invalid parameter or condition is detected.Default:  OFF.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Upgrade Low Priority Threads = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether IDXID="w10764"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4477"
low-priority threads are scheduled at regular priority. Some modules can freeze up low-priority threads, causing file compression to shut down and other problems.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display Relinquish Control Alerts = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10765"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
Control whether messages about IDXID="w10766"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i864"
CPU control are sent to the server console. This parameter can be used as a debugging tool.Supported values:ON = Use if you're writing your own loadable modules. OFF = Use if you're not writing your own loadable modules.Default:  OFF.If a module uses the processor for more than 0.4 second without relinquishing control to other processes, the following types of messages appear:<process name> Process did not relinquish control frequently.Module: <module name> Code offset in module: <memory address> This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display Incomplete IPX Packet Alerts = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether IDXID="w10767"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
alert messages are displayed when IPX receives incomplete packets. This parameter can be used as a debugging tool.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display Old IDXID="w10768"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i176"
API Names = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control messages about NetWare 3 API calls. This parameter can be used as a debugging tool.Supported values: ON = Use if you write your own modules and you are upgrading NetWare 3.0 modules to modules using newer APIs.OFF = Use if you aren't upgrading modules.Default:  OFFThe following types of messages appear when a module is loaded that uses the old APIs:Module is using old API: SetInterruptVector Module is using old API: ReturnPermanentMemoryModule is using old API: AllocateReturnablePermMemory The old APIs work, but more slowly than the new APIs. If you receive these messages, contact the vender of the module.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Developer IDXID="w10769"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1020"
Option = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control whether options associated with a developer environment are enabled.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display IDXID="w10770"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
Spurious Interrupt Alerts = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control alert messages about spurious interrupts. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.A spurious interrupt occurs when hardware in the server creates an interrupt that is defined and reserved for another device.Spurious interrupts generate the following message: Spurious hardware interrupt <number> detected.This message indicates a serious error in the hardware.If your server console displays this message, remove all add-on boards and run SERVER.If the message doesn't appear, add the boards one at a time to determine the hardware creating the spurious interrupt. Then contact the vendor. Set the parameter to OFF while you are waiting for a resolution.This parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file, if desired.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display IDXID="w10771"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i149"
Lost Interrupt Alerts = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control alert messages about lost interrupts. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.A lost interrupt occurs when a driver or board requests a service with an interrupt call and then drops the request before the CPU can respond.Lost interrupts generate the following message: Interrupt controller detected a lost hardware interrupt. This message indicates a hardware or driver problem that could degrade performance.Unload all drivers and then reload them one at a time to determine which driver has a problem. Then contact the vender of the driver. Set the parameter to OFF while you are waiting for a resolution.You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Pseudo Preemption Count = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of times threads are allowed to make file read or write system calls before a relinquish is forced.Supported values: 1 to 4294967295. Default:  10.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Global Pseudo Preemption = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether or not all threads use IDXID="w10772"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4477"
pseudo preemption.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFFCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10773"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2772"
Service IDXID="w10774"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4078"
Processes = number COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of service processes that the operating system can create. (View the number of service processes in MONITOR.)Supported values: 5 to 100. Default:  40.Decrease this parameter temporarily if the server is low on memory. If the server is always low on memory, add memory.Increase this parameter if the number of service processes is at the maximum. Increasing this number helps only if more than 20 requests are being delayed simultaneously for a disk I/O to be completed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"New IDXID="w10775"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4078"
Service Process Wait Time = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how long the system should wait to make an allocation when it receives a request for another service process.Supported values: 0.3 second to 20 seconds. Default:  2.2 seconds.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Automatically IDXID="w10776"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4802"
Repair Bad Volumes = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether VREPAIR runs automatically on a volume that fails to mount. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allow IDXID="w10777"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1322"
Unencrypted IDXID="w10778"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"
Passwords = value COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10779"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4639"
Control the use of unencrypted passwords. If your servers run NetWare 3.1x, use OFF.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.If your servers run versions of NetWare earlier than NetWare 3.0 and you leave the parameter set to OFF, your users might have problems logging in.If you have servers that run NetWare 2.12 and later, copy the NetWare 3.1x utilities to those servers and set this parameter to OFF. If you don't copy NetWare 3.1x utilities to NetWare 2 servers, use ON.PAGENUM=349 ID="BP298"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM51342"Error Handling ParametersIDXID="w10780"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1341"IDXID="w10781"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"
IDXID="w10782"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1339"Error handling parameters control the size of error logs and what happens when logs exceed the specified size.See IDREF="FM78919"Table 2-15 for descriptions of error handling parameters.LABEL="2-15" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM78919"Error Handling ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server Log File State = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control what happens when the SYS$LOG.ERR file is larger than the size specified by the Server Log File Overflow Size parameter.Supported values:0 = Use to leave SYS$LOG.ERR as is.1 = Use to delete SYS$LOG.ERR.2 = Use to rename SYS$ERR.LOG.Default:  1You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume Log File State = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control what happens when the VOL$LOG.ERR file is larger than the size specified by the Volume Log File Overflow Size parameter.Supported values:0 = Use to leave VOL$LOG.ERR as is.1 = Use to delete VOL$LOG.ERR.2 = Use to rename VOL$ERR.LOG.Default:  1.You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume TTS Log File State = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control what happens when the TTS$LOG.ERR file is larger than the size specified by the "Volume TTS Log File Overflow Size" parameter.Supported values:0 = Use to leave TTS$LOG.ERR as is. 1 = Use to delete TTS$LOG.ERR.2 = Use to rename TTS$ERR.LOG.Default:  1.You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server Log File Overflow Size = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum size of the SYS$LOG.ERR file before the action specified by the Server Log File State parameter occurs.Supported values: 65536 to 4294967295. Default:  4194304.You can set this parameter in STARTUP.NCF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume Log File Overflow Size = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum size of the VOL$LOG.ERR file before the action specified by the Volume Log File State parameter occurs.Supported values: 65536 to 4294967295. Default:  4194304.You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume TTS Log File Overflow Size = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum size of the TTS$LOG.ERR file before the action specified by the Volume TTS Log File State parameter occurs.Supported values: 65536 to 4294967295. Default:  4194304.You can set this parameter in the STARTUP.NCF file.PAGENUM=351 ID="BP299"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM63498"NetWare Directory Services ParametersIDXID="w10783"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2722"IDXID="w10784"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"NetWare Directory Services (NDS) parameters allow you to do the following:MARK=BULLETControl the NDS trace file.Set time intervals for maintenance processes that reclaim disk space, remove external references, and check the consistency of backlinks.Set NDS synchronization intervals and restrictions.Specify the number of NCP retries before timeout.Mark the status of other servers in the namebase as UP or DOWN.Specify bindery services contexts.See IDREF="FM70886"Table 2-16 for descriptions of NDS parameters.LABEL="2-16" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10785"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2722"ID="FM70886" NetWare Directory Services ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Trace to Screen = ON/OFFCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enable the NDS trace screen; this displays information about NDS events on the monitor.Supported values: ON, OFF.Default:  OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Trace to File = ON/OFFCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send messages about NDS events to the NDS trace file on the SYS: volume. The default file is SYSTEM\DSTRACE.DBG. Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.The file path and name can be changed with the NDS Trace Filename parameter.The file is circular; it grows to a maximum length of approximately 500 KB and then starts to overwrite itself at the beginning of the file. If this parameter is set to ON, the trace information is also scrolled on the screen.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Trace Filename = path\nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the path and name of the NDS trace file on SYS: volume.Maximum length: 255.Default:  SYSTEM\DSTRACE.DBG.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Client NCP Retries = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of NCP retries before the NDS client times out a connection.Supported values: 1 to 20. Default:  3.Lower settings are useful for smaller networks or those in which cables are disconnected frequently.Higher settings are useful for larger networks with heavy traffic. A setting of 4, 5, or 6 should be sufficient for large networks.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS External Reference Life Span = number in hoursCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of hours unused external references are allowed to exist before being removed. Supported values: 1 to 384 hours.Default:  192.External references are local IDs assigned to users when they access other servers. When users no longer have access, the external references should be removed. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Synchronization Interval = number in minutesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum elapsed time between exhaustive synchronization checks. As soon as you change this value, the system executes the synchronization check. Synchronization checks then recur at the specified interval. Supported values: 2 to 1440 minutes. Default:  30.If the system has replicas across a WAN link, this value should be set as high as 240 minutes (4 hours) to reduce WAN traffic.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Synchronization Restrictions = OFF/ON,version number listCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify which versions of NetWare Directory Services the server can synchronize with. Supported values: OFF, ON, list of version numbers . Maximum length of version number list: 132 characters. Default:  OFF.To determine what version is currently loaded on a server, type MODULES at the server prompt. The NetWare Directory Services version number is displayed under the heading "DS.NLM."If this parameter is set to OFF, the server synchronizes with all versions available. If this parameter is set to ON, the server synchronizes only with those versions specified as parameters to the ON value.Example: ON,420,421COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Servers Status = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Mark the status of all server objects in the local namebase as UP or DOWN. Supported values: UP, DOWNUse this parameter to reset the status of all the servers if the status of one server isn't accurately recognized by the system. For example, if a server is up but the system recognizes it as down, set this parameter to mark all servers as up. Subsequently, the system would reassess the status of all servers and change the status to down for those servers that were truly down.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Janitor Interval = number in minutesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the interval in minutes at which the janitor process is executed. The janitor process is executed as soon as you change this value and then recurs at the specified interval.Supported values: 1 to 10080 minutes. Default:  60.The janitor process cleans up unused records, reclaims disk space, and purges objects flagged for deletion. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Backlink Interval = number in minutesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the interval in minutes at which backlink consistency checking is performed. Backlink consistency checking is executed as soon as you change this value. It then recurs at the specified interval.Supported values: 2 to 10080 minutes. Default:  780.A backlink indicates that an object in a replica has an ID on a server where the replica doesn't exist.This process creates needed backlinks and deletes unnecessary ones.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NDS Trace File Length to Zero = ONCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Delete the contents of the trace file. This parameter does not delete the file itself. As soon as the file is cleared, the parameter resets to OFF. Supported values: ON, OFF.Default:  OFF.To use this parameter, you must also set the NDS trace to file parameter to ON, because the trace file must be open for the system to delete its contents.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery Context = context;contextCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify one or more containers to be used by NetWare Directory Services when it provides bindery services.Maximum: 256 characters. Up to 16 contexts.Multiple contexts are separated by semicolons. To set multiple contexts, you must have a replica of the container you specify in the context on the same partition.Example: SET BINDERY CONTEXT = OU=SALES_LA.OU=SALES. O=NOVELL_US;OU=ACCOUNTING.O=NOVELLThis parameter can be set in the STARTUP.NCF file.PAGENUM=356 ID="BP300"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM75725"SFT III ParametersA NetWare 4.1 SFT IIITM system provides additional SET parameters to help you test and customize your mirrored server environment.Some SET parameters affect only one engine (the MSEngine or the IOEngine). A few parameters can be set in both engines (IDREF="FM88945"see "SFT III Parameters Settable in Both Engines" on page 352).You must execute SET parameters in the correct engine. To toggle to the appropriate console display (IOEngine or MSEngine), use the IDXID="w10786"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i800"IDXID="w10787"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4121"MOREINFO="NONE" <Alt> + <Esc> keys before typing a SET command.The NetWare 4.1 SET parameters listed in previous sections can also be used with a NetWare SFT III system.Changing one SFT III SET parameter may affect other parameters. As a general rule, don't change more than one parameter at a time.RENDERAS="SECT3"MSEngine Parameters Only Settable at Startup IDXID="w10788"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"The following MSEngine SET parameters are settable IDXID="w10789"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4122"
only at startup: TYPE="VERT"Minimum Packet Receive BuffersCache Buffer SizeMaximum Subdirectory Tree DepthAuto TTS Backout FlagConcurrent Remirror RequestsTo change the default for these parameters, put the SET parameter in the IDXID="w10790"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2551"IDXID="w10791"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4122"
MSSTART.NCF file.If you change the Minimum Packet Receive Buffers parameter in the MSSTART.NCF file, you must also put the same SET parameter in the IOSTART.NCF file.Changes to the MSSTART.NCF file do not take effect until after you bring down both servers and reactivate them.PAGENUM=357 ID="BP301"RENDERAS="SECT3"IDXID="w10792"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"
IOEngine Parameters Only Settable at StartupThe following IOEngine SET parameters are settable only at startup:TYPE="VERT"Maximum Physical Receive Packet SizeMinimum Packet Receive BuffersAuto Register Memory Above 16 MegabytesTo change the default for these parameters, include the SET parameter in the IDXID="w10793"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1903"IDXID="w10794"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4122"
IOSTART.NCF file and restart that server.RENDERAS="SECT3"SFT IIIID="FM88945"Parameters Settable in Both EnginesThe following parameters can be set in either the IOEngine or the MSEngine, or both engines. In most cases, the parameter setting in the IOEngine and the MSEngine should match.TYPE="VERT"Maximum Packet Receive BuffersMinimum Packet Receive BuffersAllow Invalid PointersRead Fault NotificationRead Fault EmulationWrite Fault NotificationWrite Fault EmulationSound Bell for AlertsReplace Console Prompt With Server NameAlert Message NodesWorker Thread Execute in a Row CountHalt System on Invalid ParametersUpgrade Low Priority ThreadsDisplay Relinquish Control AlertsDisplay Incomplete IPX Packet AlertsDisplay Old API NamesPAGENUM=358 ID="BP302"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM12768"Related SFT III "Wait Time" ParametersFive SFT III SET parameters are closely related:TYPE="VERT"MSL Error Wait Time (default: 0.8 second)Secondary Take Over Wait Time (default: 1 second)IPX Internet Down Wait Time (default: 4 seconds)MSL Deadlock Wait Time (default: 5 seconds)Check LAN Extra Wait Time (default: 0 seconds + 5 seconds)Because their wait time settings affect server switchover, you should understand the interrelationships of these parameters before you change any of their default settings.MARK=BULLETOf the related wait time values, the MSL Error Wait Time should be the shortest. It should be shorter by 1 second than the Secondary Take Over Wait Time.Both the MSL Error Wait Time and the Secondary Take Over Wait Time should be shorter than the IPX Internet Down Wait Time.For hardware failures, you need to find out if the Mirrored Server LinkTM (MSL) is down (so the secondary server can shut down) before you start checking the LAN hardware. Therefore, the MSL Error Wait Time also should be shorter than the Check LAN Extra Wait Time.For software failures, you need to find out if the LAN is down before you find out if the MSL is down. Otherwise, both servers could fail at the same time. Therefore, the IPX Internet Down Wait Time should be shorter than the MSL Deadlock Wait Time.RENDERAS="SECT3"Parameter DescriptionsSFT III SET Parameters are described in the following tables:PAGENUM=359 ID="BP303"TYPE="VERT"IDREF="FM44682"Table 2-17, "MSEngine Communication Parameters (SFT III)" (page 354)IDREF="FM98094"Table 2-18, "MSEngine Miscellaneous Parameters (SFT III)" (page 354)IDREF="FM39317"Table 2-19, "IOEngine Communication Parameters (SFT III)" (page 355)IDREF="FM44791"Table 2-20, "IOEngine Memory Parameters (SFT III)" (page 356)IDREF="FM96493"Table 2-21, "IOEngine Mirrored Server Parameters (SFT III)" (page 357)IDREF="FM16732"Table 2-22, "IOEngine Mirrored Servers Error Recovery Options Parameters (SFT III)" (page 362)IDXID="w10795"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1426"IDXID="w10796"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2475"IDREF="FM48644"Table 2-23, "IOEngine Mirrored Servers Test Options Parameters (SFT III)" (page 367)IDREF="FM11741"Table 2-24, "IOEngine Error Handling Parameters (SFT III)" (page 369)IDXID="w10797"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2543"IDXID="w10798"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"LABEL="2-17" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM44682" MSEngine Communication Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Clear Extra ECB Space = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to fill the leftover space in a receive event control block (ECB) with zeroes to prevent abends caused by undersized packets. Supported values: 0 to 2. Default:  1.0 = Don't fill the leftover space in the ECB with zeroes.1 = Fill up to 64 extra bytes in the ECB with zeroes.2 = Fill the rest of the ECB with zeroes.To improve server performance, set this parameter to 0. To prevent recurring "IDXID="w10799"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2543"
MSEngine outputs different" errors, set it to 2.PAGENUM=360 ID="BP304"LABEL="2-18" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM98094"MSEngine Miscellaneous Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Notify All Users Of Mirrored Server Synchronization = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to broadcast a message to all logged-in users when the mirrored servers begin synchronizing. If the IDXID="w10800"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4121"
server has more than 64 MB of RAM, or if server synchronization takes more than 5 seconds, set this parameter to ON.Supported values: ON, OFF Default:  OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server Failure Notification Name = nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the user or group name to notify with a broadcast message in case of a server or disk IDXID="w10801"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4121"IDXID="w10802"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1426"
failure or disk-out-of-sync condition. To send the broadcast to all logged-in users, use group EVERYONE.Note: If you use an invalid user or group name, the broadcast message will fail.Supported values: any valid user or group name. Default: no group or user name.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MSEngine Use Primary Server For IDXID="w10803"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1191"IDXID="w10804"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2543"IDXID="w10805"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1526"
DOS I/O = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify which server to use for DOS input to the MSEngine. To copy data from the secondary server's DOS partition or floppy drive, set this parameter to OFF.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.LABEL="2-19" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10806"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1901"IDXID="w10807"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4095"ID="FM39317"IOEngine Communication Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Check LAN Option = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Check the functionality of the LAN boards in the server and prevent loss of service to clients by providing early warning of LAN board problems.Supported values: 0 to 2. 0 = Don't check the server LAN boards.1 = If a LAN board problem is detected, notify the server console but don't restart the primary server.2 = If the secondary server's LAN boards are more functional, restart the primary server.Default:  2.Note: The secondary server uses the same value for this parameter as the primary server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Check LAN Extra Wait Time = timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the additional time the server waits (5 seconds plus the value of this parameter) before taking the action specified in the Check LAN Option parameter. If traffic is heavy on your network, or if MAUs need more time to reset, increase this setting.Supported values: 0 seconds to 59.3 seconds. Default:  0.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use Diagnostic Responder to Validate LAN Functionality = valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to broadcast an IPX diagnostic request to verify that LAN boards are functional. If the SFT server is running standalone, or if the system isn't detecting bad boards, set this parameter to ON.Supported values: ON, OFF. If you have a router that replicates broadcast, don't set this parameter to ON or a flood of network traffic will result.If your SFT III server is the only server on the network, set this parameter to ON.Default:  OFF.PAGENUM=362 ID="BP305"LABEL="2-20" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM44791"IOEngine Memory Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Borrow Short Term Memory Ahead Amount = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the amount of memory the system keeps available for processes that temporarily need extra memory.If you get an "insufficient short-term memory" error while running a module, set this parameter to a higher value and reload the module.Supported values: 0 to 100000 bytes. Default:  32768 bytes.PAGENUM=363 ID="BP306"LABEL="2-21" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM96493"IOEngine Mirrored Server Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Secondary Take Over Wait Time= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of seconds that the secondary server waits for an IDXID="w10808"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1995"IDXID="w10809"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3192"
"I'm alive" packet from the primary server before taking over as the new primary server. (For more information, see "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41""I'm Alive" Packet" in Concepts.)Supported values: 0.5 second to 20 seconds. Default:  1 second.Set this time to be longer than the MSL Error Wait Time. (For more about related SET parameters, IDREF="FM12768"see "Related SFT III "Wait Time" Parameters" on page 353.)If your network is connected to a busy internetwork and packets take longer to travel across it, increase the value of this parameter.Important: If the message "This server should not have become the primary server because the primary server is still alive" appears, increase the Secondary Take Over Wait Time by 0.5 second or more.However, setting this parameter too high may cause workstations to time out while the servers are determining if a switchover is needed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display Mirrored Server Too Many Hops Away Message= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to display a warning message if the hops between the mirrored servers exceed the Maximum Pseudo Hop Count parameter.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.If your SFT III servers are installed on the same network segment, set this parameter to OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Maximum IDXID="w10810"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3624"
Pseudo IDXID="w10811"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1683"
Hop Count= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum number of hops that the primary server will advertise as its pseudo hop count. (For more information, see "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Pseudo hop count" in Concepts.)Supported values: 1 to 8. Default:  4.If your SFT III servers are installed on different network segments, with several hops between them, you may need to specify a higher Maximum Pseudo Hop Count. Important: Increasing the pseudo hop count reduces the number of hops available to stations on the internetwork. The total hop count (the pseudo hop count plus the actual number of hops from the router to the MSEngine) between a station and server cannot exceed 16.If the actual number of hops between mirrored servers is greater than the value specified by this parameter, the primary server advertises only the Maximum Pseudo Hop Count.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Enable Pseudo Hop Count= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the primary server advertises an artificially high hop count when it is mirrored to a secondary server on a different network segment. (For more information, see "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Pseudo hop count" in Concepts.)Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.If your SFT III servers are installed on the same network segment, set this parameter to OFF.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"New End IDXID="w10812"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4638"
Address For IDXID="w10813"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
Unclaimed Memory Block= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Define the end of the MSEngine's memory range. The IOEngine claims any memory blocks numbered after the New End Address.If your servers have unequal amounts of RAM, use this parameter to IDXID="w10814"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i157"IDXID="w10815"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2375"
align the memory of the larger-RAM server with the memory of the smaller-RAM server. (See  IDXID="w10816"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4121"
"Responding to "Secondary Server is Missing RAM" Messages" in Supervising the Network.)Note: Reducing the MSEngine's memory too much (by setting a low New End Address number) might prevent volumes from mounting.Supported values: 2097152 to 1073741824 bytes. Default:  highest memory installed in the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"New Start Address For Unclaimed Memory Block= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Define the start of the MSEngine's memory range. The IOEngine claims any memory blocks that fall before the New Start Address.Supported values: 2097152 to 1073741824 bytes. Default:  2097152 bytes.If the IOEngine is frequently borrowing memory from the MSEngine, set the New Start Address to a higher number to give the IOEngine more memory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MSL Error Wait Time= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of seconds that the 
MSL driver waits for an acknowledgment of a sent packet before signaling that the other server or the MSL has failed.Supported values: 0.2 second to 4.4 seconds. Default:  0.8 second.If your servers are very busy (CPU utilization over 60%), use this parameter to give them more time to communicate. The value of this parameter should be less than the Secondary Take Over Wait Time parameter.Note: Changing the default on this parameter makes it take longer to determine that the other server has failed.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Comprehensive MSEngine Synchronization Check= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to do a comprehensive verification that both IDXID="w10817"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2543"
MSEngine outputs are the same.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.Note: The OFF setting provides a faster, simpler check of MSEngine outputs. Though it reduces IDXID="w10818"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4121"
synchronization time, the OFF setting may increase the risk of undetected synchronization errors.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPX Internet Down Wait Time= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many seconds the server waits before concluding that the IPX internetwork is not delivering packets.Supported values: 0.5 second to 59.3 seconds. Default:  4 seconds.If you have a busy network or hardware reliability problems, use this parameter to allow more time for the server to get IPX packets.The value of this parameter should be more than the Secondary Take Over Wait Time, but less than the MSL Deadlock Wait Time.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display IPX Route to Other Server= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to display the IPX route to the other server. This parameter is useful for IDXID="w10819"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4577"
troubleshooting internetwork problems.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  OFF.The IPX route can show how efficient the network routing is by displaying IDXID="w10820"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2949"
the node numbers, the addresses, and the number of hops to the other server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10821"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2472"
MSL Deadlock Wait Time= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many seconds the server waits before concluding that the MSL driver is deadlocked (receive packets are being held off indefinitely).Supported values: 1 second to 59.3 seconds. Default:  5 seconds.If you have very busy servers, use this parameter to allow more time for the two servers to communicate. This setting times 4 is the time-out value that determines when the server exercises the MSL Send Blocked Recovery Option.Note: If you increase the IPX Internet Down Wait Time, you must also increase the MSL Deadlock Wait Time. Otherwise, if the MSL is deadlocked, the IPX connection may time out before the deadlock is detected. It is best if the MSL Deadlock Wait Time is at least one second longer than the IPX Internet Down Wait Time.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Extra MSL Checking= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to do extra checking of MSL messages to ensure data integrity.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.Note: Setting this parameter to OFF may improve performance, but it increases the risk of undetected MSL errors.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10822"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1901"
IOEngine Error Log Use DOS= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to log system alerts to the default DOS drive if volume SYS: is not mounted.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.When the servers are resynchronized, the DOS error log is appended to the IDXID="w10823"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1904"
IO$LOG.ERR file on volume SYS:.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Always Down Server When IDXID="w10824"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3359"
Power Fails= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether the MSEngine is shut down when a power failure is detected.Supported parameters: ON, OFF.Default: ON.Set this parameter to OFF to allow for continued service when both SFT III servers are on separate 
UPS devices.If the servers are fully synchronized and mirrored, and this parameter is set to OFF, the IDXID="w10825"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4646"
UPS halts only the IOEngine (rather than shutting down the MSEngine) when power fails.If only one of your SFT III servers has a UPS installed, leave this parameter set to ON.PAGENUM=368 ID="BP307"ID="FM16732"Don't change the settings for the parameters in IDREF="FM16732"Table 2-22PAGENUM=369 unless you are running SFT III in a testing environment.LABEL="2-22" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10826"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1343"IDXID="w10827"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1426"IDXID="w10828"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3712" IOEngine Mirrored Servers Error Recovery Options Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Secondary Server MSL Send Blocked Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the secondary server if it detects that the MSL driver is not sending data to the other server at the correct rate. Supported options: 0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary server.Default:  2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Primary Server MSL Send Blocked Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the primary server if it detects that the MSL driver is not sending data to the other server at the correct rate.Supported options: 0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary server.Default:  2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MSEngine IDXID="w10829"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i40"
Abend And Processor Exception Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the server that detects MSEngine software abends and MSEngine hardware exceptions.Supported options:0 = Halt the server.1 = Restart the server.Default:  1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Always Halt Secondary If Sync Error= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to halt the secondary server every time an error is detected during mirrored server synchronization.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10830"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1901"
IOEngine Abend And Processor Exception Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the server that detects IOEngine software abends and IOEngine hardware exceptions.Supported options: 0 = Halt the server.1 = Restart the server.Default:  1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Machine Check Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the server that detects IDXID="w10831"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1638"
hardware errors (other than memory parity errors).Supported options:0 = Halt the server.1 = Restart the server.Default:  1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Memory Parity Error IDXID="w10832"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3220"
Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the server that detects memory parity errors.Supported options: 0 = Halt the server.1 = Restart the server.Default:  1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Secondary Server IDXID="w10833"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2472"
MSL Hardware Failure Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the secondary server detecting an MSL hardware failure.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary server using the same MSL.3 = Restart the secondary server using the alternate MSL.Default:  2.The secondary server performs the set option unless the primary server has failed. If the primary server has failed, the secondary server becomes the new primary server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Primary Server MSL Hardware Failure Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the primary server detecting an MSL hardware failure.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary server using the same MSL.3 = Restart the secondary server using the alternate MSL.Default:  2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MSEngine Outputs Different Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the secondary server detecting that its IDXID="w10834"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2543"
MSEngine outputs are different from the primary server's MSEngine outputs.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary serverDefault:  0.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Secondary Server MSL Consistency Error Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the secondary server detecting communications consistency errors, such as checksum errors, invalid sequence number, or invalid packet type.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary server using the same MSL.3 = Restart the secondary server using the alternate MSL.Default:  2.The secondary server performs the set option unless the primary server has failed. If the primary server has failed, the secondary server becomes the new primary server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Primary Server MSL Consistency Error Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the primary server detecting communications consistency errors, such as checksum errors, invalid sequence number, or invalid packet type.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary server using the same MSL.3 = Restart the secondary server using the alternate MSL.Default:  2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Secondary Server MSL Deadlock Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the secondary server detecting an MSL communications delivery deadlock.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary serverDefault:  2.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Primary Server MSL Deadlock Recovery Option= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the recovery strategy for the primary server IDXID="w10835"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i951"IDXID="w10836"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2472"
detecting an MSL communications delivery deadlock.Supported options:0 = Halt the secondary server.1 = Halt the primary and secondary servers.2 = Restart the secondary serverDefault:  2.PAGENUM=374 ID="BP308"ID="FM48644"Don't change the settings for the parameters in IDREF="FM48644"Table 2-23 unless you are running SFT III in a IDXID="w10837"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4121"
testing environment.LABEL="2-23" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10838"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1426"IDXID="w10839"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2475"IOEngine Mirrored Servers Test Options Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="12*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="22*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Test IDXID="w10840"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4469"
Mode= optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Test IDXID="w10841"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4124"
server switchover and recovery with four failure scenarios.Supported options: 0 = Don't initiate Test Mode.1 = Enable a simple halt/restart server test.2 = Generate MSL errors.3 = Generate system errors.4 = Generate errors of types 1, 2, and 3.Default:  0.Note: When you change the Test Mode setting back to 0, all settings for Mirrored Servers Error Recovery Options return to their defaultsSuggestion: Because Test Mode options apply only to the primary server, you can set different test options in each server's IDXID="w10842"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1903"
IOSTART.NCF file. For best performance, however, set the same test options in each server's IOSTART.NCF file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Stop On Server Test Unexpected Error= valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify whether to stop both servers if an unexpected error (not generated by the Test Mode) occurs.Supported values: ON, OFF. Default:  ON.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restart Minimum IDXID="w10843"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4124"
Delay Amount= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many seconds the server waits before executing a restart in Test Mode.Supported times: 0 seconds to 23 hours 43 minutes 40.1 seconds. Default:  10 seconds.This setting is added to the random number generated by the Restart Maximum Random Delay Amount parameter to determine the actual delay amount.If you notice several communications deadlocks or initialization failures while running your servers in Test Mode, use this parameter to allow more time for the server to finish 
switchover before restarting.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server Test Minimum IDXID="w10844"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i973"
Delay Amount= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify how many seconds the server waits before initiating the Test Mode option.Supported times: 0 seconds to 23 hours 43 minutes 40.1 seconds. Default:  3 minutes.This setting is added to the random number generated by the Server Test Maximum Random Delay Amount parameter to determine the actual delay amount.Use this parameter to reduce the number of workstation pauses caused by frequent server resynchronization while running in Server Test Mode.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Restart Maximum Random Delay Amount= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum random number that the server generates to add to the Restart Minimum Delay Amount. The resulting sum is the number of seconds the server waits before executing a restart in Test Mode.Supported times: 0 seconds to 59 minutes 19.2 seconds. Default:  0 seconds.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Server Test Maximum Random IDXID="w10845"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i973"
Delay Amount= timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum random number that the server generates to add to the Server Test Minimum Delay Amount. The resulting sum is the number of seconds the server waits before initiating the Test Mode option.Supported times: 0 seconds to 59 minutes 19.2 seconds. Default:  19.8 seconds.PAGENUM=376 ID="BP309"LABEL="2-24" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM11741"IOEngine Error Handling Parameters (SFT III)COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Status Dump File State= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the action to take if the IDXID="w10846"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2554"
MSSTATUS.DMP file size exceeds the size limit.Supported values:0 = Take no action if the file grows too large.1 = Delete the log file if it grows too large.2 = Rename the log file if it grows too large.Default:  1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IOEngine Error Log File State= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the action to take if the IDXID="w10847"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1904"
IO$LOG.ERR file size exceeds the size limit.Supported values:0 = Take no action if the file grows too large.1 = Delete the log file if it grows too large.2 = Rename the log file if it grows too large.Default:  1.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Status Dump File Overflow Size= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the size limit for the MSSTATUS.DMP file.Supported values: 65536 to 4294967295 bytes. Default:  4194304 bytes.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IOEngine Error Log File Overflow Size= numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the size limit for the IO$LOG.ERR file.Supported values: 65536 to 4294967295 bytes. Default:  4194304 bytes.PAGENUM=378 ID="BP310"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM67727"ID="FM20334"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using SERVMAN to change set parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM67672""SERVMAN" (page 286)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Controlling file compressionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using SET to Control File Compression" in Chapter7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Improving server performanceCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Improving Server Performance" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Editing .NCF filesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Time synchronization and the TIMESYNC.CFG fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=379 ID="BP311"ID="FM86292"SET TIMEIDXID="w10848"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4097"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to set the IDXID="w10849"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i939"
date and IDXID="w10850"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4478"
time kept by the IDXID="w10851"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"IDXID="w10852"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2789"
server. Setting the time incorrectly can adversely affect the performance of NetWare Directory Services (NDS). Because time synchronization between servers is critical to NDS, make sure you understand time synchronization before you change the time or time zone on a server. (For more information, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.)RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME mo/day/yr hr:min:secCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"mo/day/yr COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the date.Use any of these formats for the date:9/28/93September 28, 199328 September 1993COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"hr:min:sec COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the time.Enter the time in either standard or 24-hour- clock format:1:15:32 p.m. (standard format)13:15:32 (24-hour-clock format) Separate hours, minutes, and seconds with colons. You can omit the minute and second entries, but you must include the colon after the hour.Specify a.m. or p.m. (for example, 7:14:32 AM). If you don't specify a.m. or p.m., NetWare 4.1 assumes you are entering the time in 24-hour- clock format. For example, if you enter 1:00, the time is set to 1:00 a.m. If you enter 13:00, the time is set to 1:00 p.m.PAGENUM=380 ID="BP312"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SET TIMEMARK=BULLETSET TIME is most appropriately used on a Reference or Single Reference time server. These types of time servers don't change their time to converge with other servers, but supply the time for other servers.If you change the time on a Primary, Reference, or Single Reference time server, you will affect the time on all other servers that refer to that time server. (They will converge to the new time.) You can set both the date and the time in the same command or separately. You can enter either the date or the time first. If you replace only one variable, the other remains unaffected.The time display is formatted according to the server language standards. (For example, in the U.S. the format is 1:15:32 PM.)PAGENUM=381 ID="BP313"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesTo set the date and time on your server to December 19, 1994 at 2:15 PM, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME 12/19/94 2:15:00 PMorFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME DECEMBER 19, 1994 14:15:00RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Displaying the server's timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM81404""TIME" (page 395)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting the time zoneCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM70817""SET TIME ZONE" (page 374)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network time synchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=382 ID="BP314"ID="FM70817"SET TIME ZONEIDXID="w10853"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4099"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10854"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4495"
configure IDXID="w10855"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i643"
time zone information.Because time synchronization between servers is critical to NetWare Directory Services, make sure you understand time synchronization before you change the time or time zone on a server. (For more information, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME ZONE zone [+|-] hr:min:sec [daylight]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display time zone setting.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"zone COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a standard abbreviation for the name of the time zone. Examples:EST (Eastern Standard Time)CST (Central Standard Time)MST (Mountain Standard Time)PST (Pacific Standard Time)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[+ | - ] COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of hours east or west of the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) meridian. Note: UTC has been known historically as Greenwich Mean Time or GMT. Use + (plus) to set time zones west of UTC.Use - (minus) to set time zones east of UTC. (If you don't enter this parameter, the default is +.)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"hr:min:secCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the time difference between UTC and the local time zone. You can specify this difference simply in hours. Or, for extreme accuracy, specify hours, minutes and seconds.Examples:EST is 5 hours west of UTC; CST is 6 hours west; MST is 7 hours west; PST is 8 hours west.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"daylightCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the standard abbreviation for the time zone during Daylight Saving Time (DST).Don't enter this abbreviation if you don't observe DST. Examples:EDT (Eastern Daylight Time)CDT (Central Daylight Time)MDT (Mountain Daylight Time)PDT (Pacific Daylight Time)Important: This parameter does not turn on Daylight Saving Time. You turn on Daylight Saving Time (and configure related parameters) by using the SET command.PAGENUM=383 ID="BP315"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SET TIME ZONEMARK=BULLETTime zone information is critical to time synchronization for NetWare Directory Services. Additionally, time zone information is provided to modules that make calls to CLIB. You specify the abbreviation the operating system uses for daylightsaving time with the SET TIME ZONE daylight parameter. You turn on daylight saving time and set the start and end date with the SET command.PAGENUM=384 ID="BP316"If you don't set the time zone, there are no standard abbreviations and the time zone offset is zero. RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo display the time zone setting, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME ZONETo set the time zone to mountain standard time, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME ZONE MST7 (This example applies to an area that doesn't observe daylight saving time.)To set the time zone to Pacific standard time and set the abbreviation for daylight saving time, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME ZONE PST8PDT (When daylight saving time is active, PST will be known as PDT.)To set the time zone for Germany (Mid-European Time), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SET TIME ZONE MET-1The -1 sets the time zone 1 hour ahead of UTC, since Germany is 1 hour east of the UTC meridian.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Displaying the server's timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM81404""TIME" (page 395)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting the server's timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM86292""SET TIME" (page 371)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Turning on daylight saving time and setting related parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM88068""SET" (page 291)"SET" (page 291)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network time synchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=386 ID="BP317"IDXID="w10856"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3241"ID="FM76213"SETPASSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10857"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4102"
Use at a workstation to change a user's password.RENDERAS="SECT2"Syntax FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETPASS [servername/] [username] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Change your password on the network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"servername/COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace with the name of the server where you want to change the user's password.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"usernameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace with the name of the user whose password you want to change.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo change your password on the network, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETPASSTo change user BARNEY's password (if you have rights), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETPASS BARNEY
PAGENUM=387 ID="BP318"To change user JAY's password on server HACKER, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETPASS HACKER/JAYTo change your password on server FRIENDLY, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETPASS FRIENDLY/RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=388 ID="BP319"IDXID="w10858"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4546"IDXID="w10859"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3704"
ID="FM14123"SETTTSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10860"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4109"
Use at a workstation toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10861"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2205"
Set the logical record locks for the Transaction Tracking System (TTS)IDXID="w10862"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3310"
Set the physical record locks for TTSView the logical and physical locks for TTSRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETTTS [logical level [physical level] [/options...]]  [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"logical levelCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the logical number value you want to set.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"physical levelCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the physical number value you want to set.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM99533"See "SETTTS Options" on page 380.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files needed to run the utility.PAGENUM=389 ID="BP320"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SETTTSMARK=BULLETWhen you log out from or turn off your workstation, the settings are reset to 0.TTS values are 0 to 254. The logical level and physical level values indicate how many record locks TTS will ignore before tracking the transaction. Setting the to 1 means that TTS tracks each transaction; setting it to 254 means that TTS ignores 253 record locks before it tracks.A value of 255 or /D disables a level.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM99533"SETTTS OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through the report of accounting charges.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set the logical and physical settings to 0.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/DCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Disable the logical and physical settings.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo see the logical and physical settings, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETTTSTo reset both logical and physical settings to the default (0), typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETTTS /NTo disable both logical and physical settings, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETTTS /D
PAGENUM=390 ID="BP321"To disable the logical level and set the physical level to 4, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SETTTS /D 4RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Transaction trackingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Transaction Tracking System" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=391 ID="BP322"ID="FM71840"IDXID="w10863"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4224"
SPEEDRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to display the IDXID="w10864"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4225"
speed at which the IDXID="w10865"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i864"
processor is running.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SPEEDRENDERAS="SECT2"About Processor SpeedMARK=BULLETProcessor speed rating is determined byMARK=BULLETCPU clock speed (33 MHz, 50 MHz, 66 MHz, or 90 MHz)CPU type (80386, 80486, Pentium, etc.)Number of memory wait states (0, 1, 2, etc.)If your computer has a slower rating than you expected, use SPEED to check the CPU speed rating.An 80386 CPU running at 33 MHz should get a rating of about 320. An 80486 CPU running at 50 MHz should get a rating of about 1370. A Pentium CPU running at 66 MHz should get a rating of about 3660.Some computers have an Auto or Common CPU speed mode that can reduce the clock speed to as little as 6 MHz. For NetWare 4 operation, the CPU should be set to the highest speed. If your machine has a slower rating than expected, check the CPU speed setting. See your computer's documentation for instructions on how to set the CPU speed.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=392 ID="BP323"ID="FM94272"IDXID="w10866"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4243"
SPXCONFGRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10867"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i759"
configure certain IDXID="w10868"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4234"
SPXTM parameters. These parameters can also be configured from the INETCFG utility. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD SPXCONFG [option[=value]] COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(no parameter)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Load SPXCONFG and display configuration menu.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM95176"See "SPXCONFG Options" on page 384.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"valueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a numerical value for an option.For information on setting these values, IDREF="FM15428"see "INETCFG" on page 93 and 
BOOK="ipxrtenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare IPX Reference.PAGENUM=393 ID="BP324"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM95176"COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A=COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify SPX Watchdog Abort timeout (in ticks).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"V=COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify SPX Watchdog Verify timeout (in ticks).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"W=COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify SPX Ack Wait timeout (in ticks).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"R=COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify SPX Default Retry count.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"S=COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify maximum concurrent SPX sessions.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Q=1COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify quiet mode (suppresses display of changed settings).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display SPXCONFG help screen.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"I=COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify IPX maximum socket table size.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SPXCONFGMARK=BULLETYou can use SPXCONFG in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file, as a console command, as a menu utility, or as a configuration file that is invoked by INETCFG. If you don't specify a parameter, the following menu appears: FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SPX Configuration Control Program 
1. SPX Watchdog Abort timeout 540 
2. SPX Watchdog Verify timeout 54 
3. SPX Ack wait timeout 108 
4. SPX Default Retry count 10 
5. Maximum concurrent SPX sessions 2048 
6. IPX maximum socket table size 1200 You can then select parameters to change.SPXCONFG changes the configuration of SPX as well as the STREAMS-based SPXS (SPXII).PAGENUM=394 ID="BP325"If you enabled TCP/IP or AppleTalk on the server, you can use either INETCFG or SPXCONFG to set SPX parameters. When you set the parameters using INETCFG, a load line for SPXCONFG is automatically added to the NETINFO.CFG file so it runs each time you bring up the server. If you have only IPX/SPX enabled on the server (and not TCP/IP or AppleTalk) and you want to use the SPXCONFG parameters each time you boot the server, place the following command in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]SPXCONFG [option[=value]] RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesTo set SPX options to 1000 ticks for the SPX Watchdog Abort timeout and suppress the display of changed settings, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD SPXCONFG A=1000 Q=1RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting parameters in an .NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting SPX parameters with INETCFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" (page 93).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=395 ID="BP326"ID="FM48088"IDXID="w10869"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4244"
SPXSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to provide IDXID="w10870"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4303"
STREAMS-based IDXID="w10871"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4234"
SPX protocol services.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]SPXS [LDFILE = [path]filename[ext]]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to SPXS if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LDFILE = filename [ext]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Load the data file that contains the SPX timer defaults and physical packet size tables. If you don't specify a filename, SPXS sets the parameters defined in the IPXSPX.CFG file.If you don't specify a file extension, the default is .CFG. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using SPXSMARK=BULLETWhen you load SPXS, the parameters in the IPXSPX.CFG file are set, unless you specify an alternate configuration filename. The IPXSPX.CFG file is modified from the INETCFG utility when you set SPX/IPX parameters. You can create multiple configuration files in addition to IPXSPX.CFG. Use this feature if you frequently alternate between two or more IPX/SPX configurations.To create multiple configuration files, copy the IPXSPX.CFG file to a new filename (IPXSPX2.CFG, for example). Then you can change the IPXSPX.CFG file (by using INETCFG) and still preserve the original configuration in the IPXSPX2.CFG file.PAGENUM=396 ID="BP327"To load a configuration file other than the default IPXSPX.CFG file, use the LDFILE option.For example, if you have a second configuration file called IPXSPX2.CFG, you can load that configuration by typingFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD SPXS LDFILE = IPXSPX2When you load SPXS, STREAMS is autoloaded.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting SPX parameters using SPXCONFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM94272""SPXCONFG" (page 383).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting parameters in an .NCF fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Creating or Editing a Server Batch (.NCF) File" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting SPX parameters using INETCFGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM15428""INETCFG" (page 93).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=397 ID="BP328"ID="FM39521"IDXID="w10872"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4305"
STREAMSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console with an loadable module that requires CLIB or uses IDXID="w10873"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4303"
STREAMS-based protocol services. Normally, you won't need to load STREAMS because it is autoloaded by CLIB and other modules when needed. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]STREAMS [MAX MESSAGE SIZE = n]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to STREAMS if you moved it from the default directory. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MAX MESSAGE SIZE = nCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the maximum message size in bytes. This value can be between 4,096 and 65,535 bytes. The default is 8,192 bytes.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using STREAMSMARK=BULLETSTREAMS will not load unless CLIB is loaded. When CLIB loads, it autoloads STREAMS.Increasing maximum message size can improve the performance of some protocol stacks. If STREAMS is autoloaded, the default value for MAX MESSAGE SIZE is used. To change this size, unload STREAMS and load again, specifying a new MAX MESSAGE SIZE value.Both SPX II and AppleTalk Filing Protocol (AFP) can use a larger maximum message size.PAGENUM=398 ID="BP329"SPX II is an improved version of SPX that yields better performance with some applications. STREAMS uses SPX II. Don't set maximum message size higher than 16K. The performance benefit gained doesn't compensate for the extra server memory consumed by the protocol stacks. RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=399 ID="BP330"IDXID="w10874"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4837"IDXID="w10875"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4478"IDXID="w10876"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4358"ID="FM31567"SYSTIMERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10877"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4393"
Use at a workstation to IDXID="w10878"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2797"
synchronize the date and time set on your station with those of the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SYSTIME [server name] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"server nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the server that you want to synchronize your workstation with.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo synchronize your workstation's date and time with those of the default server, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SYSTIMETo synchronize your workstation's date and time with those of server SCOTTY, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SYSTIME SCOTTYTo synchronize your workstation's date and time with those of server FISHBONE in the context NOVELL.US, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"SYSTIME .FISHBONE.NOVELL.US
PAGENUM=400 ID="BP331"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SynchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Time synchronization" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=401 ID="BP332"ID="FM42989"TCPCONRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETMonitor activity in the TCP/IP network segments of your internetworkView configuration and statistics information about the following TCP/IP protocols: IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP, OSPF, and EGPView IP routes known to a TCP/IP nodeView network interfaces supported by a TCP/IP nodeAccess the trap log maintained by SNMPLOG (local systems only)Use Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) over TCP/IP or IPX to access TCP/IP information in any remote protocol stack supporting the TCP/IP Management Information Base (MIB)RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD TCPCONRENDERAS="SECT2"Using TCPCONMARK=BULLETBy default, TCPCON monitors and gathers information from the local NetWare TCP/IP node. You can, however, access another TCP/IP node on your internetwork if you know the symbolic hostname or host IP address of that node.When you load TCPCON, the TCPCON main screen appears:PAGENUM=402 ID="BP333"FILEREF="n41ut72a.tif"MARK=BULLETThe top of the main screen displays a summary of statistics for the selected host, as follows:COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Field COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Explanation VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HostCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Symbolic host name or IP address of the selected TCP/IP host (or server name if accessing a remote node using IPX) being queried. This is the host specified in "SNMP Access Configuration" in the "Available Options" menu. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Uptime COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Amount of time that has elapsed since the selected host was last initialized. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"System COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Brief description of the selected host. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP Received COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of IP datagrams received from all interfaces, including those received in error. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP Sent COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of datagrams sent to IP for transmission. This number does not include datagrams forwarded by this host. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP Forwarded COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of IP packets forwarded from one node to another. This field displays the value "Disabled" if this host is not configured to be an IP router. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TCP Received COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of TCP segments received, including those received in error. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TCP Sent COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of TCP segments sent, excluding those containing retransmitted data. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TCP Connections COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Number of currently established TCP connections. PAGENUM=403 ID="BP334"The "Available Options" menu on the main screen allows access to additional features of TCPCON, as follows::COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Option COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SNMP Access ConfigurationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View and modify TCPCON options. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Protocol InformationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View protocol information for the selected host. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP Routing TableCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View IP routers known to the selected host. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View TCP/IP statistics. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Interfaces COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the network interfaces supported by the selected host.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Display Local TrapsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the local SNMP trap log maintained by SNMPLOG.NLM. RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TCP/IP and related protocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IP routingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=404 ID="BP335"TIMEID="FM81404"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to displayMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10879"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i939"
Date and IDXID="w10880"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4478"
time kept by the NetWare server's clockIDXID="w10881"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i944"
Daylight-saving-time statusIDXID="w10882"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
Time IDXID="w10883"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4478"
synchronization informationRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"TIMERENDERAS="SECT2"Using TIMEMARK=BULLETWhen you execute TIME, information similar to the following appears on the console screen:The output is formatted according to your locale configuration.LABEL="2-21" FLOAT="0"TIME OutputFILEREF="n40ut45a.tif"To reset the server's date or time, use SET TIME.PAGENUM=405 ID="BP336"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting the server's timeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM86292""SET TIME" (page 371)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting the time zoneCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM70817""SET TIME ZONE" (page 374)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network time synchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=406 ID="BP337"ID="FM66559"IDXID="w10884"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4501"
TIMESYNCRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10885"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4358"
monitor the internal time on a server to ensure that the time reported by all servers across the network is consistent, or IDXID="w10886"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4478"
synchronized.TIMESYNC autoloads when the server boots. Under very few circumstances will you ever load or unload TIMESYNC. You may, however, want to load TIMESYNC to use an alternate configuration (.CFG) file. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]TIMESYNCCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to TIMESYNC.NLM if you moved it from the default directory. You can set TIMESYNC parameters in the configuration file (TIMESYNC.CFG) or with the SET and SERVMAN utilities).RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Setting time synchronization parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM70918""Time Synchronization Parameters" (page 326) in "SET"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Managing network time synchronizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Managing Network Time Synchronization" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the NetworkRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=407 ID="BP338"ID="FM67556"IDXID="w10887"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4508"
TLIRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to provide Transport Level Interface (TLI) communication services.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]TLICOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to TLI.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using TLIMARK=BULLETTo use TLI, you must have one or more protocol service modules loaded, such as SPXS or IPXS.TLI also requires STREAMS and CLIB and autoloads them if you haven't. RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=408 ID="BP339"ID="FM96946"IDXID="w10888"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4535"
TPINGRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request packet to an IP node on your internetwork.TPING is a command line utility that determines whether an IP target node on your internetwork is reachable.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD TPING host [packet size [retry count]]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"host COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the symbolic host name or IP address of a TCP/IP system on the network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"packet size COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the size, in bytes, of the ICMP packet.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"retry count COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of times you want to resend an ICMP packet to the host system if a reply is not received (default = 5).RENDERAS="SECT2"Using TPINGMARK=BULLETTPING sends an ICMP echo request packet to the IP target node. If the target node receives the request packet, it sends back a reply packet. If TPING doesn't receive a reply, it resends the request packet the specified number of times.When TPING receives a reply, it stops sending requests and displays a message indicating that the target node is reachable. (If it doesn't receive a reply, TPING also notifies you.)PAGENUM=409 ID="BP340"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TCP/IP and related protocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BOOK="tcpipenu" COLLECTION="nw41"NetWare TCP/IP Reference.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=410 ID="BP341"ID="FM71704"IDXID="w10889"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4537"
TRACK OFFRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to prevent the server from displaying the "IDXID="w10890"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3869"
RIP Tracking Screen." This screen displays Router Information Protocol (RIP) traffic on the server. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"TRACK OFFRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RIP Tracking ScreenCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM94114""TRACK ON" (page 402).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=411 ID="BP342"TRACK ONID="FM94114"IDXID="w10891"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4539"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to view the "RIP Tracking Screen" and make it the active screen. This screen displays Router Information Protocol (RIP) traffic on the server. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"TRACK ONRENDERAS="SECT2"Using TRACK ONMARK=BULLETTRACK ON signals the router to display all server and network routing (RIP) packets that are received or sent.TRACK ON displays information about servers, networks, and connection requests. This information is formatted according to whether the NetWare server is MARK=BULLETReceiving incoming information (IN)Broadcasting outgoing information (OUT)Receiving a connection requestRENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM41971"Incoming IDXID="w10892"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3893"
Information Incoming information looks similar to the following:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"IN [00D0C200:00001B026C09] 10:53:01am 010123C5 11/22 5300DEEF 3/4 00001EF0 5/365 FADE2401 12/98 00001EEE 2/3 C9008617 5/11The packet is incoming from network address 00D0C200 and from the server at node address 0001B026C09. The packet was sent at 10:53 am.PAGENUM=412 ID="BP343"The columns of data that follow the line labeled "IN" are network numbers that the sending server knows about. For example:MARK=BULLET010123C5 and 5300DEEF are the network numbers recognized by the server at address 00001B026C09. MARK=BULLETThe numbers 11/22 and 3/4 indicate routing information about that network. For example, the "11/" and" 3/" indicate the hop count, or number of hops (gateways or routers) from the sending server to this network. The maximum number of hops a RIP packet travels is 16. The "/22" and "/"4 indicate the number of ticks (1/18th of a second) that a packet took to reach this network from the sending server.RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM67454"Outgoing InformationOutgoing information looks similar to the following:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"MOREINFO="NONE"OUT [1986DAD0:8941A801] 11:00:01am MOREINFO="NONE"00001EEE 2/3 5300DEEF 3/4 00001EF0 5/365 MOREINFO="NONE"FADE2401 2/3 FEED00BB 4/5 ACCCDDD 5/11 The packet is outgoing from network address 1986DAD0 and from the server at node address 8941A801. The packet was sent at 11:00 am.The columns of data that follow the line labeled "OUT" are network numbers that the sending server knows about. The associated hop and tick count information is listed after each network. For an explanation of these, IDREF="FM41971"see "Incoming Information" on page 402. RENDERAS="SECT3"Connection RequestWhen a client boots and loads a NetWare RequesterTM (such as DOS Requester or OS/2 Requester), a "Get Nearest Server" request is broadcast on the network the station is cabled to.Any connected server can receive the message and respond to the station with a "Give Nearest Server" response. PAGENUM=413 ID="BP344"The station initially attaches to the first server that responds to the "Get Nearest Server" request.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Turning off the "RIP Tracking Screen"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM71704""TRACK OFF" (page 401)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Displaying advertised networks (SAP traffic)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM77986""DISPLAY NETWORKS" (page 51)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Displaying advertised servers (SAP traffic)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM65917""DISPLAY SERVERS" (page 52)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Resetting routersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM18608""RESET ROUTER" (page 249)RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=414 ID="BP345"ID="FM34468"IDXID="w10893"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i297"IDXID="w10894"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4701"
UIMPORTRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10895"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4630"
Use at a workstation to import user information from an existing database into the NetWare Directory Services (NDS) database.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UIMPORT [control file] [data file] [/C] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"control fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the file that gives UIMPORT information on how to load user data into the directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"data fileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the ASCII file that contains attribute values.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/C COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll continuously through output. UIMPORT without /C will pause after outputting each page of information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using UIMPORTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Importing User Information into the Directory Services Database" in Chapter 5 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=415 ID="BP346"ID="FM52979"IDXID="w10896"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4633"
UNBINDRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETRemove a IDXID="w10897"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1101"
communication IDXID="w10898"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3588"
protocol from the IDXID="w10899"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"
LAN IDXID="w10900"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4663"
driver of a IDXID="w10901"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4634"
network IDXID="w10902"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2846"
boardDisable communication on a specific boardRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UNBIND protocol [FROM] LAN_driver | board_name [[driver parameter...]] COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"protocol COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the protocol you want to unbind.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LAN_driver | board_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the LAN driver or the network board from which you are unbinding the protocol. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"driver parameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify one or more driver parameters if you have more than one network board of the same type in your server.IDREF="FM73015"See "UNBIND Driver Parameters" on page 407.Note: Enclose driver parameters in square brackets. PAGENUM=416 ID="BP347"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM73015"UNBIND Driver ParametersCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Driver parameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[DMA=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the DMA channel for the board. Use the same channel you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[FRAME=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the frame type for the board. Use the same frame type you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[INT=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the interrupt for the board. Use the same interrupt you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[MEM=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the memory address for the board. Use the same memory address you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[PORT=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the I/O port for the board. Use the same I/O port you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[SLOT=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the network board by the slot that it was installed in. Use this parameter with microchannel and EISA computers. Use the same slot number you did when you loaded the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"[NODE=number]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the node number of the board.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using Driver ParametersMARK=BULLETYou must tell the operating system which network board or LAN driver to unbind the communication protocol from.If you have multiple boards or LAN drivers, you must unbind each one separately.PAGENUM=417 ID="BP348"If your server has more than one instance of the LAN driver loaded, use one or more driver parameters to specify the particular board you are unbinding.To prevent a driver from binding automatically when the server boots, delete the following line from the AUTOEXEC.NCF file:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE" BIND IPX TO LAN_driver NET=numberRENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo unbind IPX from an NE3200 driver that has been loaded only once, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UNBIND IPX FROM NE3200To unbind IPX from an NE3200 driver that has been loaded more than once, using driver parameters to specify the particular network board, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UNBIND IPX FROM NE3200 [SLOT=3, FRAME=ETHERNET_II]RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Viewing a list of communication protocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM63503""PROTOCOL" (page 221).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=418 ID="BP349"ID="FM62424"IDXID="w10903"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4665"
UNLOADRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETUnload a loadable IDXID="w10904"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
module that was previously IDXID="w10905"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4663"
loaded with the LOAD commandIDXID="w10906"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4667"
Unload old NLM files so that updated modules can be loadedRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UNLOAD NLM_nameCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NLM_nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the module you want to unload. Before unloading a module, read the following section, "Unloading Modules." RENDERAS="SECT2"Unloading ModulesWhen you unload a module, all resources are returned to the system. Some modules will not unload because other modules depend on them. For example, CLIB, STREAMS, and MSM load automatically when they are needed by another module. For more information, see IDREF="FM66703""Autoloaded Modules" on page 480.You can unload LAN drivers, name space modules, or disk drivers.MARK=BULLETLAN IDXID="w10907"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"
DriversWhen you unload a LAN driver, the driver is unbound from all communication protocols and removed from all network boards it was linked to. PAGENUM=419 ID="BP350"After a LAN driver is unloaded, users with network boards that require the unloaded driver receive the following error message:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"Network error on Server <fileserver>: Error receiving from network.Abort, Retry? If this occurs, do the following:MARK=BULLETRetry once to see if an alternate route to the NetWare server is available on another network. If the retry fails, retry again after the LAN driver is reloaded and bound to the communication protocol. A user who receives the error message must reestablish a connection within 15 minutes. If the connection is broken for more than 15 minutes, the server watchdog terminates the station's connection. If the LAN driver will be unloaded for 15 minutes or longer, have users log out before unloading the LAN driver.Name IDXID="w10908"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2585"
Space ModulesBefore unloading name space modules, dismount all volumes that are using the module. These volumes cannot be remounted until the module is loaded again.To permanently delete a name space from a volume before you unload the name space module, use VREPAIR.Disk IDXID="w10909"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1114"
DriversBefore unloading a disk driver, dismount all volumes stored on the hard disks connected to the controller or host bus adapter. If you don't dismount the volumes, the system warns you that the driver is in use and lists the volumes using the driver. If you override the warning and unload the driver without dismounting the volumes, the server dismounts the volumes and notifies those who are using the volumes.PAGENUM=420 ID="BP351"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesTo unload MONITOR, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UNLOAD MONITORRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=421 ID="BP352"ID="FM86932"UPSRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeMARK=BULLETProvide the software link between your server and an IDXID="w10910"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2798"
uninterruptible IDXID="w10911"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4646"
power supply (UPS) attached to the serverActivate UPS monitoringRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]UPS [TYPE=name] [PORT=number] [DISCHARGE=number] [RECHARGE=number] [WAIT=number]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to UPS if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TYPE=nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of the hardware interface for your UPS (DCB,STANDALONE, KEYCARD, MOUSE, other). Note: If you enter STANDALONE and it is not accepted, try KEYCARD.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PORT=numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the hexadecimal number corresponding to the jumper setting on the board. Possible values for each type of board are:DCB: 346, 34E, 326, 32E, 386, 38E.Standalone: 240, 23.1Keycard: 230, 238.Mouse (no number required).Other (see board documentation).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DISCHARGE = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an estimate of the number of minutes the network can operate on IDXID="w10912"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i421"
battery power before depleting the battery. (Consult the battery's documentation.)Range: 1 to 3976821 minutes. Default:  20.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RECHARGE = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an estimate of the minutes the battery needs to fully charge.Range: 1 to 3976821 minutes. Default:  60.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"WAIT = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of seconds you want the UPS to wait following a power interruption before being activated.Range: 1 to 300 seconds. Default:  15.PAGENUM=422 ID="BP353"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using UPSMARK=BULLETYou must load a UPS hardware driver to interface with the hardware adapter board. Consult with the documentation that came with your UPS adapter board for more information on the driver you should use.If the UPS module has been loaded but a UPS hardware driver has not, you will receive an error message.You are prompted for all parameters you haven't specified except the WAIT parameter. As your UPS becomes older, you may need to decrease the discharge time or increase the recharge time. IDREF="FM54472"See "UPS TIME" on page 418 for more information.Place the LOAD UPS command in your AUTOEXEC.NCF file to load it each time the server comes up.PAGENUM=423 ID="BP354"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Adding an uninterruptible power supply (UPS)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Activating UPS Monitoring" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=424 ID="BP355"UPS STATUSID="FM43061"IDXID="w10913"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4697"RENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10914"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i421"
view information about the IDXID="w10915"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2798"
uninterruptible IDXID="w10916"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4284"
power IDXID="w10917"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4646"
supply (UPS) attached to the NetWare server.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UPS STATUS RENDERAS="SECT2"Using UPS STATUSMARK=BULLETThis command is valid only if the UPS module is loaded and either the type is specified or the UPS adapter driver module is loaded.If the UPS module has not been loaded, the error message "??? Unknown command???" is displayed when you try to execute UPS STATUS.If the UPS module has been loaded but no hardware driver has been loaded, an error message is displayed and the command is not executed. When UPS STATUS is executed, information similar to the following appears:PAGENUM=425 ID="BP356"LABEL="2-22" FLOAT="0"UPS STATUS screenFILEREF="n40ut43a.tif"The fields in the UPS STATUS display are explained in the following table.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Screen OutputCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UPS TypeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The type of hardware handling the UPS. This line shows the name of the module if there is not a recognizable UPS hardware type.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Power being usedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Possible values: Commercial, BatteryCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Discharge time requested / RemainingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Discharge time requested: an estimate of the time that the network can run safely on battery power.Remaining: the safe time remaining if the network is on battery power. If the network is running on commercial power and the battery is charged, the two values are the same.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Battery statusCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Possible values: Charged, Low, Being Charged.If the battery status is low, repair or replace the battery.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Recharge time requested / RemainingCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Recharge time requested: an estimate of the time needed to charge the battery after it has been totally discharged.Remaining: an estimate of the time needed to charge the battery in its current state.If the network is running on commercial power, the time needed to charge the battery is 0 if the battery is fully charged. If the network is running on battery power, this number increases as the battery is discharged.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Current network power statusCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Possible values are as follows:Normal: Running on commercial power.Server down: Running on battery power.Server going down in x minutes: Running on battery power; enough power is left to run the network for the indicated number of minutes. PAGENUM=426 ID="BP357"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Changing UPS time parametersCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM54472""UPS TIME" (page 418).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=427 ID="BP358"ID="FM54472"IDXID="w10918"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4698"
UPS TIMERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10919"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i421"
Change the amount of IDXID="w10920"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4646"
time you want to allow the server to function on IDXID="w10921"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2798"
battery powerChange the time you estimate the IDXID="w10922"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i421"
battery needs to charge fullyChange the time interval between a power interruption and UPS activationRENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UPS TIME [DISCHARGE=number] [RECHARGE=number] [WAIT=number]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DISCHARGE = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an estimate of the number of minutes the server can operate on IDXID="w10923"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i421"
battery power before depleting the battery. (Consult the battery's documentation.)Range: 1 to 3976821 minutes. Default:  20.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RECHARGE = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify an estimate of the minutes the battery needs to fully charge.Range: 1 to 3976821 minutes. Default:  60.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"WAIT = numberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the number of seconds you want the UPS to wait following a power interruption before being activated.Range: 1 to 300 seconds. Default:  15.PAGENUM=428 ID="BP359"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using UPS TIMEMARK=BULLETThe parameters described in the preceding table are identical to some of the parameters used when loading UPS.NLM. Use UPS TIME to change these parameters, or change them when you load UPS.NLM.If the UPS module has not been loaded, the error message "??? Unknown command???" is displayed when you try to execute UPS TIME.If the UPS module has been loaded but a UPS hardware driver has not, you will receive an error message.This command is valid only if the UPS module is loaded and either the type is specified or the UPS adapter driver is loaded.If you don't specify the DISCHARGE and RECHARGE parameters, you are prompted for them.As your UPS becomes older, you may need to decrease the discharge time or increase the recharge time. Use the UPS TIME command to change these values. Changes made with UPS TIME aren't reflected on the UPS status display until you run UPS STATUS or UPS TIME again. Changes made remain in effect until you bring down the server.RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesTo change the discharge time to 20 minutes and the recharge time to 120 minutes, typePAGENUM=429 ID="BP360"FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"UPS TIME DISCHARGE=20 RECHARGE=120
PAGENUM=430 ID="BP361"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Loading UPSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM86932""UPS" (page 412).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Viewing UPS status informationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDREF="FM43061""UPS STATUS" (page 415).RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=431 ID="BP362"ID="FM95484"VERSIONRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10924"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2803"
view the IDXID="w10925"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4766"
server's IDXID="w10926"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4761"
version information, license information, and IDXID="w10927"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i850"
copyright notice.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"VERSIONRENDERAS="SECT2"Using VERSIONWhen you execute VERSION, a message similar to the following appears:FORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"Novell NetWare 4.1   12/8/93 (c) Copyright 1988, 1993 Novell Inc .All rights reserved. Patent Pending Novell Inc. Maximum number of License Connections: 1000 Current License Chain:COLS=4 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="7*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="7*"COLNAME=4 COLWIDTH="4*"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"Serial NumberCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"ConnectionsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"License TypeCOLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"VersionCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"xxxxxxxxxCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"1000COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"MAINCOLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"4.00COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"xxxxxxxxxCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"1000COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"UPGRADECOLNAME=4 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"4.1RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=432 ID="BP363"IDXID="w10928"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4796"
VOLUMESRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console to IDXID="w10929"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
list mounted volumes.CD-ROM volumes are not displayed by this command. For more information, IDREF="FM28663"see "CD" on page 24.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"VOLUMESRENDERAS="SECT2"Using VOLUMESWhen you execute VOLUMES, a message similar to the following appears: COLS=3 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="9*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="7*"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"Mounted VolumesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"Name Spaces COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"FlagsCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"SYSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"DOSCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"Cp Sa MgThe output lists each mounted volume, its name spaces, and the flags that are set for that volume. The three possible flags are:TYPE="VERT"Cp---indicates that file compression is enabled on the volume Sa---indicates that block suballocation is enabled on the volumeMg---indicates that migration is enabled on the volumeRENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=433 ID="BP364"ID="FM19589"IDXID="w10930"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4802"
VREPAIRRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at the server console toMARK=BULLETIDXID="w10931"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i855"
Correct IDXID="w10932"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4799"
volume IDXID="w10933"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3785"
problemsIDXID="w10934"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2585"
Remove IDXID="w10935"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3771"
name space entries from Directory tablesYou can't use VREPAIR on a volume that is mounted. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"LOAD [path]VREPAIR [volume name] [log filename]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to VREPAIR.NLM if you moved it from the default directory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"volume nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the name of a volume to repair. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"log filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10936"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4801"
Specify a text filename to log errors into. RENDERAS="SECT2"Using VREPAIRMARK=BULLETIDREF="FM28580"See "VREPAIR Options" on page 426 for an explanation of the VREPAIR main menu.If a volume fails to mount when the server is brought up, VREPAIR loads IDXID="w10937"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4789"IDXID="w10938"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4789"
automatically and tries to repair the failed volume.If you don't want VREPAIR to automatically repair a volume that won't mount, load SERVMAN, select "Server Parameters," and then "Miscellaneous"; then set the "Automatically Repair Bad Volume" parameter to OFF. (For more information, IDREF="FM67672"see "SERVMAN" on page 286.)PAGENUM=434 ID="BP365"Use the version of VREPAIR that matches the operating system. (You can't use a NetWare 4 version of VREPAIR on a NetWare 3 volume.) The majority of all problems fixed by VREPAIR are caused by hardware failures. If a volume frequently needs repair, consider replacing the hard disk or controller. Copy VREPAIR.NLM and the VREPAIR name space support modules (V_NAMESPACE.NLM) to the boot partition of your server. Then, if volume SYS: fails to mount, you can load and run VREPAIR from the DOS boot directory.RENDERAS="SECT3"How VREPAIR WorksMinor problems can occur on a volume if the primary File Allocation Table (FAT) or Directory Entry Table (DET) becomes corrupted. VREPAIR compares the primary tables with their mirrored counterparts. (The operating system keeps two copies of all tables. If hard disks are mirrored, then four copies are kept.) VREPAIR checks the sets of mirrored tables for errors. If it finds inconsistencies, it uses the most correct table entry as the corrected entry. VREPAIR then writes the corrected entry to both the primary and mirrored tables. VREPAIR may have to delete some corrupted files or tables. For more information, IDREF="FM62557"see "Viewing Deleted Files" on page 429.VEPAIR will log bad block information into a file if you specify a log filename when you load VREPAIR. You can also specify a log filename after you load VREPAIR, when VREPAIR displays an error.RENDERAS="SECT3"When to Use VREPAIRVREPAIR can repair a bad volume that you have dismounted while other NetWare server volumes are functioning. After you finish running VREPAIR, you can mount the repaired volume (in most cases).PAGENUM=435 ID="BP366"Use VREPAIR whenMARK=BULLETA hardware failure either prevented a volume from mounting or caused a disk read error.Although VREPAIR can't fix hardware problems, it can sometimes fix related volume damage. A power failure corrupted a volume.The server displays memory errors and can't mount a volume after a name space (such as Macintosh) is added to the volume.For this type of problem, either add more memory to the server or use VREPAIR to remove the newly added name space.The volume has bad blocks.The following kinds of errors in FATs or Directory tables signal bad blocks:MARK=BULLETRead errorsData mirror mismatch errorsMultiple allocation errorsFatal DIR errorsWrite errorsThis information is reported in the log file. PAGENUM=436 ID="BP367"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM28580"VREPAIR Options IDXID="w10939"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4802"The IDXID="w10940"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4801"IDXID="w10941"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4801"
VREPAIR main screen displays the following menu:MOREINFO="NONE"Options: TYPE="VERT"MOREINFO="NONE" 1 - Repair a volumeMOREINFO="NONE"2 - Set VRepair optionsMOREINFO="NONE"3 - ExitCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Main Menu SelectionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Repair a volumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Begin or continue with volume repair. You can also use this option to stop a volume repair in process or change the method of displaying errors during the repair. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"Set VRepair optionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Set VREPAIR configuration options.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MOREINFO="NONE"ExitCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Exit VREPAIR.In the "Set VREPAIR Options" menu, there are two settings for each option, a default option and an alternate option. When VREPAIR autoloads and tries to repair a volume that will not mount, the default settings are used. You can configure the VREPAIR alternate options by selecting the associated option number to toggle between the alternate and default options. For example, option 2 settings are "Write All Directory And FAT Entries Out To Disk" and "Write Only Changed Directory And FAT Entries Out To Disk."The default for option 2 is "Write Only Changed Directory And FAT Entries Out To Disk." If you select option 2, your current VREPAIR configuration reflects the change from the default to the new setting: "Write All Directory And FAT Entries Out To Disk." PAGENUM=437 ID="BP368"The VREPAIR configuration options are described in IDREF="FM53919"Table 2-25.LABEL="2-25" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM53919" VREPAIR Configuration OptionsCOLS=3 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="14*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Default OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Alternate OptionCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ExplanationVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"1. Quit If a VREPAIR Name Space Support NLM Is Not LoadedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Remove Name Space Support From The VolumeCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"These options control whether name space support for non-DOS files is retained in the volume tables.If you add a name space to a volume and the system doesn't have enough memory, select "Remove Name Space Support From the Volume." Then select a name space to delete.If you remove a name space, the accompanying extended file information is destroyed.For example, if you remove Macintosh name support, the Macintosh long names, the finder icons, and the resource forks are destroyed.(The DOS name and its data file are kept and are accessible from DOS workstations.)Important: To repair a volume with non- DOS name space entries, VREPAIR must find the corresponding name space support modules. (For example, to repair a volume with the MAC name space, you need to load V_MAC.NLM; to repair a volume with the OS/2 name space, load V_OS2.NLM.)For more information on removing name space entries, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Repairing Volumes" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"2. Write Only Changed Directory And FAT Entries Out To DiskCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Write All Directory And FAT Entries Out To DiskCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"These options control the changes that are made to the FATs and Directory tables.If you repair a mirrored or duplexed volume, select the alternate option to force an update of all tables on both hard disks.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"3. Write Changes Immediately To DiskCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Keep Changes In Memory For Later UpdateCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NetWare 4.1 defaults to writing changes immediately to disk. In most cases, this default option speeds the repair. Disks requiring very few changes will repair faster if the alternate option is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"4. Retain Deleted FilesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Purge All IDXID="w10942"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i984"
Deleted FilesIDXID="w10943"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3643"COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"These options control whether deleted files are purged or retained. If a file is deleted, but not purged, it can be salvaged. Purge deleted files if you are concerned about the amount of disk space being used to retain deleted files or if you don't want users to salvage files (for example, for security reasons)COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"5. Return to Main MenuCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"After you select the VREPAIR configuration options, press menu item 5 to return to the VREPAIR main menu.PAGENUM=438 ID="BP369"RENDERAS="SECT3"Displaying Errors During RepairIDXID="w10944"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4801"
There are run-time options you can modify during the VREPAIR process to change the way errors are displayed. To view the options, select the main menu option "Repair a volume."MARK=BULLETSelect Option 1 if you do not want VREPAIR to pause after each error.Select Option 2 if you want VREPAIR to log errors in a text file.PAGENUM=439 ID="BP370"Select Option 3 to stop the repair of the volume.Select Option 4 to continue with a volume repair after you have temporarily suspended the repair. RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM62557"Viewing Deleted FilesIDXID="w10945"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4801"
The repair operation can create new files containing data that VREPAIR deleted. You can access these files if you select the default configuration option "Retain Deleted Files." The files are numbered and named VRNNNNNN.FIL where N is any number.These numbered files are created in any of the following circumstances:MARK=BULLETVREPAIR IDXID="w10946"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1484"
found a filename that is an invalid DOS name. The filename might contain invalid characters or might be too long.VREPAIR found that the filename is not unique. (Another file exists with the same name.) VREPAIR found a FAT chain without a file showing ownership of it.A file is divided into a series of data blocks that are linked together in a FAT chain.No files in the Directory Entry Table (DET) claimed ownership of the data, so a new filename was generated to point to this data. VREPAIR might create as many as several thousand of these files.These numbered files are created in the directory where they were found during the volume repair operation. RENDERAS="SECT3"Recovering FilesIDXID="w10947"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4801"
You mightIDXID="w10948"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1484"
 be able to recover some or all of the files deleted by VREPAIR. Contact Technical Support for more information. PAGENUM=440 ID="BP371"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Repairing a volume or removing name space entriesCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Repairing Volumes" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ID="FM81692"Setting VREPAIR optionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Repairing Volumes" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=441 ID="BP372"ID="FM99876"WHOAMIRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10949"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4823"
Use at a workstation to IDXID="w10950"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i783"
view connection information. RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WHOAMI [servername] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"servername COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace with the server name whose connection information you want to see.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM71717"See "WHOAMI Options" on page 432.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.RENDERAS="SECT2"Using WHOAMIWHOAMI displays the following information when no parameters are entered.MARK=BULLETIf you are logged in to NetWare Directory Services, you seeMARK=BULLETThe current tree nameYour other namesYour titlesYour descriptionYour User ID (name) on each server to which you are attachedPAGENUM=442 ID="BP373"The name and version information of each serverThe server's connection number for your connection and the type of the connection (Bindery or Directory Services)The date and time when you logged in to the server.If you are attached to a server in bindery mode, you seeMARK=BULLETYour workgroup managerYour security equivalencesGroups to which you belongYour bindery object's supervisorYour rights to files and directories on the serverRENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM71717"WHOAMI OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/C (Continuous)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Scroll output continuously.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ALL (All)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View all information.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/G (Group)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the groups you belong to (bindery).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/O (Object Supervisor)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the supervisor of the object (bindery).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/R (Right)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View effective rights (bindery).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/S (Security Equivalences) COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View security equivalences of the object (bindery).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/W (Workgroup Manager)COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the workgroup manager of the object (bindery).PAGENUM=443 ID="BP374"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SecurityCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Security" in Concepts.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=444 ID="BP375"IDXID="w10951"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4358"ID="FM91675"WSUPDATERENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeIDXID="w10952"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1447"
Use at a IDXID="w10953"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4859"
workstation to update a file on multiple drives and subdirectories.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE [<source path> [drive letter: | volume name:] [path\filename] [/option...]] | [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use to specifyVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"source pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The path of the file you are updating from, including the filename. You can't use wildcard characters.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"drive letterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A directory to search for outdated files. To search all mapped drives, use the /ALL option.To search all local drives, use the /Local option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"volume nameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"An NDS Volume object.To search an NDS volume for outdated files, enter the full Volume object name relative to your current context.To search all mapped drives, use the /ALL option.To search all local drives, use the /Local option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"path\filenameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A specific path, including the filename, so the search does not begin at the root.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM27241"See "WSUPDATE Options" on page 436.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute.PAGENUM=445 ID="BP376"RENDERAS="SECT2"Using WSUPDATEMARK=BULLETUse to update workstation files from the server.WSUPDATE compares the date and time of the source and destination files. If the source file is more current, WSUPDATE updates the destination file.If you update a file, but want to keep a copy of the old one, use the /R option.WSUPDATE can be run from a batch file. In that case, you may want to use options such as /L, /F, or /P.PAGENUM=446 ID="BP377"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM27241"WSUPDATE OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ALLCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search all mapped drives. You can't specify a drive or volume with this option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Copy the new file over the old one, with no backup of the old file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CONCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Continuously scroll the output.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Erase the existing log file. Use with the /L option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/F=[path\file]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify a file where the commands to update the workstation are stored. All other options are ignored when you use this option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/LOCALCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Search all local drives. You can't specify a drive or volume with this option.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/L=[path\file]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the location and filename of a log file where WSUPDATE can store information. The log file can be erased with the /E option or with a DOS delete command.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Create the directory specified by the destination drive and path.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/PCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Get a prompt asking you whether to proceed. If there are no files to be updated, this option allows you to abort the session before it begins.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/OCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Tell WSUPDATE to update all files, even those flagged Read Only.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/RCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Rename the old file with an .OLD extension before copying the new file.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/SCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify that WSUPDATE should search for the outdated files in all subdirectories of the destination path.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/V[=path]COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Update the CONFIG.SYS file in the root directory of the C: drive with the string LASTDRIVE=Z. Your old CONFIG.SYS file is renamed to CONFIG.VLM. If your CONFIG.SYS file is not in the root of drive C:, then type the path up to, but not including, the filename.If the CONFIG.SYS file already has a LASTDRIVE= parameter, it is replaced with LASTDRIVE=Z.If your CONFIG.SYS file doesn't have a LASTDRIVE= parameter, WSUPDATE will add one.PAGENUM=447 ID="BP378"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo search all mapped drives and copy over old NET5.COM files, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE VOL:SYSTEM\NET5.COM /ALL /CTo search local drives and rename the old NET5.COM files, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE VOL:SYSTEM\NET5.COM /LOCAL /RTo specify source instruction file, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE /F=C:\INFILE.UPDTo copy all files with the .VLM extension to the new directory C:\VLM, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE *.VLM C:\VLM /NTo update the CONFIG.SYS file in the root of drive C:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE /V
PAGENUM=448 ID="BP379"To update the CONFIG.SYS file in the ODI directory on drive C:, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPDATE /V C:\ODIRENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using WSUPDATE in login scriptsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="ws_d1enu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using the WSUPDATE Utility" in Appendix A of NetWare Client for DOS and MS Windows User Guide.RENDERAS="SECT1"PAGENUM=449 ID="BP380"ID="FM58426"WSUPGRDRENDERAS="SECT2"PurposeUse at a workstation to upgrade the IPX LAN driver on the workstation to the corresponding ODI driver.RENDERAS="SECT2"SyntaxFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPGRD [path] [/option...] [/? | /VER]COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ParameterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"pathCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specify the path to and including the existing IPX driver name. Default: \IPX.COM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/optionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Replace option with any available option. IDREF="FM48538"See "WSUPGRD Options" on page 440.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/?COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View online help. All other parameters are ignored when /? is used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/VER COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"View the version number of the utility and the list of files it uses to execute. All other parameters are ignored when /VER is used.PAGENUM=450 ID="BP381"RENDERAS="SECT3"ID="FM48538"WSUPGRD OptionsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OptionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Use toVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/CCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cause the utility to exit with error level 1 if no upgrade is performed.By default, the utility exits with no error code whether or not an upgrade is performed. This allows a batch file to conditionally perform other upgrade actions.If an error occurs, the utility exits with an error level 3, whether or not /C is specifiedCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/NCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cause the utility to not delete the IPX driver.By default the old driver is deleted before the ODI driver is installed. Note: If /N is specified and the ODI driver has the same name as the IPX driver, the former will overwrite the latter---deleting it even if /N is specified.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/E0 | E1 | E2COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Control the changes that the utility makes to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.Default: E2.E0: Specify that no changes be made to the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.E1: Specify that the line which loads the IPX driver is to be deleted (if it is present) from the AUTOEXEC.BAT file and replaced by lines to load the LSL, ODI driver, and the IPX driver.E2: Specify that the line that loads the IPX driver is to be deleted (if present) from the AUTOEXEC.BAT file and replaced by a call to a new batch file called NWSTART.BAT which is to be created to load the LSL, the ODI driver, and IPX. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/SCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Suppress the generation of a NET.CFG file from the information in the IPX driver's configuration table.Note: A NET.CFG file may be generated even if this switch is present if an LDC file is present with the ODI driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"/ICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Cause the utility to print out the hardware ID in the master configuration table of the ODI driver. You cannot use this option with any other option.If this switch is specified, no upgrade is performed and thus no other switches are allowed.PAGENUM=451 ID="BP382"RENDERAS="SECT2"ExamplesMARK=BULLETTo save the IPX driver and update the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPGRD NE2000 /N /E1To print out the hardware ID, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPGRD NE2000 /ITo specify the location of the IPX driver for upgrading, typeFORMAT="LINESPECIFIC"MOREINFO="NONE"WSUPGRD NE2000 c:\NE2000.COM
PAGENUM=452 ID="BP383"RENDERAS="SECT2"Additional InformationCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TopicCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SeeVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Using WSUPGRD in login scriptsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0""BOOK="ws_d1enu" COLLECTION="nw41"Using the WSUPGRD Utility" in Appendix B of NetWare Client for DOS and MS Windows User Guide.LABEL="A"PAGENUM=443 ID="BP384"ID="FM97054"NDS and Bindery Objects and PropertiesRENDERAS="SECT1"IDXID="w10954"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3048"
NDS Object Classes and PropertiesMARK=BULLETIDREF="FM66693""NDS Object Classes" on page 444 lists each NDS object class, explains what it is used for, and indicates where that type of object can be created.IDREF="FM31823""NDS Object Classes and Their Properties" on page 446 lists each NDS object and properties associated with it.IDREF="FM75391""Bindery Objects, Their Properties, and Property Groups" on page 452 lists each bindery object and properties associated with it.PAGENUM=444 ID="BP385"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM66693"NDS IDXID="w10955"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3043"
Object IDXID="w10956"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3043"
ClassesID="FM72389"COLS=3 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="8*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Object classCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"What this object is used forCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Objects that contain this objectVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AFP ServerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AliasCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Redirects the path of a branch or leaf of the Directory tree in another location for more convenient accessCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational Unit  Root levelCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery ObjectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents an object that was upgraded from a bindery-based server, but that cannot be identifiedCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery QueueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ComputerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents computers on the network that are not file or print servers, such as gateways, routers, and sometimes workstationsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"No containment restrictions at the root levelCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CountryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Defines countries in the Directory tree to help organize objectsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Must be at root levelCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory MapCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specifies a path on a volume that points to a frequently used directory for an applicationCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GroupCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Defines an unordered list of users that comprise a group for purposes of assigning access rightsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NetWare ServerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents a server that provides file and other servicesCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OrganizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Defines an organization within the networkCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Country or root levelCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organizational RoleCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Defines a position or role within an organization for the purpose of assigning access rightsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organizational UnitCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Defines a subdivision within an organization to contain objectsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Print Server COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents a network print serverCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Printer COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents a physical printing device on the networkCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ProfileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Specifies a login script that is used by several users not located in the same containerCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"QueueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents a batch processing queue for printing on the networkCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UserCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents a user on the networkCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VolumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Represents a physical volume within a NetWare file serverCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organization  Organizational UnitPAGENUM=446 ID="BP386"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM31823"NDS Object Classes and Their PropertiesID="FM13354"COLS=3 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="6*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="10*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ObjectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PropertiesCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AFP ServerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Serial Number  Supported Connections  Descriptions  Host Device  L  OU  O  Private Key  COLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Public Key  Resource  See Also  Status  User  Version  Network Address  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AliasCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Aliased Object Name  Object Class  ACLCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery ObjectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery Object Restrictions  Bindery Type  CN  Object ClassCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bindery QueueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Bindery Type  Queue Directory  Host Server  Object Class  Device  Operator  Server  User  Network AddressCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Volume  Description  Host Resource Name  L  OU  O  See Also  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ComputerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Operator  Server  Status  Description  L  Network AddressCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OU  O  Owner  See Also  Serial Number  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CountryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"C  Object Class  DescriptionCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Directory MapCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Host Server  Object Class  Path  Description  Host Resource Name  LCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OU  O  See Also  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GroupCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Description  L  Member  OU  OCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Owner  See Also  GID  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NCP ServerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Operator  Supported Services  Description  Host Device  L  OU  O  Private KeyCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Public Key  Resource  See Also  Status  User  Version  Network Address  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OrganizationCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"O  Object Class  Description  Facsimile Telephone Number  L  Login Script  EMail Address  Physical Delivery Office Name  Postal Address  Postal Code  Postal Office Box  Print Job Configuration  Printer ControlCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"See Also  S  SA  Telephone Number  Login Intruder Limit  Intruder Attempt Reset Interval  Detect Intruder  Lockout After Detection  Intruder Lockout Reset Interval  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organizational RoleCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Description  Facsimile Telephone Number  L  EMail Address  OU  Physical Delivery Office Name  Postal AddressCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Postal Code  Postal Office Box  Role Occupant  See Also  S  SA  Telephone Number  ACL  Back Link  Bindery ProperlyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Organizational UnitCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OU  Object Class  Description  Facsimile Telephone Number  L  Login Script  EMail Address  Physical Delivery Office Name  Postal Address  Postal Code  Postal Office Box  Print Job Configuration  Printer ControlCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"See Also  S  SA  Telephone Number  Login Intruder Limit  Intruder Attempt Reset Interval  Detect Intruder  Lockout After Detection  Intruder Lockout Reset Interval  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Print ServerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Operator  Print  SAP Name  Description  Host Device  L  OU  O  Private KeyCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Public Key  Resource  See Also  Status  User  Version  Network Address  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PrinterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Object Class  Cartridge  Printer Configuration  Default Queue  Host Device  Print Server  Memory  Network Address Restrictions  Notify  Operator  Page Description Language  QueueCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Status  Supported Typefaces  Description  L  Network Address  OU  O  Owner  See Also  Serial Number  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ProfileCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Login Script  Object Class  Description  L  OUCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"O  See Also  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"QueueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Queue Directory  CN  Host Server  Object Class  Device  Operator  Server  User  Network Address  VolumeCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Description  Host Resource Name  L  OU  O  See Also  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UnknownCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Unknown Object Restriction  Object ClassCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UserCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Surname  Object Class  Group Membership  Home Directory  Login Allowed Time Map  Login Disabled  Login Expiration Time  Login Grace Limit  Login Grace Remaining  Login Intruder Address  Login Intruder Attempts  Login Maximum Simultaneous  Login Script  Login Time  Network Address Restrictions  Network Address  Passwords Used  Password Allow Change  Password Expiration Interval  Password Expiration Time  Password Minimum Length  Password Required  Password Unique Required  Print Job Configuration  Private Key  Public Key  Security EqualsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Account Balance  Allow Unlimited Credit  Minimum Account Balance  Message Server  Language  UID  Locked By Intruder  Server Holds  Last Login Time  Type Creator Map  Facsimile Telephone Number  L  EMail Address  OU  Physical Delivery Office Name  Postal Address  Postal Code  Postal Office Box  S  SA  Title  Description  See Also  Telephone Number  ACL  Back Link  Bindery Property  COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VolumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CN  Host Server  Object Class  Status  Description  Host Resource Name  LCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OU  O  See Also  ACL  Back Link  Bindery PropertyPAGENUM=452 ID="BP387"RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM75391"Bindery IDXID="w10957"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i438"
Objects, Their Properties, and IDXID="w10958"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i438"
Property GroupsCOLS=3 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="8*"COLNAME=3 COLWIDTH="8*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ObjectCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PropertiesCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Property GroupsVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GroupCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name  Description  Managers  Member  Object IDCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(All Groups)  Misc  Managers  Members  MiscCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"QueueCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name  Directory  Object ID  Operators  Servers  UsersCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(All Groups)  Directory  Misc  Operators  Servers  UsersCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ServerCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name  Attachment Status  Object ID  Network  Node  Version  Accounting Installed  Maximum Volumes  Maximum Connections  Connections In UseCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(All Groups)  Misc  Network  Network  Attachment Information  Attachment Information  Attachment Information  Attachment Information  Attachment Information  Attachment InformationCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UserCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name  Network  Node  Connection Number  Login Time  Object ID  Account Disabled  Account Expiration Date  Password Allow Change  Password Required  Password Force Change  Password Expiration Days  Password Expiration Date  Password Length  Unique Password  Grace Logins  Grace Logins Remaining  Maximum Connections  Last Login  Groups  Managers  Security EqualsCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Misc  Misc  Misc  Misc  Misc  Misc  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Login Control  Groups  Managers  Security EqualsCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VolumeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Name  ServerCOLNAME=3 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(All Groups)  ServerLABEL="B"PAGENUM=455 ID="BP388"ID="FM71375"LAN Driver StatisticsRENDERAS="SECT1"Monitoring Network IDXID="w10959"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4542"
TrafficBy comparing information about LAN IDXID="w10960"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"
drivers installed on your server, you can tell which cabling system is handling the most traffic.If IDXID="w10961"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4577"
errors occur frequently on a 
high-traffic IDXID="w10962"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2887"
system, you may want to switch some of the stations on the busy system to a new or less busy cabling system. For information on how to view LAN driver IDXID="w10963"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4276"
statistics, see "BOOK="superenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Viewing LAN Driver Statistics" in Chapter 7 of Supervising the Network.RENDERAS="SECT2"Common LAN Driver StatisticsThe generic IDXID="w10964"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1598"
statistics common to most of the drivers are maintained by two modules in NetWare that are autoloaded by LAN drivers. The modules are:MARK=BULLETThe IDXID="w10965"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2365"IDXID="w10966"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2365"
Media Support ModuleTM (MSM.NLM)The IDXID="w10967"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4532"
Topology Specific ModuleTM (TSM.NLM)There are four TSMs. The one that is autoloaded will depend on your server's LAN driver. The four are: ETHERTSM (Ethernet), RXNETTSM (ARCnet), TOKENTSM (token ring), and FDDITSM.For more information on the MSM and the TSMs, see "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Open Data-Link Interface" in Concepts.These common LAN driver statistics can be viewed with MONITOR. Select the "LAN/WAN Information" option from the MONITOR menu, and then select a driver. The system displays a window containing both the generic and custom statistics for the selected driver.Brief descriptions of the statistics maintained by the MSM and each of the TSMs are found in the following tables:PAGENUM=456 ID="BP389"MARK=BULLETIDREF="FM29860"Table B-1, "LAN Driver Statistics," on page 457IDREF="FM41817"Table B-2, "Generic Statistics for Ethernet Drivers That Use ETHERTSM.NLM," on page 461IDREF="FM92979"Table B-3, "Generic Statistics for RX-Net Drivers That Use RXNETTSM.NLM," on page 462IDREF="FM35138"Table B-4, "Generic Statistics for Token Ring Drivers That Use TOKENTSM.NLM," on page 463IDREF="FM50872"Table B-5, "Generic Statistics for FDDI Drivers That Use FDDITSM.NLM," on page 465RENDERAS="SECT2"Custom LAN Driver StatisticsCustom IDXID="w10968"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i904"
statistics describe LAN activity for specific LAN device drivers. The custom LAN driver statistics can be viewed with MONITOR. Select the "LAN/WAN Information" option from the MONITOR menu, and then select a driver. The system displays a window containing both the generic and custom statistics for the selected driver.Brief descriptions of statistics for selected drivers are found in the following tables:MARK=BULLETIDREF="FM58972"Table B-6, "Custom Statistics for NE2000, NE2, NE2_32, NE1000, and Other Ethernet Drivers," on page 466IDREF="FM76722"Table B-7, "Custom Statistics for Token Ring Drivers," on page 474IDREF="FM54933"Table B-8, "Custom Statistics for IBM Baseband PCN2L Drivers," on page 477Custom statistics vary, depending on the LAN driver installed. For statistical information about third-party drivers, check the documentation that comes with the driver.If your network board is not listed in the custom statistics section, contact the manufacturer of the board and its driver for custom statistics documentation. PAGENUM=457 ID="BP390".IDXID="w10969"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"ID="FM22058"LABEL="B-1" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10970"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2034"ID="FM29860" LAN Driver StatisticsCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Driver NameCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The driver name and parameters that correspond to the hardware settings on the network board.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"VersionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The current version of the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Node AddressCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The station or node address of the network board in the NetWare server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ProtocolsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The communication protocols bound to the driver with BIND.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Network AddressCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The network number assigned to the cabling system the LAN driver is operating on. Appears only if the IPX protocol has been bound to the board.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Packets SentCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of packets sent from the NetWare server through this LAN driver since the server was last booted.(By comparing this figure with the figures for other LAN drivers, you can see which driver is handling the most traffic.) This value is maintained by the Topology Specific Module (TSM).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Packets ReceivedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of packets received by the NetWare server since it was last booted. This includes file service requests, packets routed to another network, and packets sent to other IPX sockets in the NetWare server.This value is maintained by the TSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"No ECB Available CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when a device sends a packet to your NetWare server, but no packet receive buffer is available.The server allocates more packet receive buffers after each incident until it reaches its maximum limit (configured with a SET parameter).If you are using an EISA or microchannel bus-master board (such as the NE3200), you will probably need to increase both the minimum and maximum number of packet receive buffers. See "Minimum Packet Receive Buffers" and "Maximum Packet Receive Buffers" in IDREF="FM88068""SET" on page 291"SET" on page 291.No ECB Available Count messages can also indicate that the driver is not configured correctly or tha the TSM and the Hardware Specific Module€ (HSM) are incompatible.This value is maintained by the TSM. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Packet Too Big CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when the NetWare server tries to transmit a packet that is too large for the hardware to handle. This value is maintained by the TSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReservedCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This field is not currently used.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Receive Packet Overflow CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The LAN driver uses this counter to indicate the number of times the adapter's receive buffers overflowed, causing subsequent incoming packets to be discarded. This value is a counter that is incremented when the NetWare server receives a packet that is too big to store in a cache buffer. This happens rarely, unless you are running a software program that does not negotiate packet size. Contact the vender for an updated version of the software.This value is maintained by the HSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Receive Packet Too Big CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when the NetWare server receives a packet that is too big for the provided receive buffers. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Receive Packet Too Small CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when the NetWare server receives a packet that is too small.Currently only the RX-Net TSM maintains this counter.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Packet Miscellaneous ErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when errors with send packets occur. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Receive Packet Miscellaneous ErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when errors with receive packets occur. This value is maintained by the HSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Packet Retry CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when the NetWare server tries to send a packet but fails because of a hardware error. The server tries to send the packet until either it succeeds or the retry setting is reached. This value is maintained by the HSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Checksum ErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when the checksum byte at the end of the packet does not match the sum of the bytes contained in the packet. This indicates a data error. This value is maintained by the HSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Hardware Receive Mismatch CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented when the packet length received by the hardware and the length specified by the packet do not match. Currently only the Ethernet Topology Specific Module (TSM) maintains this counter. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Send OK Byte Count LowCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of bytes, including low-level headers, successfully transmitted. This value is maintained by the Media Support Module (MSM). COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Send OK Byte Count HighCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Upper 32 bits of the Total Send OK Byte Count Low. The Total Send OK Byte Count High statistic is incremented to 1 when the Total Send OK Byte Count Low counter reaches 4 GB. This value is maintained by the MSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Receive OK Byte Count LowCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of bytes, including low-level headers, successfully received. This value is maintained by the MSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Receive OK Byte Count HighCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Upper 32 bits of the Total Receive OK Byte Count Low. The Total Receive OK Byte Count High statistic is incremented to 1 when the Total Receive OK Byte Count Low value reaches 4 GB. This field is maintained by the MSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Group Address Send CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of packets transmitted with a group or multicast destination address. This field is maintained by the MSM. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Total Group Address Receive CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of packets received with a group or multicast destination address. This field is maintained by the MSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Adapter Reset CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of times the adapter was reset because of internal failures or other calls to the Driver Reset routine. This field is maintained by the HSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Adapter Operating Time StampCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The time stamp indicating when the adapter last changed operational state (such as load, shutdown, or reset). This value is maintained by the MSM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Adapter Queue DepthCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of transmit packets (transmit ECBs) that are queued for the adapter. This is an indication of throughput overload on transmits. This field is maintained by the TSM.PAGENUM=461 ID="BP391"LABEL="B-2" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10971"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1354"ID="FM41817" Generic Statistics for Ethernet Drivers That Use ETHERTSM.NLMCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send OK Single Collision CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of frames involved in a single collision that are subsequently transmitted successfully. When the Ethernet controller detects a collision, it backs off and then retries the transmission.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send OK Multiple Collision CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of frames involved in more than one collision that are transmitted successfully. This happens if the Ethernet controller had to back off more than once due to collisions. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send OK But DeferredCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of frames whose transmission was delayed because of a busy medium. This happens if another station is transmitting on the wire when the adapter receives the command to transmit a packet.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Abort From Late CollisionCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of transmits that had a collision after 512 bits of the packet were transmitted. This can be caused by faulty adapters, faulty network equipment, cables that are too long, or faulty terminators.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Abort From Excess CollisionsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of transmits that were aborted because of too many collisions. This usually indicates that a board in the network is bad or jabbering. (Jabbering means the board has been on the channel longer than the time needed to transmit the maximum size packet.)This condition could also occur in very heavy traffic conditions.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Abort From Carrier SenseCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of transmits aborted because of loss of carrier sense while transmitting without any collisions. This is usually caused by a faulty adapter in the network, faulty cabling, an unterminated cable, or a faulty repeater.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Send Abort From Excessive DeferralCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of transmits aborted because of excessive deferrals. This is usually caused by a faulty adapter or repeater in the system that is jabbering on the wire. It can also occur under very heavy traffic conditions.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Receive Abort From Bad Frame AlignmentCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of received frames that were misaligned.This occurs when the number of octets in the frame is not correct or the frame does not pass the FCS check.These bad packets are usually caused by a faulty adapter or repeater in the system. They can also be caused by a collision.ID="FM67954"PAGENUM=462 ID="BP392"LABEL="B-3" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10972"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i284"ID="FM92979" Generic Statistics for RX-Net Drivers That Use RXNETTSM.NLMCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NoResponseToFreeBufferEnquiryCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time there is no response from the receiving node to a Free Buffer Enquiry.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NetworkReconfigurationCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time a Network Reconfiguration occurs.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"InvalidSplitFlagInPacketFlagCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time the Split Flag in the packet fragment is not the value expected. Packet fragments received out of order can cause this value to increase.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OrphanPacketFragmentCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time a packet fragment is received that is not a part of a previously received packet and therefore cannot be appended.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReceivePacketTimeoutCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time a received packet times out while waiting for the rest of the packet fragments to arrive.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FreeBufferEnquiryNAKTimeoutCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time a transmit packet times out while waiting for an acknowledgment to a Free Buffer Enquiry from the receiving node.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TotalSendPacketFragmentsOKCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time a packet fragment is sent successfully. This number is high because packets are made up of multiple fragments. For example a 4-KB packet is actually eight 512-byte packet fragments.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TotalReceivePacketFragmentsOKCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A counter that is incremented each time a packet fragment is received successfully.This number is high because packets are made up of multiple fragments. For example a 4-KB packet is actually eight 512-byte packet fragments.PAGENUM=463 ID="BP393"LABEL="B-4" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10973"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4516"IDXID="w10974"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4523"ID="FM35138" Generic Statistics for Token Ring Drivers That Use TOKENTSM.NLMCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"AC Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a ring station receives a "Standby Monitor Present" MAC frame with the A/C bits in the Frame Status field equal to zero without first receiving an "Active Monitor Present" MAC frame.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Abort Delimiter COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a ring station transmits an abort delimiter. An abort delimiter is transmitted when a ring station receives a frame in which the token bit of the access control field is set to show "Token" and not "Frame." A ring station can also transmit an abort delimiter if an internal hardware error has occurred.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Burst Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a ring station detects the absence of "five half-bit times" (a burst-five error).Other stations will detect a burst-four error followed by idles. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Frame Copied Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a ring station recognizes (receives or repeats) a frame addressed to its specific address and detects that the FC field A bits are set to 1, indicating a possible line hit or a duplicate address.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Frequency Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when the frequency of the incoming signal differs from the expected frequency by more than that specified in Section 7 of IEEE Standard 802.5-1989.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Internal Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counts the times a ring station has a recoverable internal error, which means a ring station is probably marginal.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Last Ring StatusCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This code changes each time the ring status changes. Status codes are reported by the physical hardware.See the IBM Token-Ring Network Architecture Reference for the status code, function, and meaning.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Line Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a frame or token is repeated by the ring station. A frame is repeated when a Frame Check Sequence error occurs or a code violation exists between the starting and ending delimiters of the frame.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Lost Frame CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a ring station transmits a frame that does not return to the station. The active monitor sends a new token.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Token Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a station acting as the active monitor recognizes an error condition that needs a token transmitted. This occurs when the TVX timer expires.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Up Stream Node High DwordCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The first eight digits of the Up Stream node address of the next node up stream on the ring.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Up Stream Node Low DwordCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The next four digits of the Up Stream node address of the next node up stream on the ring.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Last Ring IDCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This contains the value of the local ring ID.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Last Beacon TypeCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This contains the value of the last beacon type.PAGENUM=465 ID="BP394"LABEL="B-5" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10975"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1437"ID="FM50872" Generic Statistics for FDDI Drivers That Use FDDITSM.NLMCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Configuration StateCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The attachment configuration for the station or concentrator:0=isolated; 1=local_a; 2=local_b; 3=local_ab; 4=local_s; 5=wrap_a; 6=wrap_b; 7=wrap_ab; 8=wrap_s; 9=c_wrap_a;  10=c_wrap_b; 11=c_wrap_s; 12=thruCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Upstream Node AddressCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The upstream neighbor's MAC address (0 if unknown).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Downstream Node AddressCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The downstream neighbor's MAC address (0 if unknown).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Frame Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of frames that were detected in error by this MAC that had not been detected in error by another MAC.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Frames Lost CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The number of instances that this MAC detected a format error during frame reception such that the frame was stripped.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Ring Management StateCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Indicates the current state of the Ring Management state machine:0=Isolated; 1=Non_Op; 2=Ring_Op; 3=Detect; 4=Non_Op_Dup; 5=Ring_Op_Dup; 6=Directed; 7=TraceCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LCT Failure CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The count of the consecutive times the link confidence test (LCT) has failed during connection management.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LEM Link Reject CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The link error monitor (LEM) count of the times that a link was rejectedCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"LEM Error CounterCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The aggregate link error monitor (LEM) error count.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Connection StateCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"The state of this port's Physical Connection Management (PCM) state machine:0=Off; 1=Break; 2=Trace; 3=Connect; 4=Next; 5=Signal; 6=Join; 7=Verify; 8=Active; 9=MaintPAGENUM=466 ID="BP395"LABEL="B-6" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"IDXID="w10976"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2031"IDXID="w10977"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1354"ID="FM58972" Custom Statistics for NE2000, NE2, NE2_32, NE1000, and Other Ethernet DriversCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UnderrunErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when the RAM buffer on the network board is full; the board cannot accept any more packets until the RAM buffer is cleared.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TransmitTimeoutCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a network board interrupts the file server with the message that the send bit is lost. This is a hardware problem caused by faulty cabling, a bad network board, or a missing terminator.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RxPagingErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This is a count of the errors that occur when internal buffers on the card are corrupted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReceiveFIFOOverrunErrorCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when an incoming packet causes an overflow because FIFO was not serviced.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReceiverMissedPacketCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a packet is sent to a network board that cannot accept the packet because all its receive buffers are full. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GotNothingCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when the file server receives an interrupt from a network board that is not transmitting or receiving anything.This is not serious.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UnsupportedFramePacketCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when a packet is received by the LAN driver with a frame type that hasn't been loaded for the given board.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UnsupportedMulticastCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented for each multicast packet received by the board that is not registered with the driver.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BackToBackSendCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented each time the driver can buffer a send packet onto the network board while the board is sending a previous buffer.Use this counter to track congestion on the network board.See also "EnqueuedSendsCount."COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ID="FM74888"EnqueuedSendsCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"This counter is incremented when the driver is unable to transmit a packet and must put the packet in a queue until the transmitter is available.Use the counter to track congestion on the network board.See also "BackToBackSendCount."COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"In32BitModeCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE1000 only) This counter is incremented if a network board is ever found in 32-bit mode.(Currently, workstations run in 8-bit mode.)Occasionally, older NE1000 boards have bad chips that make the boards go into 32-bit mode.If this counter is ever incremented, there is probably an older board on the network. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HeartBeatError COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE2100 or NE1500T) This counter is incremented when there is a signal quality error. This function is also known as the heartbeat or Signal Quality Error (SQE) test. This counter indicates a hardware problem.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MemoryTimeoutCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE2100 or NE1500T) This counter is incremented when there is contention on the bus. If this counter is incremented, there may be multiple boards in the server or another bus-mastering device in the server, such as a LAN or disk channel device.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TxBabblingErrorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE2100 or NE1500T) This counter is incremented when there is excessive length in the transmit buffer. It will increment after 1519 data bytes have been transmitted from the buffer. It indicates that the transmitter has been on the channel longer than the time required to send the maximum length packet. If this counter is incremented, it indicates a hardware problem with the network interface card in the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TxUnderflowErrorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE2100 or NE1500T) This counter is incremented when something else on the bus takes control of the bus while the LAN driver is putting the data on the wire. If this occurs, the packet must be retransmitted.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TXBufferErrorCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE2100 or NE1500T) This counter is incremented when there is a problem with the transmit buffer. This counter is usually incremented when TxUnderflowError is incremented; it indicates a hardware problem in the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RxECBsOver16MegCount  TxECBsOver16MegCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE2100 or NE1500T) One of these counters is incremented when either a transmit or receive occurs and the driver has double buffered the ECB in the reserved buffers below 16 MB in memory. These boards require double buffering because they have a physical limitation that prevents them from accessing memory above 16 MB. Therefore, if the operating system issues an Event Control Block (ECB) with a memory address above 16 MB, the board uses some of the reserved buffers below 16 MB to queue the request. These are not errors. This value tracks how many ECBs are redirected to the buffers below 16 MB.In many cases, this counter can be as high as the total packets sent and received. This double buffering decreases performance. If you have more than 16 MB of RAM and a board that is bus- mastering or using DMA that is not a 32-bit adapter, performance may be degraded.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PacketUsed2ECBsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0" (NE2100 or NE1500T) This counter is incremented if the Server Maximum Physical Receive Packet Size is set to 1514 bytes (default for NetWare 3.11 servers), and you need to receive a near-full-size packetIn this instance, two ECBs are used instead of one, since the CRC on the end of the packet requires an extra four bytes.Using two ECBs instead of one may decrease performance slightly.Note: For Netware 3.12 and 4.x the default Maximum Physical Receive Packet Size is 4202.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TransmitRetryFailureCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter is incremented when the driver is unable to transmit a packet after a specified number of times. This may indicate a hardware problem.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TxClearToSendsErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks an 82586 error.There are some conditions when the Clear to Send signal from the 82586 chip is incorrect. This counter indicates the number of times the corrective code on the adapter was executed to work around this condition in the 82586.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TxDMAUnderrunErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks an 82586 error.Contention among the BMIC, 80186, and 82586 can occur on the adapter, causing the 82586 to assume it did not receive all of the packet for transmission. The transmit operation must then be retried. This counter indicates the number of times the corrective code on the adapter was executed to work around this condition.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RxDMAOverrunErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks an 82586 error. If two packets are received back-to-back at close to 9.6 microseconds (the minimum Ethernet interframe spacing), then the chip may report an overrun. If so, the frames are lost by the chip and the source must retransmit.This counter indicates the number of times this error has occurred.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RxPacketSlideErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks the number of instances of an 82586 anomaly.In some conditions, the 82586 may be off by two bytes in the receive packet descriptors. In this case, the sending station must retransmit the packet.This counter indicates the number of times this condition has occurred. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RxDummyRCBUsedErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks an 82586 error.In some cases, the 82586 may attempt to receive data into a nonexistent receive buffer at the end of its receive buffer list. To catch this condition and avoid internal data corruption, a dummy receive buffer is added to the end of the list. This variable counts the number of times the 82586 attempted to write into the dummy buffer.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"InternalAdapterResetCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counts the number of resets (by the 80186) that occurred on the adapter due to failures on the adapter. This counter is incremented when the software corrects itself for minor problems or if the adapter is in an unknown state. It is common for this counter to be incremented. Under normal conditions, more of these errors should occur during idle time than when the driver is busy. This counter would only indicate a hardware problem if it registered thousands of these errors when the network is busy.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MondoFragmentLengthErrorsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks the number of instances in which an NLM on the server has passed the NE3200 driver an ECB whose logical memory address could not be translated to a physical memory address.You should check other NLMs on the system and upgrade them. If you are still experiencing problems, identify which NLM is causing the problem and contact the third-party manufacturer of the NLM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PollingTimeoutCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter tracks the number of times the adapter's request was put on the queue but was not serviced within 800 nanoseconds (default). After this occurs, the adapter fires an interrupt.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ResetBecauseHardwareDiedError sCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) If the adapter is in an unknown state or stops transmitting on the host side, the driver increments this counter and resets or restarts the adapter. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"NumberOfInterruptsFiredCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE3200) This counter is incremented each time the adapter had to fire an interrupt to service a request because the polled request wasn't serviced.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FIFOUnderRunCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented during high utilization or high bus usage if a packet cannot be sent. This event should rarely occur.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ByteCountMismatchCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the transmit packet size is not equal to the sum of fragments passed to the SONIC chip on the board. This event should rarely occur.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HardTransmitErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when a CRC, Excessive Deferral, ByteCount MismatchCount, or FIFOUnderRunCount occurs on a transmit.This is a general transmit error counter.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TransmitCollisionsCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the board can't transmit on the wire.If the board requires five tries to transmit the packet, this counter is incremented by 4.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"OutOfWindowCollisionCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when an illegal collision occurs.Collision should normally occur during the preamble. This counter is incremented if the collision occurs after the preamble.This event should rarely occur.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"CRCErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when a packet with a bad CRC is received by the card.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FIFOOverrunCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when a packet with errors is received.The driver looks at the FIFO overrun counter to determine if there are errors.If there are errors, the packet is thrown away.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RDAExhaustCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the driver can't take the data out of the buffer fast enough to process it, and the Receive Descriptor Area has overflowed.This should not happen very often, but it is more likely under high utilization.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RRAExhaustCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the driver can't take the data out of the buffer fast enough to process it, and the Receive Resource Area has overflowed. This shouldn't occur very often, but it is more likely to occur during high usage.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RBAExceedCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the driver can't take the data out of the buffer fast enough to process it, and the Receive Buffer Area has overflowed. This shouldn't occur very often, but is more likely to occur during high usage.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"FlagFoundCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the RIC chip on the adapter reports an error such as Jabber, Out of Window Collision, etc. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PacketsCompressedCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the driver is in promiscuous mode and is looking at every packet. To get management information efficiently, the driver copies only the first 50 bytes of the packet into the buffer and then adds the 7 bytes of management information to the end of the packet.This occurs only on the packets that are not destined for the server when the driver is loaded with PCOMP=ENABLE (default).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"RICAddressWasInvalidCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the RIC address was corrupted on a receive management packet. The driver expects this number to be correct. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TxTimeOutCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when a transmit doesn't occur in 2 seconds.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Port0ErrorCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the port address is set to zero.The port address should always be between 1 and 12.This will not occur frequently.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"PortBigErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the port address is above 13.The port address should always be between 1 and 12.This will not occur frequently.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ValidCRCCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(NE32HUB) This counter is incremented when the Management Information overlaying the CRC is correct.The Management Information should be incorrect.This event should rarely occur.ID="FM51388"IDXID="w10978"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4516"PAGENUM=474 ID="BP396"ID="FM84919"LABEL="B-7" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM76722" Custom Statistics for Token Ring DriversCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Bad Correlator CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKEN, NTR2000) This counter is incremented when a network board responds with a request for data from the file server that the file server does not have. The ECB or some other code may be corrupted. Eventually, this error will abend the server. If this counter is non-zero, you should try to find the software that is corrupting the data.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Unknown ARB requestsCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKEN, NTR2000) This counts bad Adapter Request Blocks (ARBs). Normally the network board (adapter) uses one of four known commands to communicate with the driver. If a network board sends a command that is not one of the four, the driver does not recognize the request. This error is not a catastrophic error. Sometimes old adapters send bad ARB requests because of software problems on the board. NetWare responds to the network board so that the board will not hang.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"MicroChannel Error CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter tracks the number of times the adapter had a problem transmitting on the bus. The adapter interrupt occurred from the firmware on the card.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ECBs Over 16MegCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter tracks the number of packets received that had to use an ECB over 16 MB. This number should only increment when more than 16 MB of RAM is used in the server.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DMA Bus Errors CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter is incremented when a DMA transfer completes with a bus error. If this counter is incremented, it could indicate a hardware problem.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DMA Parity Errors CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter is incremented when a DMA transfer completes with a parity error. If this is incremented, it could indicate a hardware problem.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Command Reject CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter is incremented when the driver sends a command to the board and the command is either invalid or the board is still busy processing the previous command. This number should be zero or a low number.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Tx Timeout CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter is incremented and the adapter is reset if 2 seconds elapse before the driver learns from the firmware that the transmit was or wasn't successful. This counter shows the driver is successfully recovering from the lost hardware transmit. It isn't a problem if this number is incremented. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Transmit Late CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter is incremented when the firmware reports that the card transmitted more than it actually did. After this event occurs, the data that wasn't transmitted will be sent in the next packet. This problem is more likely to occur on busier networks. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Transmit Defragment CountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(TOKENDMA) This counter tracks how many ECBs are redirected to the buffer below 16 MB.The IBM Token-Ring DMA LAN boards are not able to access memory above 16 MB. Therefore, if the operating system issues an Event Control Block (ECB) with a memory address above 16 MB, the board uses some of the reserved buffers below 16 MB to double buffer the ECB. These are not errors. In many cases, this counter can be as high as the total packets sent and received. However, this double buffering decreases performance.If the system has more than 16 MB of RAM and a board that is bus-mastering or using DMA that is not a 32-bit adapter, performance may decrease.PAGENUM=477 ID="BP397"LABEL="B-8" PGWIDE=1 TOCENTRY="1"ID="FM54933" Custom Statistics for IBM Baseband PCN2L DriversCOLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="13*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="21*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"StatisticCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HotCarrierInterruptCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when the board detects a carrier longer than expected without a transmit. This indicates that some board on the network has failed or is beginning to fail.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"No82588InterruptCount COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented each time the server receives an interrupt from the board, but not from the 82588 chip. This should very seldom, if ever, happen.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"WeirdInterruptCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when the server has received an interrupt from the board, but the board claims not to have sent one. This should very seldom, if ever, happen.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BadTransmitComplete- InterruptCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented for each complete transmission with no transmit active. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"HardTransmitErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when a transmit fails and the driver retries the transmit.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"GotNothingCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when the driver receives an interrupt from the board indicating that it has completed a receive but there is no data in the board's receive buffer. This is not serious. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReceiveUnderrunErrorCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when the driver finds less data in the board's buffer than the board reported.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ReceivedShortPacketCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when a packet of less than 17 bytes is received.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"BadReceiveConditionCodeCountCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(PCN2L) This counter is incremented when the buffer is flushed because the board hasn't received the incoming packets properly.LABEL="C"PAGENUM=479 ID="BP398"Memory Domains for NLMs and Autoloaded NLMsRENDERAS="SECT1"Memory IDXID="w10979"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1171"
Domains for NLMsA NetWare® Loadable ModuleTM program IDXID="w10980"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3587"
(NLM) can run in either the OS domain or the OS_PROTECTED domain. (To determine the recommended memory domain for a third-party NLM, check the documentation that came with the NLM.)Most NetWare NLM programs can be loaded in either the OS_PROTECTED or the OS domain. However, some can be loaded only in the OS domain.RENDERAS="SECT2"IDXID="w10981"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
NLMs That Must Be Loaded in the OS DomainIDXID="w10982"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3125"TYPE="VERT"CDROMDISKSETINSTALLIPXSMONITORNMAGENTPSERVERREMOTERPLRS232RSPXRTDMSPXCONFGSPXSTLIUPSVREPAIRPAGENUM=480 ID="BP399"RENDERAS="SECT2"Modules with IDXID="w10983"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4133"IDXID="w10984"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"IDXID="w10985"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1171"
Shared LibrariesThe following modules with shared libraries can be accessed by modules from any domain:TYPE="VERT"IDXID="w10986"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
CLIBMATHLIBMATHLIBCNUTNWSNUTSTREAMS RENDERAS="SECT2"ID="FM66703"IDXID="w10987"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i368"
Autoloaded IDXID="w10988"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2758"
ModulesThese modules normally don't need to be loaded or unloaded. Some modules, such as DS.NLM, cannot be unloaded.COLS=2 CHAROFF="50" CHAR="" ALIGN="LEFT"COLNAME=1 COLWIDTH="10*"COLNAME=2 COLWIDTH="16*"VALIGN="BOTTOM"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"ModuleCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DescriptionVALIGN="TOP"COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10989"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i140"
AFTER311COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"In NetWare 4, this NLM is a stub required by some NLMs. In NetWare 3, this NLM provides functionality to allow some NetWare 4 NLM files to work on a NetWare 3 server. In most cases, you don't need AFTER311.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10990"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i145"
AIOCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Used with RS232. Will load with IDXID="w10991"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i679"
AIOCOMX (COM port driver).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10992"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i256"
APPLETLKIDXID="w10993"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Supports the AppleTalk protocol suite. Used by any NLM that requires communication through the AppleTalk protocol suite. Autoloaded by ATFLT, AURP, ADSP, and MACIPXGW. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10994"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i643"
CLIBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Provides library calls to modules that require them. If CLIB is not loaded and is required by an NLM, that NLM usually autoloads CLIB. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10995"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i776"
CONLOGCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Autoloaded if you use INETCFG to configure protocols. Keeps a log of console activity from the time the server is booted.Note: View the log from INETCFG.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10996"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i891"
CSLSTUBCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"A stub NLM that provides the routines for modules that use CSL (Call Support Layer). CSL provides WAN access. An NLM using CSLSTUB will only allow LAN connectivity. Autoloaded by FILTCONV, APPLETLK, IPXRTR, IPXCON, FILTSVER, and INETCFG. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10997"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1244"
DSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Critical for running any NetWare Directory ServicesTM (NDS) applications. The OS will not allow you to unload this NLM. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10998"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1247"
DSICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Installs NDS during server installation. Loaded and unloaded as needed by INSTALL. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w10999"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1249"
DSLOADERCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"DSLOADER autoloads DS.NLM. DSLOADER is not a separate NLM, but is bound into the server. The OS will not allow you to unload this NLM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11000"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1508"
FILTSVRCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Supports protocol filtering. It communicates filtering configuration from the FILTCFG utility to the Appletalk, TCP/IP, and IPX protocol modules. Autoloaded by FILTCFG, ATFLT, IPFLT, and IPXFLT. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11001"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1746"
ICMDCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Allows script extensions for the installation loadable module. This utility is autoloaded when needed. Don't load this NLM directly.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11002"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1972"
IPXRTRIDXID="w11003"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Supports IPX and NLSP protocols. This NLM is used by any other NLM that requires communication using IPX/NLSP. (NLSP is the NetWare Link Service Protocol link state routing protocol used by IPX.) Autoloaded by IPXCON and IPXFLT. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IPXRTRNMIDXID="w11004"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1973"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Manages the IPX/NLSP protocols. It is used by any NLM that requires Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management information from IPXRTR.NLM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11005"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3603"
IPXSIDXID="w11006"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i1974"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"STREAMS-based IPX protocol. Autoloaded by NLM files that require the STREAMS- based IPX protocol. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11007"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2550"
MSMIDXID="w11008"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i2365"COLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Media Support Module. This NLM is autoloaded by some LAN device drivers. It maintains certain LAN driver statistics.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11009"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3026"
NUTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Used with NetWare 3.11 loadable modules that require NUT's library of routines and functions.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11010"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3036"
NWSNUTCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Used with NetWare 4 loadable modules that require NWSNUT's library of routines and functions.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11011"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3038"
NWTILCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Required by DOMAIN.NLM. NWTIL is autoloaded when you load DOMAIN.NLM. This NLM is required each time you load NLM files into the OS PROTECTED domain. Once you have loaded these modules, you can unload this NLM to reclaim memory.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11012"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3039"
NWTILRCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Required by DOMAIN.NLM This NLM is autoloaded when you load DOMAIN.NLM.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11013"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i3927"
RTDMCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"(Real Time Data Migration) Required by HCSS.NLM to enable migration. It is autoloaded by HCSS.NLMCOLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11014"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4177"
SMDRCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SMS Data Requestor. This is automatically loaded by SBACKUP and other modules, and is unloaded manually only if unloading SBACKUP.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11015"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4181"
SMSDICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"SMS Storage Device Interface. This is automatically loaded by SBACKUP, and is unloaded manually only if unloading SBACKUP.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11016"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4304"
STREAMSCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"Provides a common interface between NetWare and transport protocols such as IPX/SPX, TCP/IP, AppleTalk, and OSI. This NLM is autoloaded by CLIB and other modules that provide access to protocols.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11017"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4508"
TLICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"An application programming interface that sits between STREAMS and applications, allowing interface with transport level protocols such as IPX/SPX or TCP/IP.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TSMCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11018"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4604"IDXID="w11019"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4532"
Topology Support Module. This NLM is autoloaded by some LAN device drivers. This NLM maintains certain LAN driver statistics. The NLM that is autoloaded depends on your server's LAN driver. Some of the modules are: 
ETHERTSM (Ethernet), IDXID="w11020"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4523"
TOKENTSM (token ring), 
RXNETTSM (Arcnet) and 
PCN2LTSM (PCN2L).COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TIMESYNCCOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11021"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4500"IDXID="w11022"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4490"
A module bound into SERVER.EXE that coordinates network time synchronization between NetWare servers. Critical for NetWare Directory Services. Don't unload this NLM. COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"TUICOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11023"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4606"
Textual User Interface. Used by NWSNUT utilities to provide a common look across NLM programs. Autoloaded by INETCFG, INETLIB, SPXCONFG, FILTCONV, TCPCON, ATCON, IPXCON, FILTCFG.COLNAME=1 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"UNICODECOLNAME=2 ROTATE="0" MOREROWS="0"IDXID="w11024"BOOK="_idx" COLLECTION="nw41" TIDREF="i4642"
A module bound into SERVER.EXE that translates code from the server language to Unicode. (For more information, see "BOOK="cncptenu" COLLECTION="nw41"Unicode" in Concepts.) NetWare Directory Services depends on UNICODE. Don't unload this NLM. PAGENUM=483 ID="BP400"